Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout38130 Pretty Pond Rd (2)STATE OF FLORIDA NEW GENERATOR AMERICAN HOUSE ZEPHYRHILLS i i i i ,MIAMI N 38130 Pretty Pond Rd. Zephyrhills, Florida 33540 MECHANICAL/ ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING @�WIAGDG ENGINEERING MECHANICAL I ELECTRICAL I PLUMBING I FIRE PROTECTION I TELECOMMUNICATIONS APG Engineering www.amengineering 4825 140th Avenue North Phone (727) 530-0077 Clearwater, Florida 33762-3822 Fax (727) 530-0045 CA5947 The Ott Graf & Bar Ginger Ave Pumpkin Ave Came/ J R are€kfast Statiarl YL . "'Hibachi Express zephythifts _a] Arn Ct Papa ahti's P.izz, The Cat)adian N�li A�.f Dru rye �e PROJECT LOCATION CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, 10/19/18 CIVIL ENGINEER BEAU BLACKSTOCK ENGINEERING UNLIMITED, INC. 146 2nd Street N, Suite 310 St. Petersburg, Florida 727.258.0044 www.BlackstockENG.com FL Cert. Of Auth. No. 32307 SHEET INDEX SHEET NUMBER SHEET NAME CIVIL C1.0 SITE, GRADING, UTILITIES PLAN STRUCTURAL S1.0 STRUCTURAL PLAN & DETAILS ELECTRICAL E0.1 ELECTRICAL NOTES, LEGENDS, AND SHEET INDEX E1.1 ELECTRICAL PARTIAL SITE PLAN E2.1 ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLAN E2.2 ENLARGED ELECTRICAL ROOM AND GENERATOR LOCATION E3.1 ELECTRICAL DETAILS _ ELECTRICAL DETAILS E3.2 E4.1 ELECTRICAL RISER DIAGRAM AND PANEL SCHEDULES E5.1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS E5.2 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS E5.3 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ESA ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS E5.5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS E5.6 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS E6.1 ELECTRICAL COORDINATION STUDY AND FAULT CURRENT STUDY PLUMBING P0.1 PLUMBING NOTES, SCHEDULES, LEGENDS, AND SHEET INDEX P1.1 PLUMBING OVERALL SITE PLAN P2.1 PLUMBING -NEW CONSTUCTION PLAN STRUCTURAL ENGINEER BEAU BLACKSTOCK ENGINEERING UNLIMITED, INC. 146 2nd Street N, Suite 310 St. Petersburg, Florida 727.258.0044 www.BlackstockENG.com FL Cert. Of Auth. No. 32307 REVIEW DATE :3 / CITY OF ZEPHYRH LLS FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY EXAMINER ALL WORK SHALL COMPLY WITH NFFA CODES AND STANDARDS U 2018 APG ENGINEERING ------------------------------------------- --- I - _ 11 - i ! - -1 1.----- -- GENERAL CONSTRUCTION NOTES 1. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED HEREIN, THESE PLANS HAVE BEEN PREPARED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING DOCUMENTS A. PASCO COUNTY LAND DEVELOPMENT CODE B. PASCO COUNTY WATER, WASTEWATER, AND RECLAIMED WATER TECHNICAL MANUAL AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS C. PASCO COUNTY TRANSPORTATION TECHNICAL MANUAL D. FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION E. FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION ROADWAY AND TRAFFIC DESIGN STANDARDS THE ABOVE NOTED DOCUMENTS SHALL BE THE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THIS PROJECT. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN AND FULLY FAMILIARIZE HIMSELF WITH THE CONTENTS OF SAID SPECIFICATIONS. IN THE EVENT THAT A DISCREPANCY OCCURS BETWEEN THESE PLANS AND THE AFOREMENTIONED SPECIFICATIONS, THE SPECIFICATIONS SHALL TAKE PRECEDENCE, UNLESS OTHERWISE DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER IN WRITING. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL HAVE A SET OF THESE PLANS MARKED "APPROVED FOR CONSTRUCTION" ALONG WITH A COPY OF ALL THE DOCUMENTS NOTED ABOVE ON THE PROJECT SITE AT ALL TIMES. 2. ALL SPECIFICATIONS AND DOCUMENTS REFERRED TO IN THESE PLANS SHALL BE OF THE LATEST REVISION. 2. PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION COMMENCEMENT, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN FROM THE ENGINEER AND/OR THE DEVELOPER COPIES OF ALL PERTINENT PERMITS AND APPROVALS RELATED TO THIS PROJECT. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BECOME FAMILIAR WITH THE PERMIT CONDITIONS AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED BY THE PERMITS AND VARIOUS GOVERNMENTAL AGENCIES. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROPERLY POST ALL PERMITS ON -SITE AND TO ASSURE ALL CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES ARE IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE CONDITIONS OF ALL PERMITS AND APPROVALS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SCHEDULE ANY NECESSARY INSPECTIONS ACCORDING TO AGENCY INSTRUCTIONS. 3. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR VERIFYING THE LOCATION OF ALL UTILITIES WHETHER OR NOT THEY ARE INDICATED ON THESE PLANS, AND SHALL NOTIFY ALL UTILITY OWNERS A MINIMUM OF 48 HOURS IN ADVANCE OF CONSTRUCTION COMMENCEMENT. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY AND COORDINATE WITH ALL UTILITY COMPANIES AND GOVERNING AGENCIES NECESSARY FOR CONSTRUCTION OF THE PROJECT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PASCO COUNTY PLANNING AND GROWTH MANAGEMENT, TECO, VERIZON, AND BRIGHTHOUSE NETWORKS. CALL SUNSHINE ONE (811) PRIOR TO ANY EXCAVATION. 4. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ASSURE AND BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE PROPER PLACEMENT AND MAINTENANCE OF ALL TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES REQUIRED FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THIS PROJECT. 5. AREAS DISTURBED BY THE CONTRACTOR OUTSIDE OF THE CONSTRUCTION SITE SHALL BE RESTORED TO A CONDITION EQUAL TO OR BETTER THAN THE PRE -CONSTRUCTION CONDITION; THIS INCLUDES LANDS OWNED BY THE DEVELOPER. 6. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT UNDERTAKE ANY WORK HE FEELS WILL CONSTITUTE A CHANGE ORDER WITHOUT THE WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER AND THE OWNER. 7. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT TO THE ENGINEER, FOR HIS REVIEW, ALL SHOP DRAWINGS A MINIMUM OF SEVEN (7) WORKING DAYS IN ADVANCE OF THE CONTRACTOR'S NEED FOR SAME. 8. ALL EXISTING WELLS TO BE ABANDONED SHALL BE PROPERLY ABANDONED BY A LICENSED WATER WELL CONTRACTOR IN ACCORDANCE WITH SWFWMD RULES 40D-3 AND 17-21.10(4) F.A.C. 9. PRIOR TO BIDDING, CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE TOPOGRAPHICAL INFORMATION AS SHOWN ON THE CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS AND ACCEPT THE SITE (ACCURATE TO 0.5 FEET OF THE CONTOUR INTERVAL AND 0.2 FEET OVERALL) AS REPRESENTED. COMMENCEMENT OF SITE IMPROVEMENTS SHALL BE INTERPRETED AS ACCEPTANCE BY CONTRACTOR OF ALL REPRESENTATIONS IN CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. 10. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL MAINTAIN A SET OF FIELD "AS BUILTS" FOR ALL IMPROVEMENTS NOTING ANY FIELD ADJUSTMENTS. THE "AS BUILT" SHALL INCLUDE VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL LOCATIONS OF ALL GRAVITY UTILITY SYSTEMS INCLUDING SLOPE OF PIPES; TYPES OF PIPE FOR UTILITY SYSTEMS IF DIFFERENT FROM DESIGN; TOP OF BANK AND TOE OF SLOPE FOR ALL STORMWATER PONDS, STORMWATER CONTROL STRUCTURE AND OUTFALL PIPE DATA (WEIR WIDTHS AND ELEVATIONS, ORIFICE SIZES AND ELEVATIONS, TOP OF STRUCTURE ELEVATIONS, INVERT ELEVATION OF OUTFALL PIPE, ETC.); UTILITY CROSSING DETAILS IF DIFFERENT FROM DESIGN; HORIZONTAL LOCATION OF PRESSURE PIPE SYSTEMS IF DIFFERENT FROM DESIGN LOCATIONS; AND ALL OTHER DATA INDICATING DEVIATIONS FROM DESIGN AS APPLICABLE. PRIOR TO FINAL PAYMENT, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO SUBMIT A CERTIFIED SET OF "AS BUILTS", PREPRED INACCORDANCE WITH F.A.C. RULE 61G17-6.004(1), TO THE ENGINEER. EACH SHEET OF THE PLANS SHALL BE SIGNED, SEALED AND DATED BY A PROFESSIONAL LAND SURVEYOR LICENSED TO PERFORM LAND SURVEYING SERVICES IN THE STATE OF FLORIDA. THE ENGINEER SHALL REVIEW THE "AS BUILTS" AND CONVERT THEM INTO RECORD DRAWINGS. 11. CONTRACTOR TO OBTAIN ALL REQUIRED PERMITS FOR BURNING ON SITE, IF ALLOWED. 12. DEVELOPER SHALL PROVIDE SOILS AND MATERIALS TESTING SERVICES FROM A LICENSED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER AT HIS OWN EXPENSE. CONTRACTOR SHALL COOPERATE WITH THE OWNER'S GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER AND SHALL NOTIFY THE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER AT LEAST 24 HOURS PRIOR TO ANY TESTING REQUIRED BY THE PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, REPORTS, AND/OR GOVERNMENTAL AGENCIES, OR AS RECOMMENDED BY GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER. IF A FAILURE IN ANY OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES RELATED TO SOILS OR MATERIALS TESTING OCCURS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL IMMEDIATELY REMEDY THE FAILURE AT HIS EXPENSE AND RE -SCHEDULE THE RE -TESTING AS NECESSARY. ALL RE -TESTING FEES FROM THE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER RESULTING FROM THE AFORESAID FAILURES SHALL BE AT THE CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE. 13. OWNER AND CONSULTANT CONTACT INFORMATION: DEVELOPER: AH ZEPHYRHILLS LLC C/O ALTUS GROUP PO BOX 92129 SOUTHLAKE TX 76092-0102 ENGINEER: BLACKSTOCK ENGINEERING UNLIMITED, INC. 146 2ND STREET N, SUITE 310 ST. PETERSBURG, FLORIDA 33701 ATTENTION: JESSE L. BLACKSTOCK, P.E. TELEPHONE (727) 220-9440 14. WORK PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INTERFACE SMOOTHLY WITH OTHER WORK BEING PERFORMED ON SITE OR ADJACENT TO THE SITE BY OTHER CONTRACTORS AND UTILITY COMPANIES. IT WILL BE NECESSARY FOR THE CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE AND SCHEDULE HIS ACTIVITIES, WHERE NECESSARY, WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS AND UTILITY COMPANIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO DUKE ENERGY, VERIZON, AND SPECTRUM NETWORKS. 15. OVERALL CLEANUP SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED BY THE CONTRACTOR IN ACCORDANCE WITH PASCO COUNTY STANDARDS, OR AS DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER AND OWNER. 16. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROTECT AND MAINTAIN ACCESS TO PRIVATE PROPERTY. ANY DAMAGE CAUSED BY THE CONTRACTOR IN THE PERFORMANCE OF HIS WORK SHALL BE CORRECTED TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE ENGINEER AND THE OWNER AT THE CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE. 17. ANY DAMAGE TO STATE, COUNTY, OR LOCAL ROADS CAUSED BY THE CONTRACTOR'S HAULING OR EXCAVATION EQUIPMENT SHALL BE REPAIRED BY THE CONTRACTOR TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE ENGINEER, THE OWNER, AND THE APPLICABLE GOVERNMENTAL AGENCY. 18. ANY U.S.C. & G.S. MONUMENT WITHIN LIMITS OF CONSTRUCTION IS TO BE PROTECTED BY THE CONTRACTOR. SAFETY 1. DURING THE CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE OF THIS PROJECT, ALL SAFETY REGULATIONS ARE TO BE ENFORCED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE TOTALLY RESPONSIBLE FOR THE CONTROL AND SAFETY OF THE TRAVELING PUBLIC AND THE SAFETY OF HIS PERSONNEL. 2. LABOR SAFETY SHALL CONFORM TO THE PROVISIONS SET FORTH BY THE OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION (OSHA). 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND MAINTAIN ITS OWN SAFETY EQUIPMENT IN ACCORDANCE WITH ITS HEALTH & SAFETY PROGRAM AND ALL OTHER APPLICABLE LEGAL AND HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR IS ALSO RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING ITS EMPLOYEES AND SUBCONTRACTORS WITH ADEQUATE INFORMATION AND TRAINING TO ENSURE THAT ALL EMPLOYEES AND SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS' EMPLOYEES COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS. CONTRACTOR SHALL REMAIN IN COMPLIANCE WITH ALL OCCUPATION SAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS AS WELL AS THE ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION LAWS. THE FOLLOWING IS NOT TO BE PERCEIVED AS THE ENTIRE SAFETY PROGRAM BUT JUST BASIC REQUIREMENTS. 4. ALL EXCAVATIONS BY THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE DEPARTMENT OF LABOR'S OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION (OSHA) RULES AND REGULATIONS. PARTICULAR ATTENTION MUST BE PAID TO THE CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS FOR EXCAVATIONS, 29 CFR PART 1926, SUBPART P. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROTECTING EXCAVATIONS AGAINST COLLAPSE AND WILL PROVIDE BRACING, SHEETING OR SHORING AS NECESSARY. DEWATERING METHODS SHALL BE USED AS REQUIRED TO KEEP TRENCHES DRY WHILE PIPE AND APPURTENANCES ARE BEING PLACED. ALL SUBSURFACE CONSTRUCTION SHALL COMPLY WITH THE STATE OF FLORIDA'S TRENCH SAFETY ACT (F.S. 553.60). 5. DURING CONSTRUCTION, ALL SAFETY REGULATIONS OF THE FOOT SHALL BE OBSERVED AND THE CONTRACTOR SHALL TAKE ALL MEASURES NECESSARY IN ORDER TO SAFLEY CONDUCT THE PUBLIC, AND WORKMEN, THROUGH THE PROJECT AREA AND PUBLIC RIGHT-OF-WAYS. THE DESIGN APPLICATION, INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL OF ALL TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES, WARNING DEVICES AND BARRIERS SHALL BE PROVIDED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FEDERAL MANUAL OF UNIFORM TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES (MUTCD) AND FDOT'S DESIGN STANDRDS, INDEXES 600-670. 6. IT SHALL BE THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO COMPLY AND ENFORCE ALL APPLICABLE SAFETY REGULATIONS. THE ABOVE INFORMATION HAS BEEN PROVIDED FOR THE CONTRACTOR'S INFORMATION ONLY AND DOES NOT IMPLY THAT THE OWNER OR ENGINEER WILL INSPECT AND/OR ENFORCE SAFETY REGULATIONS. 7. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL EXERCISE EXTREME CAUTION IN AREAS OF BURIED UTILITIES AND SHALL PROVIDE AT LEAST 48 HOURS NOTICE TO THE UTILITY COMPANIES PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION TO OBTAIN FIELD LOCATIONS OF EXISTING UNDERGROUND UTILITIES. CALL SUNSHINE ONE (811) TO ARRANGE FIELD LOCATIONS. EROSION PROTECTION 1. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR SITE CONDITIONS FROM THE DATE OF NOTICE TO PROCEED, UNTIL THE PROJECT IS ACCEPTED BY THE OWNER, ENGINEER AND HILLSBOROUGH COUNTY. ACCORDINGLY, THE CONTRACTOR IS SOLEY RESPONSIBLE AND SHALL MANAGE HIS WORK AND TAKE ALL NECESSARY STEPS TO CONTROL FUGITIVE DUST, CONTROL AND PREVENT EROSION, AND TRANSPORT OF SEDIMENT INTO EXISTING WETLANDS, DRAINAGE WAYS, CONSERVATION AREAS, NATURAL AREAS AND OFFSITE AREAS, AS WELL AS NEWLY CONSTRUCTED ROADWAYS, STORMWATER FACILITIES AND MITIGATION AREAS. THIS MAY REQUIRE ADDITIONAL MEASURES FROM THOSE SHOWN ON THE CONSTRUCTION PLANS, SUCH AS WINDROWS, DIVERSION SWALES, SEED & MULCH, STAKED HAY BALES, OR OTHER EROSION CONTROL MEASURES NECESSARY TO REACT TO VARYING SITE CONDITIONS OR INCLEMENT WEATHER. IF EROSION OCCURS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL IMMEDIATELY REMEDY THE DAMAGE CAUSED BY SUCH EROSION BY CONTROLLED REMOVAL OF SEDIMENTS, REPLANTING IF NECESSARY AND RE-ESTABLISHMENT OF EROSION PROTECTION DEVICES, AT THE CONTRACTOR'S SOLE EXPENSE. 2. SEE PLAN ENTITLED EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PLAN FOR ADDITION REQUIREMENTS STATE OF FLORIDA NATIONAL POLLUTANT DISCHAGE ELIMINATION SYSTEM (NPDES THE CONTRACTOR ACKNOWLEDGES THE REQUIREMENT OF THE STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION (FDEP), WHICH HAS PUBLISHED RULES FOR OBTAINING COVERAGE UNDER THE STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION GENERIC PERMIT FOR STORMWATER DISCHARGES FROM LARGE AND SMALL CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES. IN OCTOBER 2000, EPA AUTHORIZED THE FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION (DEP) TO IMPLEMENT THE NPDES STORMWATER PERMITTING PROGRAM IN THE STATE OF FLORIDA (IN ALL AREAS EXCEPT INDIAN COUNTRY LANDS). DEP'S AUTHORITY TO ADMINISTER THE NPDES PROGRAM IS SET FORTH IN SECTION 403.0885, FLORIDA STATUTES (F.S.). THE NPDES STORMWATER PROGRAM REGULATES POINT SOURCE DISCHARGES OF STORMWATER INTO SURFACE WATERS OF THE STATE OF FLORIDA FROM CERTAIN MUNICIPAL, INDUSTRIAL AND CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES. AS THE NPDES STORMWATER PERMITTING AUTHORITY, DEP IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROMULGATING RULES AND ISSUING PERMITS, MANAGING AND REVIEWING PERMIT APPLICATIONS, AND PERFORMING COMPLIANCE AND ENFORCEMENT ACTIVITIES. THE CONTRACTOR AGREES TO ASSIST THE OWNER IN THE PREPARATION, AND IMPLEMENTATION, OF A STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN (SWPPP). THE EPA HAS PUBLISHED SUMMARY GUIDANCE FOR: "DEVELOPING POLLUTION PREVENTION PLANS AND BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES" (EPA 832-R-92-005, SEPTEMBER 1992). CLEARING/DEMOLITION 1. PRIOR TO ANY SITE CLEARING, ALL TREES SHOWN TO REMAIN AS INDICATED ON THE CONSTRUCTION PLANS SHALL BE PROTECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL TREE ORDINANCES AND DETAILS CONTAINED IN THESE PLANS. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO MAINTAIN THESE TREES IN GOOD CONDITION. NO TREE SHOWN TO REMAIN SHALL BE REMOVED WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL FROM HILLSBOROUGH COUNTY AND THE OWNER. 2. DURING LAND ALTERATION AND CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES, IT SHALL BE UNLAWFUL TO REMOVE VEGETATION BY GRUBBING OR TO PLACE SOIL DEPOSITS, DEBRIS, SOLVENTS, CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL, MACHINERY OR OTHER EQUIPMENT OF ANY KIND WITHIN THE DRIPLINE OF TREES TO REMAIN ON THE SITE UNLESS OTHERWISE APPROVED BY HILLSBOROUGH COUNTY. 3. RESIDUAL MATERIAL THAT RESULTS FROM CLEARING AND GRUBBING, OR SITE EXCAVATION, IS TO BE UTILIZED ON -SITE AS NECESSARY, PROVIDED THAT THE MATERIAL IS DEEMED SUITABLE FOR CONSTRUCTION BY THE OWNER'S GEOTECHNICAUSOILS TESTING COMPANY. EXCESS SUITABLE MATERIAL IS TO BE EITHER STOCKPILED ON THE SITE AS DIRECTED BY THE OWNER OR OWNER'S ENGINEER, OR REMOVED FROM THE SITE. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ACQUIRING ANY PERMITS THAT ARE NECESSARY FOR REMOVING EXCESS EARTHWORK FROM THE SITE. 4. ALL CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS AND OTHER WASTE MATERIALS SHALL BE DISPOSED OF OFF -SITE BY THE CONTRACTOR IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE STATE AND LOCAL REGULATIONS. PAVING AND GRADING 1. ALL DELETERIOUS SUBSURFACE MATERIAL (I.E. MUCK, PEAT, BURIED DEBRIS) IS TO BE EXCAVATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THESE PLANS OR AS DIRECTED BY THE OWNER OR THE OWNER'S GEOTECHNICAL CONSULTANT / SOIL TESTING COMPANY. DELETERIOUS MATERIAL IS TO BE REMOVED FROM THE SITE, UNLESS OTHERWISE DIRECTED BY THE OWNER. EXCAVATED AREAS TO BE BACK FILLED WITH SUITABLE MATERIALS AND COMPACTED AS SHOWN ON THESE PLANS, OR AS DIRECTED BY THE OWNER'S GEOTECHNICAL CONSULTANT / SOIL TESTING COMPANY. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ACQUIRING ANY PERMITS THAT ARE NECESSARY FOR REMOVING DELETERIOUS MATERIAL FROM THE SITE. 2. ALL NECESSARY FILL AND EMBANKMENT THAT IS PLACED DURING CONSTRUCTION SHALL CONSIST OF SUITABLE MATERIAL SPECIFIED BY THE OWNER'S GEOTECHNICAL CONSULTANT / SOIL TESTING COMPANY, OR ENGINEER, AND BE PLACED AND COMPACTED ACCORDING TO THESE PLANS OR THE REFERENCED SOILS REPORT. 3. PROPOSED SPOT ELEVATIONS REPRESENT TOP OF FINISHED PAVEMENT OR GROUND SURFACE GRADE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON DRAWINGS. 4. CONTRACTOR SHALL TRIM, TACK AND MATCH EXISTING PAVEMENT AT LOCATIONS WHERE NEW PAVEMENT MEETS EXISTING PAVEMENT. 5. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATING NECESSARY TESTING WITHTHE OWNER'S OILS TESTING COM PANY. TESTS WILL BE REQUIRED, AT A MINIMUM, PURSUANT TO INDIAN RIVER COUNTY TESTING SCHEDULE. UPON COMPLETION OF PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION, SOILS TESTING COMPANY WILL SUBMIT CERTIFICATIONS TO THE OWNER'S ENGINEER STATING THAT ALL REQUIREMENTS HAVE BEEN MET. 6. ALL UNDERGROUND UTILITIES, INCLUDING UTILITY SLEEVES, AND CONDUITS SHALL BE INSTALLED PRIOR TO BASE & PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION. 7. PER FLORIDA BUILDING CODE (FBC) SECTION 1804.3 SITE GRADING: THE GROUND IMMEDIATELY ADJACENT TO THE FOUNDATION SHALL BE SLOPED AWAY FROM THE BUILDING AT A SLOPE OF NOT LESS THAN 5% FOR A MINIMUM DISTANCE OF 10 FEET MEASURED PERPENDICULAR TO THE FACE OF THE WALL. C%/IC%TIAIr1 C+Tr%MRA IA11 rT EXISTING FIRE HYDRANT OF PAVEMENT SITE DATA PARCEL ID: 35-25-21-0010-07100-0000 TOTAL SITE AREA: 5.14 AC. PROJECT AREA: 522 SF FEMA 100YR FLOODPLAIN: ZONE 'X' EXISTING BUILDING AREA: 103,810 SF (NO BUILDING EXPANSIONS PROPOSED) NO PARKING SPACES EFFECTED BY THE PROPOSED PROJECT. EXISTING CONCRETE SIDEWALK 'S CONCRETE PAD ING GRADE PLUS 6.0" ±156.50) EXISTING STORM INLET PROPOSED 28'x8' CONCRETE GENERATOR PAD (MATCH EXISTING GRADE PLUS 6.0" +159.50) SEE ELECTRICAL & STRUCTURAL PLANS FOR DETAILS EXISTING SOLID WASTE DUMPSTERS EXISTING GENERATOR PAD (TO BE REMOVED) EXISTING 6" FIRE LINE (TO REMAIN) 0' 5' 10' 20' 0 O C n Ct Rt Z "� O O Ln Q C O O V Z _ en .� cn O Ln Ln 4)N Wp N W �, v W 3 c O M Z L � o a G O Z� a W ac `" W N Z N m 00 M � t N a t Z cn Q cn U (II to 'L W L Q _O " 1 M = W 3 Ln 00 W q* aJ L Q U .1 U z d LLI Eo J M N O M M kD N LL d' W O O Z z_ UJ Z O U GSA _jc� LU z N Y Q ^ O cn+- N f0 l7 -a a)t\m LLjZ �a N 3 a) Y LON 3� O e"-1 ILL U m J a W N W I..L D O 0 I- Q �C Z W Q Ln -� M Z W 'L - 0 W H �LL d t L W Z Q Q. M N �VKE BLA -*' 0 925/ i TE OF '�4RID ANAL v //1111111\\ 'J 1 JESSE LUKE BLACKSTOCK, P.E. ISSUE DATE: 10/19/2018 PROJECT NUMBER: 2847 REVISIONS: NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 1 02/19/19 GENERATOR LOCATION SITE, GRADING, UTILITIES PLAN TO THE BEST OF THE ENGINEERS KNOWLEDGE, THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS COMPLY WITH THE APPLICABLE MINIMUM BUILDING CODES AND THE APPLICABLE FIRE -SAFETY STANDARDS AS DETERMINED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY IN ACCORDANCE WITH CHAPTER 553.79 AND CHAPTER 633, FLORIDA STATUTES. © 2019 APG ENGINEERING cl M0 _ 1- j m z uj 0 Y F, Lu V Z cc 2 OC � U a REINFORCED CONCRETE A. CLASSES OF CONCRETE ALL CONCRETE SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS AS SPECIFIED: 4,000 LBS 28-DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH, TYPE: NWT, 1" AGGREGATE SIZE. B. REINFORCING STEEL 1. ALL REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE ASTM A 615 GRADE 60 UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS OR IN THESE NOTES. 2. SMOOTH WELDED WIRE REINFORCEMENT: ASTM A 185, YIELD STRENGTH 65,000 PSI. C. REINFORCING STEEL COVERAGE 1. COVER IN STRUCTURAL MEMBERS NOT SPECIFIED IN THE DETAILS SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF ACI 318 UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS. SUBMITTALS A. SUBMITTAL LIST AND SCHEDULE 1. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE A DETAILED LIST AND SCHEDULE OF ALL SUBMITTAL ITEMS TO BE SENT TO THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER PRIOR TO THE START OF CONSTRUCTION. THIS LIST SHALL BE UPDATED AND REVISED AND KEPT CURRENT AS THE JOB PROGRESSES. THE SUBMITTAL LIST SHALL BE ORGANIZED AS SHOWN BELOW: a. SHOP DRAWINGS b. DESIGN CALCULATIONS C. PRODUCT DATA, CERTIFICATES, REPORTS, AND OTHER LITERATURE B. SUBMITTALS TO BE PROVIDED TO STRUCTURAL ENGINEER 1. STRUCTURAL SUBMITTALS: THE FOLLOWING SUBMITTALS SHALL BE PROVIDED: a. CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS b. REINFORCING STEEL 2. DEFERRED SUBMITTALS: a. THE FOLLOWING ITEMS ARE CONSIDERED DEFERRED SUBMITTALS BY THE REGISTERED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL IN RESPONSIBLE CHARGE: 1) ITEMS ATTACHED TO THE STRUCTURAL FRAME FOR BUILDING CLADDING ATTACHMENT OR FOR ATTACHMENT OF OTHER ITEMS (REC) NOTES: (S&S) ITEMS MARKED THUS SHALL HAVE THE SHOP DRAWINGS AND DELEGATED DESIGN SUBMITTALS (INCLUDING CALCULATIONS) SEALED PER THE PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS BY AN ENGINEER REGISTERED INN THE STATE WHERE THE PROJECT IS LOCATED. (REC) ITEMS MARKED THUS SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO ENGINEER FOR RECORD ONLY AND WILL NOT HAVE THE ENGINEER'S SHOP DRAWING STAMP AFFIXED. 3. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS: a. ALL SHOP DRAWINGS MUST BE REVIEWED AND ELECTRONICALLY STAMPED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO SUBMITTAL. b. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE THE SUBMITTAL IN ELECTRONIC POTABLE DOCUMENT FORMAT (PDF) PER THE SPECIFICATIONS. C. THE OMISSION FROM THE SHOP DRAWINGS OF ANY MATERIALS REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TO BE FURNISHED SHALL NOT RELIEVE THE CONTRACTOR OF THE RESPONSIBILITY OF FURNISHING AND INSTALLING SUCH MATERIALS, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE SHOP DRAWINGS HAVE BEEN REVIEWED AND APPROVED. REPRODUCTION 1. THE USE OF ELECTRONIC FILES OR REPRODUCING OF THESE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS BY ANY CONTRACTOR, SUBCONTRACTOR, ERECTOR, FABRICATOR, OR MATERIAL SUPPLIER IN LIEU OF PREPARATION OF SHOP DRAWINGS SIGNIFIES THEIR ACCEPTANCE OF ALL INFORMATION SHOWN HEREON AS CORRECT, AND OBLIGATES THEMSELVES TO ANY JOB EXPENSE, REAL OR IMPLIED, ARISING DUE TO ANY ERRORS THAT MAY OCCUR HEREON. MISCELLANEOUS A. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO OBTAIN ALL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND LATEST ADDENDA AND TO SUBMIT SUCH DOCUMENTS TO ALL SUBCONTRACTORS AND MATERIAL SUPPLIERS PRIOR TO THE SUBMITTAL OF SHOP DRAWINGS, FABRICATION OF ANY STRUCTURAL MEMBERS, AND ERECTION IN THE FIELD. 2. THE CONTRACT STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS REPRESENT THE FINISHED STRUCTURE, AND, EXCEPT WHERE SPECIFICALLY SHOWN, DO NOT INDICATE THE METHOD OR MEANS OF CONSTRUCTION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUPERVISE AND DIRECT THE WORK AND SHALL BE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL CONSTRUCTION MEANS, METHODS, PROCEDURES, TECHNIQUES, AND SEQUENCE. 3. OPENINGS THROUGH FLOORS, ROOFS, AND WALLS FOR DUCTS, PIPING, AND/OR CONDUIT SHALL BE COORDINATED BY THE CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY SIZES AND LOCATIONS OF HOLES AND OPENINGS WITH THE MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING, AND FIRE PROTECTION DRAWINGS AND THE RESPECTIVE SUBCONTRACTORS. 4. REFER TO DRAWINGS OTHER THAN STRUCTURAL FOR COMPLETE INFORMATION INCLUDING: TYPES OF FLOOR SLAB FINISHES AND THEIR LOCATIONS, FLOOR SLAB DEPRESSIONS AND CURBS, OPENINGS IN STRUCTURAL WALLS, ROOFS AND FLOORS REQUIRED BY ARCHITECTURAL AND MEP FEATURES, STAIRS, RAMPS, ETC. 5. WHERE MEMBER LOCATIONS ARE NOT SPECIFICALLY DIMENSIONED, MEMBERS ARE EITHER LOCATED ON COLUMNS LINES OR ARE EQUALLY SPACED BETWEEN LOCATED MEMBERS. 6. IF CERTAIN FEATURES ARE NOT FULLY SHOWN OR SPECIFIED ON THE DRAWINGS OR IN THE SPECIFICATIONS, THEIR CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE OF THE SAME CHARACTER AS SHOWN OR SPECIFIED IN SIMILAR CONDITIONS B. DRAWING CONFLICTS 1) THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPARE THE ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND REPORT ANY DISCREPANCY BETWEEN EACH SET OF DRAWINGS AND WITHIN EACH SET OF DRAWINGS TO THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER PRIOR TO THE FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION OF ANY STRUCTURAL MEMBERS. C. CONFLICTS IN STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS 1) WHERE CONFLICT EXISTS AMONG THE VARIOUS PARTS OF THE STRUCTURAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS, GENERAL NOTES, AND SPECIFICATIONS, THE STRICTEST REQUIREMENTS, AS INDICATED BY THE ENGINEER, SHALL GOVERN. D. EXISTING CONDITIONS 1) THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF THE EXISTING BUILDING AT THE JOB SITE AND REPORT ANY DISCREPANCIES FROM ASSUMED CONDITIONS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS TO THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER PRIOR TO THE FABRICATION AND ERECTION OF ANY MEMBERS. MISCELLANEOUS 1) EXISTING CONSTRUCTION SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS WAS OBTAINED FROM EXISTING CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND LIMITED SITE OBSERVATION. THESE DRAWINGS OF EXISTING CONSTRUCTION ARE AVAILABLE FOR CONTRACTOR USE. HOWEVER, THE AVAILABLE DRAWINGS OF EXISTING CONSTRUCTION ARE NOT NECESSARILY COMPLETE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL PERTINENT INFORMATION. 2) DEMOLITION, CUTTING, DRILLING, ETC. OF EXISTING WORK SHALL BE PERFORMED WITH GREAT CARE SO AS NOT TO JEOPARDIZE THE STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY OF THE EXISTING BUILDING. IF ANY ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL, OR MEP MEMBERS NOT DESIGNATED FOR REMOVAL INTERFERE WITH THE NEW WORK, THE ARCHITECT SHALL BE NOTIFIED IMMEDIATELY AND APPROVAL OBTAINED PRIOR TO REMOVAL OF THOSE MEMBERS. 3) THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SAFELY SHORE EXISTING CONSTRUCTION WHEREVER EXISTING SUPPORTS ARE REMOVED TO ALLOW THE INSTALLATION OF NEW WORK. ALL SHORING METHODS AND SEQUENCING OF DEMOLITION SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS ENGINEER. MATCHING CORNER 2 4) THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE LOCATION OF EXISTING UTILITIES PRIOR TO BARS AT PERIMETER 2'-6" THE START OF CONSTRUCTION AND TAKE CARE TO PROTECT EXISTING UTILITIES THAT ARE TO REMAIN IN SERVICE. CONTINUOUS TURNDOWN AROUND PERIMETER CONCRETE SLAB ON -GRADE REINFORCED WITH 8 - #8 BOTTOM REFER TO CIVIL PLAN 5) THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REPAIR ALL DAMAGE CAUSED DURING CONSTRUCTION WITH AND #6@ 12" TRANSVERSE FOR TOP ELEVATION SIMILAR MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP TO RESTORE CONDITIONS TO LEVELS TOP REINFORCEMENT WITH ACCEPTABLE TO THE ARCHITECT. STANDARD HOOK AT END E. RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR FOR CONSTRUCTION LOADS 1) THE STRUCTURE HAS BEEN DESIGNED FOR THE LOADS IDENTIFIED WITHIN THESE%/\/ • .. • 2" TOP COVER STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS THAT ARE ANTICIPATED TO BE APPLIED TO THE FINAL STRUCTURE ONCE COMPLETED AND OCCUPIED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT OVERLOAD THE \ j\\"�\\//� • . j \ j�\/�\`�\ j\\/, \��\\�\\/\\\�% STRUCTURE DURING CONSTRUCTION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR /\\// \// //�\//\\// //\\//\\ \\ AD CHECKING THE ADEQUACY OF THE STRUCTURE TO SUPPORT ANY APPLIED CONSTRUCTION j\/ \\\ LOADS, INCLUDING THOSE DUE TO CONSTRUCTION VEHICLES OR EQUIPMENT, MATERIAL\\/ HANDLING OR STORAGE, SHORING OR RESHORING, OR ANY OTHER CONSTRUCTION \ \ \\//\\f\\\ /�`� �//�//.� /�X/�R ACTIVITY. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT CALCULATIONS SIGNED AND SEALED BY AN //� //�/ / \ DIRECTLY BELOW PAD ENGINEER LICENSED IN THE STATE WHERE THE PROJECT IS LOCATED VERIFYING THE 1 8" STABILIZED SUBGRADE ADEQUACY OF THE STRUCTURE FOR ANY PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION LOADS THAT ARE IN LBR 40 EXCESS OF THE STATED DESIGN LOADS. THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER IS NOT RESPONSIBLE TO DESIGN OR CHECK THE STRUCTURE FOR LOADS APPLIED TO THE STRUCTURE FOR ANY CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY. GENERATOR PAD TURNDOWN DETAIL N.T.S. F. CONTRACTOR SUBSTITUTIONS 1) ANY MATERIALS OR PRODUCTS SUBMITTED FOR APPROVAL THAT ARE DIFFERENT FROM THE MATERIAL OR PRODUCTS SPECIFIED IN THE STRUCTURAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS WILL BE APPROVED ONLY IF THE FOLLOWING CRITERIA ARE SATISFIED: a. A COST SAVINGS TO THE OWNER IS DOCUMENTED AND SUBMITTED WITH THE REQUEST. b. THE MATERIAL OR PRODUCT HAS BEEN APPROVED BY THE INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC) AND THE ICC REPORT IS SUBMITTED WITH THE REQUEST. 1. THE ICC ESR THAT IS SUBMITTED MUST REFERENCE THE BUILDING CODE UNDER WHICH THE PROJECT IS PERMITTED. 2. ICC REPORTS THAT HAVE BEEN DISCONTINUED AT THE TIME OF PRODUCT INSTALLATION WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED. 2) SUBMITTALS NOT SATISFYING THE ABOVE CRITERIA WILL NOT BE CONSIDERED. G MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WEIGHTS DOWEL AND JOINT SPACING SCHEDULE SLAB DEPTH DOWEL SIZE DOWEL LENGTH DOWEL SPACING MAXIMUM JOINT SPACING 5" 3/4" DIA. 16" 12" 13'-0" 6" 3/4" DIA. 16" 12" 14'-6" 7" 1" DIA. 18" 12" 16'-0" 8" 1" D IA. 18" 12" 17'-6" 1) THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT ACTUAL WEIGHTS OF EQUIPMENT TO BE USED IN THE PROJECT TO THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER FOR VERIFICATION OF LOADS USED IN THE DESIGN AT LEAST THREE WEEKS PRIOR TO FABRICATION AND CONSTRUCTION OF WHERE JOINT FILLER IS SPECIFIED THE SUPPORTING STRUCTURE. PREPARE EDGE OF EACH SIDE OF JOINT WITH 1/8" RADIUS, SAWCUT H. THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER'S ROLE DURING CONSTRUCTION JOINT, AND PROVIDE JOINT FILLER 1) THE ENGINEER SHALL NOT HAVE CONTROL NOR CHARGE OF, AND SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR, CONSTRUCTION MEANS, METHODS, TECHNIQUES, SEQUENCES, OR PROCEDURES, FOR SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS IN CONNECTION WITH THE a , a ' ° -4 . • ' WORK, FOR THE ACTS OR OMISSION OF THE CONTRACTOR, SUBCONTRACTOR, OR ANY d OTHER PERSONS PERFORMING ANY OF THE WORK, OR FOR THE FAILURE OF ANY OF THEM • • .. d . TO CARRY OUT THE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. CONSTRUCTION JOINT, REFER TO NOTE 4 2) PERIODIC SITE OBSERVATION BY FIELD REPRESENTATIVES OF WALTER P. MOORE AND ASSOCIATES IS SOLELY FOR THE PURPOSE OF BECOMING GENERALLY FAMILIAR WITH DOWELS, REFER TO THE PROGRESS AND QUALITY OF THE WORK COMPLETED AND DETERMINING, IN GENERAL, SCHEDULE AND IF THE WORK OBSERVED IS BEING PERFORMED IN A MANNER INDICATING THAT THE WORK, NOTES 5 AND 6 WHEN FULLY COMPLETED, WILL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE STRUCTURAL CONTRACT CONSTRUCTION JOINT DOCUMENTS. THIS LIMITED SITE OBSERVATION SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS EXHAUSTIVE OR CONTINUOUS TO CHECK THE QUALITY OR QUANTITY OF THE WORK, BUT RATHER PERIODIC IN AN EFFORT TO KEEP THE OWNER REASONABLY INFORMED ABOUT THE PROGRESS AND QUALITY OF THE PORTION OF THE STRUCTURE COMPLETED. I. MAINTENANCE STATEMENT 1) ALL STRUCTURES REQUIRE PERIODIC MAINTENANCE TO EXTEND LIFESPAN AND TO ENSURE STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY FROM EXPOSURE TO THE ENVIRONMENT. A PLANNED PROGRAM OF MAINTENANCE SHALL BE ESTABLISHED BY THE BUILDING OWNER. THIS 143 CONTINUOUS EACH SIDE OF JOINT SUPPORTED INDEPENDENTLY FROM DOWEL BAR (TYP.) . ,.del..,• ,. ..:... • r d G EQUAL ' P STOP ALTERNATE JOINT SAWCUT DEPTH = T/4 PROVIDE JOINT FILLER REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS ONLY IF SPECIFIED FOR ADDITIONAL JOINT REQUIREMENTS l a CONTRACTION (CONTROL) JOINT PROGRAM SHALL INCLUDE SUCH ITEMS SUCH AS BUT NOT LIMITED PAINTING TYPICAL CONSTRUCTION AND CONTROL JOINTS I N SLAB ON -GRADE. STRUCTURAL STEEL, PROTECTIVE COATING FOR CONCRETE, SEALANTS, CAULKEDD JOINTS, EXPANSION JOINTS, CONTROL JOINTS, SPALLS AND CRACKS IN CONCRETE, AND PRESSURE N.T.S. WASHING OF EXPOSED STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS EXPOSED TO A SALT ENVIRONMENT OR OTHER HARSH CHEMICALS. NOTES: 1. REFER TO PLAN FOR SLAB THICKNESS (T) AND REINFORCEMENT. 2. SLAB REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE CHAIRED BY SOIL SUPPORTED SLAB BOLSTERS. 3. LONG STRIP CONSTRUCTION METHOD SHALL BE USED IN PLACING CONCRETE FOR ALL SLABS -ON -GRADE UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. REFER TO "TYPICAL LONG STRIP CONSTRUCTION SCHEMATIC JOINT LAYOUT" FOR COMPLETE PLACING SEQUENCE. AT CONTRACTOR'S OPTION, LARGER SLAB AREAS MAY BE POURED PROVIDED THE EARLY -ENTRY DRY -CUT METHOD OF INSTALLING CONTRACTION JOINTS IS USED. REFER TO THE SPECIFICATIONS. 4. AT CONSTRUCTION JOINTS, BREAK BOND BETWEEN NEW AND PREVIOUSLY PLACED SLAB BY SPRAYING OR PAINTING EXPOSED SIDES OF JOINT WITH A CURING COMPOUND, BONDBREAKER, OR FORM OIL. 5. DOWELS SHOULD BE SMOOTH, ALIGNED, AND SUPPORTED SO THEY WILL REMAIN PARALLEL IN BOTH THE HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL PLANES. 6. TO PREVENT A BOND BETWEEN THE DOWEL AND THE CONCRETE, LIGHTLY COAT THE EXPOSED END OF THE DOWELS WITH A PARAFFIN -BASED LUBRICANT, ASPHALT EMULSION, FORM OIL, OR GREASE IMMEDIATELY BEFORE PLACING CONCRETE ON THE SECOND SIDE OF THE JOINT. ALTERNATIVELY, USE A PLASTIC OR METAL SLEEVE SPECIFICALLY MANUFACTURED FOR THIS PURPOSE. 7. AT CONTRACTION (CONTROL) JOINTS, MAKE SAW CUT AS SOON AS SLAB IS ABLE TO SUPPORT WEIGHT OF WORKERS AND SAWING EQUIPMENT WITHOUT DAMAGE TO FINISH SURFACE OF SLAB. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS. 8. PROVIDE CONTRACTION OR CONSTRUCTION JOINTS AT EVERY COLUMN LINE AND IN BETWEEN THE COLUMN LINES SUCH THAT THE JOINT SPACING DOES NOT EXCEED TABULATED DISTANCES. 9. FOR SLAB THICKNESS IN BETWEEN TABULATED VALUES, USE DOWEL INFORMATION FOR THICKER SLAB. MAXIMUM JOINT SPACING SHALL BEINTERPOLATED. TO THE BEST OF THE ENGINEERS KNOWLEDGE, THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS COMPLY WITH THE APPLICABLE MINIMUM BUILDING CODES AND THE APPLICABLE FIRE -SAFETY STANDARDS AS DETERMINED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY IN ACCORDANCE WITH CHAPTER 553.79 AND CHAPTER 633, FLORIDA STATUTES. wl Z V O C Z •�OOU � v z_ O to to Ln W0 $ t;o N N m,�^ W J Z ~ 3 0LL O a o (55 li Z~ W cc `" LL C7 N z N m 00 cn t N a t kD O Q Z M U (u G bo L _j L j O W Q u- JQ C 4- L U z d -J _ `L �' 3 l d 00 tL qt 4) Q U V Z w H oo Eo J M m O M (I)t7 Z cNn o CD cn ti w Z _z Z h�00 V DC +� 00 O +J LLI Z �NYQ 4--1 ^ V 0 P4 N++N f°O CD wc0 -p as r ca 3 Y N 41) O ctN 3J ri LL H crf Y U GO a W N W N I..L D O O Q/ LL Z d� w Z °` co L1J .a cm (� a° Lu H :c LLJ Z Q L C) � n co N ISSUE DATE: 10/19/2018 PROJECT NUMBER: 2847 REVISIONS: NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 1 02/19/19 REVISED FOOTER DIM. STRUCTURAL PLAN & DETAILS © 2019 APG ENGINEERING av �i Z Lca u ]C u w_Z cc 0 u d SCOPE OF WORK TO PROVIDE COMPLIANCE WITH THE FLORIDA PROPOSED RULE 58A-5.036 EMERGENCY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL FOR ASSISTED LIVING FACILITY. PROJECT SITE INFORMATION LOCATION: AMERICAN HOUSE ZEPHYRHILLS 38130 PRETTY POND ROAD. ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA 33540 PASCO COUNTY FACILITY TYPE: ASSISTED LIVING 144 BEDS THREE STORY BUILDING EVACUATION ZONE: ZONE NON EVAC FLOOD ZONE: ZONE X SINGLE CAMPUS: APPLICABLE MINIMUM COOLING ZONE REFUGE AREA = 144 BEDS X 20 SQ.FT. XO.80 = 2,304 SQ.FT. DESIGN CRITERIA IS TO REPLACE THE EXISTING 125 kW 208/120 V LEVEL 1 EMERGENCY GENERATOR, WITH A NEW 400 kW 208/120 V LEVEL 1 NATURAL GAS SOUND ATTENUATED EMERGENCY GENERATOR TO PROVIDE POWER TO A NEW 1600 A, NEMA 3R, SERVICE RATED AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH (ATS). THE NEW LEVEL 1 EMERGENCY GENERATOR WILL PROVIDE POWER THROUGH THE EXISTING ATS TO THE CRITICAL, LIFE SAFETY, AND EQUIPMENT BRANCH CIRCUITS, AND PROVIDE STANDBY POWER UTILIZING THE SERVICE RATED ATS BETWEEN NORMAL POWER AND THE GENERATOR POWER. THIS WILL SUPPLY POWER TO THE ENTIRE BUILDING BASED UPON THE UTILITY BILLS OVER THE LAST YEAR. THE FACILITY MAXIMUM DEMAND WAS 221 kW. THE NEW GENERATOR WILL UTILIZE NATURAL GAS AS THE FUEL SOURCE IN ACCORDANCE WITH FLORIDA RULE 58A-5.036 (1)(b)3. CO/SMOKE DETECTORS WILL REPLACE THE EXISTING SMOKE DETECTORS CONNECTED TO THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IN THE RESIDENCE ROOM LOCATED ON THE DISCHARGE SIDE OF THE NEW GENERATOR. ELECTRICAL LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION MOUNTING 20 AMP ISOLATED GROUND DUPLEX IG� RECEPTACLE (ORANGE DEVICE) 18" AFF TO C/L 20 AMP ISOLATED GROUND DUPLEX IGW- RECEPTACLE (ORANGE DEVICE) 44" AFF TO C/L, OR AS NOTED IG 20 AMP ISOLATED GROUND DUPLEX RECEPTACLE 18" AFF TO C/L (ORANGE DEVICE) AND 20 A DUPLEX RECEPTACLE 20 AMP SINGLE RECEPTACLE 18" AFF TO C/L EWC0- 20 AMP SINGLE RECEPTACLE FOR COORDINATE WITH ELECTRIC WATER COOLER GENERAL CONTRACTOR 20 AMP QUADPLEX RECEPTACLE 18" AFF TO C/L 20 AMP GFCI DUPLEX RECEPTACLE 18" AFF TO C/L WP($I`__ 20 AMP GFCI DUPLEX RECEPTACLE WITH 18" AFF TO C/L WEATHERPROOF COVER (D-- 20 AMP DUPLEX RECEPTACLE 18" AFF TO C/L 20 AMP DUPLEX RECEPTACLE ON 18" AFF TO C/L EMERGENCY SYSTEM MS SWITCH, MOTOR RATED 46" AFF TO C/L S SWITCH, SINGLE POLE 46" AFF TO C/L ® ® EXHAUST FAN REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS EMERGENCY POWER OFF BUTTON WITH 46" AFF TO C/L MANUAL RESET. RED COLOR. Q OUTLET, JUNCTION, OR PULL BOX AS NOTED 0 ® KEYNOTES / SCHEDULED NOTES BRANCH CIRCUIT CONCEALED ABOVE CEILING OR IN WALL. TWO CONDUCTORS PLUS GROUND REQUIRED UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. —}�— BRANCH CIRCUIT WITH ISOLATED GROUND HOME RUN TO PANELBOARD BRANCH CIRCUIT CONDUIT CONCEALED IN SLAB — _ — OR UNDERGROUND — — — — BRANCH CIRCUIT CONDUIT EXPOSED —W— SURFACE MOUNTED DECORATIVE RACEWAY (E.G. WIREMOLD) —LV— LOW VOLTAGE WIRING INSTALLED IN CONDUIT —LS— LIFE SAFETY BRANCH CIRCUIT —C— CRITICAL BRANCH CIRCUIT —EQ— EQUIPMENT BRANCH CIRCUIT —o CONDUIT RUN UP —� CONDUIT RUN DOWN EQUIPMENT CONNECTION USING FLEXIBLE CONDUIT PANELBOARD UNDER 250 VOLTS 72" AFF TO TOP ® PANELBOARD OVER 250 VOLTS 72" AFF TO TOP © DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER REFER TO TRANSFORMER SCHEDULE B AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 72" AFF TO TOP GENERATOR REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL 60" AFF TO TOP GRAP GENERATOR SECURE TO CONCRETE SLAB WITH SPRING VIBRATION ISOLATORS E;�3 TIME SWITCH WALL MOUNTED ® CONTACTOR WALL MOUNTED FRAME SIZE ❑p 3 3 DISCONNECT SWITCH 60" AFF TO TOP FUSE SIZE 0 MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTER 60" AFF TO TOP STARTER SIZE COMBINATION MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTER 60" AFF TO TOP STARTER SIZE Ep MANUAL MOTOR STARTER 60" AFF TO TOP STARTER SIZE MOTOR CONNECTION AS NOTED ® ELECTRIC DUCT HEATER REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS THERMOSTAT REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS ® MOTORIZED DAMPER REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS GENERAL ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION NOTES 1. PROVIDE PLASTIC COVERED TYPED DIRECTORY CARDS BEHIND DOORS OF NEW AND EXISTING BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS AFFECTED UNDER THE SCOPE OF THIS PROJECT. DIRECTORIES SHALL INDICATE DEVICES BEING SERVED INCLUDING SPACE NUMBERS IN WHICH DEVICES OR FIXTURES ARE LOCATED. SPACE NAMES AND NUMBERS SHALL MATCH INSTALLED GRAPHICS IF DIFFERENT FROM THE SPACE NAMES AND NUMBERS ON DRAWINGS. 2. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR (E.C.) SHALL REFER TO THE ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL DESIGN STANDARDS. THE ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ARE A BINDING PART OF THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. WHENEVER A CONFLICT OCCURS BETWEEN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND THE SPECIFICATIONS, THE E.C. SHALL CONTACT APG ENGINEERING FOR CLARIFICATION. 3. THE E.C. SHALL PROVIDE CODE COMPLIANT PENETRATIONS FOR ALL NEW CONDUITS ENTERING/EXITING FIRE RATED WALLS. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR LOCATIONS OF ALL FIRE RATED WALLS. E.C. SHALL NOTIFY THE OWNER OF ALL EXISTING NON -CODE COMPLIANT ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS WITHIN THE PROJECT SCOPE (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO EXISTING ELECTRICAL ROOMS AND CORRIDORS) AND IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE OWNER TO CORRECT. 4. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE E.C. TO REMOVE AND RE -INSTALL ANY LUMINAIRES OR CEILING MOUNTED DEVICES NEEDING TO BE TEMPORARILY REMOVED DUE TO THE RENOVATION OF ANY MECHANICAL OR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. THE E.C. SHALL VERIFY ALL AREAS OF POTENTIAL CEILING RE -WORK PRIOR TO BID. 5. THE E.C. SHALL VISIT THE SITE PRIOR TO BID AND ALLOW FOR EXISTING CONDITIONS IN BID. THE E.C. SHALL CONFIRM WITH OWNER TO MATCH THE ESTABLISHED COLOR SCHEME OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL DEVICES ON SITE. 6. THE E.C. SHALL INCLUDE A GREEN INSULATED GROUNDING CONDUCTOR WITHIN ALL BRANCH CIRCUITS. SIZE GROUNDING CONDUCTOR PER N.E.C. TABLE 250.122. DESIGN GENERAL NOTES 1. VOLTAGE DROP CALCULATIONS HAVE BEEN PERFORMED AND COMPLY WITH FLORIDA BUILDING CODE 2017 ENERGY CONSERVATION, CHAPTER 4, SECTION C405.6.3. FEEDER AND BRANCH CIRCUITS COMBINED HAVE BEEN SIZED FOR A MAXIMUM VOLTAGE DROP OF FIVE PERCENT (5%) AT DESIGN LOAD. DURING CONSTRUCTION ALL 208/120 VOLT BRANCH CIRCUITS THAT EXCEED 120 FEET IN LENGTH FROM THE ELECTRIC PANEL TO THE DEVICE SHALL REQUIRE THE CONDUCTORS TO BE UPSIZED TO THE NEXT NOMINAL SIZE SO AS NOT TO EXCEED THE MAXIMUM VOLTAGE DROP. 2. THE INSTALLATION SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL LAWS IN EFFECT APPLYING TO ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS. THE FOLLOWING CODES ARE APPLICABLE: 2.1. FLORIDA PROPOSED RULE 58A-5.036 (3/26/18) 2.2. NFPA 70: NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (2014) 2.3. NFPA 99: STANDARD FOR HEALTH CARE FACILITIES (2015) 2.4. NFPA 101: LIFE SAFETY CODE (2015) 2.5. NFPA 110: STANDARD FOR EMERGENCY AND STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS (2013) 2.6. NFPA 241: STANDARD FOR SAFEGUARDING CONSTRUCTION ALTERATION AND DEMOLITION OPERATIONS (2013) 2.7. NFPA 780 : STANDARD FOR THE INSTALLATION OF LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM (2013) 2.8. FLORIDA BUILDING CODE (2017) 2.9. FLORIDA FIRE PREVENTION CODE (6TH EDITION) (2017) 2.10. FACILITY GUIDELINE INSTITUTE FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF HEALTHCARE FACILITIES (2014) GENERAL NOTES 1. AN EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ALL ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND SHALL BE SIZED IN ACCORDANCE WITH N.E.C. ARTICLE 250-122. 2. DISREGARD SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS NOT USED ON CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. ELECTRICAL ABBREVIATIONS AFF - ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR LW - LOW WHITE AHU -AIR HANDLING UNIT HP - HORSEPOWER, HEAT PUMP BFG -BELOW FINISHED GRADE HVAC - HEATING, VENTING AIR CONDITIONING C -CONDUIT JB -JUNCTION BOX CLG -CEILING MOUNTED LRA - LOCKED ROTOR AMPERES C/L - CENTERLINE MCB - MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER CU - CONDENSING UNIT MLO - MAIN LUGS ONLY CW -COOL WHITE N- NEUTRAL DN - DOWN NL - NIGHT LIGHT EDH - ELECTRIC DUCT HEATER OB - OUTLET BOX EF - EXHAUST FAN PB - PULL BOX, PUSHBUTTON ENCL - ENCLOSURE PS - PAY STATION EWC - ELECTRIC WATER COOLER RECEPT - RECEPTACLE EWH - ELECTRIC WATER HEATER SC -SMOKE COMPARTMENT EX - EXPLOSION PROOF SF -SUPPLY FAN FCU - FAN COIL UNIT SPEC -SPECIFICATIONS FHP - FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER TL - TWISTLOCK FLA -FULL LOAD AMPERES TP -TAMPER PROOF GND -GROUND TTB -TELEPHONE TERMINAL BOARD GFI - GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER WP - WEATHER PROOF GWH -GAS WATER HEATER WR - WEATHER RESISTANT HID - HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE WW - WARM WHITE HOA - HANDS OFF AUTOMATIC XFMR -TRANSFORMER HORIZ - HORIZONTAL CU -COPPER AL -ALUMINUM ELECTRICAL SHEET INDEX NUMBER DESCRIPTION E0.1 ELECTRICAL NOTES, LEGENDS, AND SHEET INDEX E1.1 ELECTRICAL PARTIAL SITE PLAN E2.1 ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLAN E2.2 ENLARGED ELECTRICAL ROOM AND GENERATOR LOCATION E3.1 ELECTRICAL DETAILS E3.2 ELECTRICAL DETAILS E4.1 ELECTRICAL RISER DIAGRAM AND PANEL SCHEDULES E5.1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS E5.2 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS E5.3 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS E5.4 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS E5.5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS E5.6 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS E6.1 ELECTRICAL COORDINATION STUDY AND FAULT CURRENT STUDY TO THE BEST OF THE ENGINEERS KNOWLEDGE, THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS COMPLY WITH THE APPLICABLE MINIMUM BUILDING CODES AND THE APPLICABLE FIRE -SAFETY STANDARDS AS DETERMINED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY IN ACCORDANCE WITH CHAPTER 553.79 AND CHAPTER 633, FLORIDA STATUTES. Q '% O O Ql ��,OO Ln a z u tm m m W N N tj u0 x LLIJ 3 sC LL � 3 � z z FO W z0 CL a Wuj w LL l7 Z m J N a N 00 — M t N uO Z rn m v � W b O — Q, > a LL U 4A qt M = LU u Linca N CW a) G Q q-4- U J crm a W fV W {..f` D O O Q ZO W �M CCZ d' Ln M Lu V = C a "a L. L. W W Sa G Mt z M N V, LEWIS ✓p�� 'No 38680 * = tea Qom•; STATE OF �S'•.'LORIOP.•' 'IIII11110%\0 George Johnson, P.E. PE 38680 ISSUE DATE: 10/19/2018 PROJECT NUMBER: 2847 REVISIONS: NO. DATE I DESCRIPTION ELECTRICAL NOTES, LEGENDS, AND SHEET INDEX EOm © 2018 APG ENGINEERING Q L U X a NA s r LIVILRULM.,Y VtINtKA I UK IIN JAIVIt LUUA I IUIN. i 5 Ham: 4 ELECTRICAL PARTIAL SITE PLAN 1" = 20'-0" 0' 10, 20' 40' EXISTING UTILITY TRANSFORMER LOCATION. 208/120 V 300 WA. EXISTING NATURAL GAS METER ZI .0 t\ O 0 O -:I- Ql 0 L O O Q Z u r_ O Ory) U N N t\ w 0 � J 3 w Lu 3 ZZ � O u W H Z� a w Lu W LL z m cV a I 00 — m Q U - 0O t\ z m m u Q) J Z W L 0 — _ L a% � Q L.L J u ,` 4- Q) Z (� I..I..I W N00 QJ Q ::t U a W N W DC � 0 0 Z0 W Q � cn 111 `" z w _ M .� o LL LLI a m t L �M J(v \�111111111//// �_E W IS ✓O p19Q • yti i L�GENSF'•. Spy i * No 38680 p STATE OF � �S•• F�ORIDP •'G\�� George Johnson, P.E. PE38680 ISSUE DATE: 10/19/2018 PROJECT NUMBER: 2847 REVISIONS: NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 1 02/22/19 FIELD COORDINATION ELECTRICAL PARTIAL SITE PLAN TO THE BEST OF THE ENGINEERS KNOWLEDGE, THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS COMPLY WITH THE APPLICABLE MINIMUM BUILDING CODES AND THE APPLICABLE FIRE -SAFETY STANDARDS AS DETERMINED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY IN ACCORDANCE WITH CHAPTER 553.79 AND CHAPTER 633, FLORIDA STATUTES. © 2018 APG ENGINEERIP E 1 0 1 0C Y Q L u �m Z Y o uLu Z oua r— - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - . - - - . - - - - - - - - - . - - - - - - PARTIAL ELECTRICAL 1ST FLOOR PLAN 3/32" = 1'-0" Dp 21 41 81 UNIT_ I 2 ^3W/2 r UblIT .in rt BED/I D; I 6iit ruulo/l 0, m 131, SHEET NOTES 1 CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY OWNER A MINIMUM OF 72 HRS PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF SHUTDOWN WORK. 2 EMERGENCY GENERATOR SHALL BE SECURED IN ORDER TO MEET THE WIND LOADING REQUIREMENTS SET FORTH IN THE 2017 FLORIDA BUILDING CODE. VERIFY SECURING REQUIREMENTS WITH STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING DRAWINGS AND GENERATOR MANUFACTURER. 3 REFER TO SHEET E4.1 FOR DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS. o KEYNOTES 1 REPLACE EXISTING GENERATOR ANNUNCIATOR PANEL WITH NEW GENERATOR REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL. 2 PROVIDE NEW POWER OFF PUSHBUTTON FOR NEW EMERGENCY GENERATOR SHUTDOWN. PROVIDE WEATHERPROOF AND TAMPER RESISTANT ENCLOSURE. LABEL AS REQUIRED. 3 REPLACE EXISTING SMOKE DETECTOR (SD) WITH CARBON MONOXIDE/SMOKE DETECTOR (CO/SD). 4 ADD ONE NEW CARBON MONOXIDE/SMOKE DETECTOR (CO/SD) TO EXISTING F/A SYSTEM. REPROGRAM EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM AS REQUIRED. NEW CONSTRUCTION LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION - EXISTING TO REMAIN NEW CONSTRUCTION CONNECT TO EXISTING AT THIS POINT TO THE BEST OF THE ENGINEERS KNOWLEDGE, THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS COMPLY WITH THE APPLICABLE MINIMUM BUILDING CODES AND THE APPLICABLE FIRE -SAFETY STANDARDS AS DETERMINED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY IN ACCORDANCE WITH CHAPTER 553.79 AND CHAPTER 633, FLORIDA STATUTES. 0 L O O Cif oO Ln u m m v z tki- Ln Ln tj N N � n � x j 0 LL. Wuj -c a Zz _ 0 0 Z °` IL W Lu cc LL l7 z m fV a N 00 — m t cV r- 0 Z cn (2)LLI W b — > J (V Q LL. a% L u c o - LLI Lnto W (1) ` 2 -t Q u J J a W N W DC � O O Q z 0 W Z /' Ln m Lu Vcem cc -� 0 a ';` 0 LL W .ar N W L d M .0 L s Z M P4 \-Ewis ✓oyN C9�. NSF•• SO'L�. �No 3868Q nl 441 �•, STATE OF <(/ �i � '•.F�ORIOP.•''G��� 'SS/ON A\� //011I110��� George Johnson, P.E. PE 38680 ISSUE DATE: 10/19/2018 PROJECT NUMBER: 2847 REVISIONS: NO. DATE I DESCRIPTION 1 02/22/19 FIELD COORDINATION FEE O CAL FLORPLAN 2.1 © 2018 APG ENGINEERING au 1 �,: 'L _ei_ 21 1 _ L . z if °. ` _ '3 jLl1 J _ 11 _� �I- t( 1144 41r. t1 —;I �� 11 1. -1 11 4' II It 'I if 1t II =1 11 It !t i tt '1 11 It It It 11 t; It 11 1 11 1i II i' 1I t1 11 61 1 1. 1t it ;I I t :I is 1 9 :1 It II ;I itr .3 It ?1 d o 11 it i1 II 1t it t+ 11 4 t1 ,° II rI II ;1 II! II I 11 aI :1 II 11 :1 .1 11 11 "1 11 1 :1 t! aI II 4 11 t' 0 tt £1 t to ;I 11 11 11 41 1 I1 tt ►J 11 11 t1 11 t4 1t 1 11 i ,1 11 1t I. 'I '1 1! 4 It; it 1 It 11 0 11 1) 11 1 11 at t1 11 1J 11 13 11 11 11 11 $I tt 4 " :1 it t1 11 11- 11 {1 A I If !I 11 11 1 I -1 1 11 t! i; 11 'I tl ;I ` IY II •i N .t 11 It I' ?1 -I 3 t1 -t 11 11 ;1 1 1) R1 1 111 t: 11 11 11 11 EI :1 I It JI 41 0 11 11 11 1 11 st ± II ►: II I; t1 II 11 11 1 Ii II 1I II It 1{ I tl to t1 II t1 11 t1 ;1 d 1i t$ :1 :1 t; 1I 1 Ii ;I II I .I II I 'I I1 tt is III 1 II it 11 tt 1t 1) 1° 1 1 11 '{ 91 :1 1' .it 11 I. 11 11 11 11 9 11 1 1 .1 t1 .1 :1 11 II II iI I I it II II I i1 it II II 1t 41 111 11 i1 1 1; 1: tt I II I II It I I t I %I I ii II .I I II 11 1 11 1 1 I i1 it 11 '! '1 II 1t 11 1 41I 11 11 1J ''. t[ t:; 11 ` '.I 'I t 1� I L' it II II .1 I I tt 11 0 t1 1t 1t II 1, eI ,.1 aI I :I ',! 1t 11 11 .1 11 it III 1 �, I is 1.t t1 I• 11 t I t1 't i I 1 "1 1S It EY t 1 1 1Rook I 1 cl09OOF I � ! 1 I 1 t 1 t i 1 t f i 4 t i 1 1 1 t 1 I 1 1 I i 1 I t 1 1 i 1 ENLARGED GENERATOR LOCATION (4)j ELECTRICAL ROOM / It = 11 3 16 1 t-0 01 4' 8' 16' N N SHEET NOTES 1 CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY OWNER A MINIMUM OF 72 HRS PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF SHUTDOWN WORK. 2 EMERGENCY GENERATOR SHALL BE SECURED IN ORDER TO MEET THE WIND LOADING REQUIREMENTS SET FORTH IN THE 2017 FLORIDA BUILDING CODE. VERIFY SECURING REQUIREMENTS WITH STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING DRAWINGS AND GENERATOR MANUFACTURER. 3 REFER TO SHEET E4.1 FOR DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS. O KEYNOTES 1 PROVIDE NEW POWER OFF PUSHBUTTON FOR NEW EMERGENCY GENERATOR SHUTDOWN. PROVIDE WEATHERPROOF AND TAMPERRESISTANT ENCLOSURE. LABEL AS REQUIRED. 2 RACEWAY FROM NEW AUTOMATIC TRANSFE TO EXISTING MDP. REFER TO SHEET E4.1 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 3 EXISTING RACEWAY FROM NEW EMERGENCY GENERATOR TO EXISTING AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH. REFER TO SHEET E4.1 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 4 EXISTING UTILITY METER ENCLOSURE. 5 RACEWAY FROM EXISTING UTILITY TRANSFORMER TO NEW AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH. REFER TO SHEET E4.1 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 6 NEW EMERGENCY GENERATOR AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH. PROVIDE NEW CONCRETE PAD AS REQUIRED. REFER TO STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 7 RACEWAY FROM NEW AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH TO NEW EMERGENCY GENERATOR. REFER TO SHEET E4.1 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 8 INTERCEPT EXISTING ATS SERVICE LATERAL AND RE-ROUTE RACEWAY TO NEW GENERATOR LOACTION. 9 PROPOSED LOCATION FOR NEW 400 kW EMERGENCY GENERATOR. PROVIDE NEW CONCRETE PAD PER STRUCTURAL AND CIVIL ENGINEERING DRAWINGS. REFER TO SHEET E4.1 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 10 REFER TO LIGHTNING PROTECTION DETAIL, SHEET E3.1 FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. 11 APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF CONDUIT WINDOW / MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER. 12 PROVIDE NEW CONCRETE BOLLARDS, TYPICAL. REFER TO SHEET E3.1 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 13 EXISTING SMOKE DETECTOR NEW CONSTRUCTION LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION EXISTING TO REMAIN NEW CONSTRUCTION �© CONNECT TO EXISTING AT THIS POINT C i O O 01 ~ O O In Q z u E- m m v — — Z to In N N tj Lu i x W LL ° w 1.. Z2 _Lu � O 0 Z� a WW cc LL m J N a N 00 — can t N tO U Z en M LLI v W t — � O �1 41 Q 11_ V O 2 130 4- cv _ 3 tU Ln w d N N � Q U t� x a W N W DC � O O Q oc Z o Lu Z Q '0 �M �n M W r n (D V� o0. co •L o LL. WfA > � W a M L z M N \\\tltllllll/��// \-EWIS ✓O d'0�.�/ \ No 38680 Q STATE OFF <(/44/� i� 'LORIOP G�?� s/ON �:\ '���1111►11��` George Johnson, P.E. PE 38680 ISSUE DATE: 10/19/2018 PROJECT NUMBER: 2847 REVISIONS: NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 1 02/22/19 FIELD COORDINATION ENLARGED ELECTRICAL ROOM AND GENERATOR LOCATION E2E2 TO THE BEST OF THE ENGINEERS KNOWLEDGE, THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS COMPLY WITH THE APPLICABLE MINIMUM BUILDING CODES AND THE APPLICABLE FIRE -SAFETY STANDARDS AS DETERMINED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY IN ACCORDANCE WITH CHAPTER 553.79 AND CHAPTER 633, FLORIDA STATUTES. © 2018 APG ENGINEERING t Y Q's U 11" GENERATOR IS A SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEM DO NOT REMOVE N-G BOND AT GENERATOR ::L TYPICAL FOR EACH 91. SERVICE DISCONNECTS N TYPICAL FOR EACH 1 NAMEPLATE DETAIL NOT TO SCALE OVER LOW HIGH ENGINE HIGH ENGINE CRANK WATER TEMP. TEMP. SHUTDOWN TEMP. PRE -ALARM SHUTDOWN LOW OIL LOW OIL OVER LOW PRESSURE PRESSURE SPEED FUEL PRE -ALARM SHUTDOWN SHUTDOWN PRESSURE LOW CONTROLS LOW BATTERY COOLANT NOT IN CRANKING CHARGER LEVEL AUTO VOLTAGE FAILURE LOW 0 0 BATTERY COMMON SILENCE LAMP VOLTAGE ALARM ALARM TEST v GENERATOR REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL (GRAP) DETAIL NOT TO SCALE NEW NATURAL GAS GENERATOR 350 kW/ 438 kVA OUTDOOR TIER 3 LEVEL 2 TYPE 60 GENERATOR PERFORMANCE NOTES 1. A MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE SHALL BE PRESENT AT THE PRE- AHCA AND FINAL AHCA SURVEYS TO SIMULATE ALARMS AND SHUTDOWN TESTS PER NFPA 110 REQUIREMENTS. GENERATOR ALARM DETAIL NOT TO SCALE BRANCH CIRCUIT FOR POWER RECEPTACLE. cn EQUIPMENT NAME � 11 � � � � � 11 3/8" LETTERS EQUIPMENT VOLTAGE 1600 A, 208 V, 3 P, 4W /1/4" LETTERS PANELBOARD O SERVICE RATED SOURCE /4" 1/4"LETTERS G EN I STAND-BY SYSTEM LETTERS NOTES: 1. NAMEPLATE SHALL BE 1/16" PHENOLIC PLASTIC LAMINATE WITH COLORS AS FOLLOWS: POWER SYSTEM NAMEPLATE LETTERING NORMAL BLACK PLATE WHITE TEXT CRITICAL BRANCH ORANGE PLATE BLACK TEXT LIFE SAFETY BRANCH YELLOW PLATE BLACK TEXT EQUIPMENT SYSTEM GREEN PLATE WHITE TEXT GENERATOR DISTRIBUTION PURPLE PLATE WHITE TEXT 2. SECURE NAMEPLATE TO SURFACES WITH (2) 5/32" FLATHEAD BRASS SCREWS. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH NAMEPLATE IDENTIFICATION NOT TO SCALE WATER JACKET HEATER , GENERATOR PNL LSMP - 9 W AT ERHOUSING I (SEE SPECIFICATIONS) i ANNUNCIATOR PANEL CONTROL i WIRING AS REQUIRED i GENERATOR WATER JACKET HEATER, 3 #10 AWG, 1 #10 AWG G N D 3/4" CONDUIT TO i PNL LSMP-7 0 0 I i 1 i 0 BATTERY CHARGER, 2 i #10 AWG, 1 #10 AWG GENERATOR i GND 3/4" CONDUIT TO CONTROL PANEL i PNL LSMP - 6 BATTERY CHARGER EPO CONTROL WIRING AS REQUIRED TO TRANSFER SWITCHES EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM - INTERLOCKING DIAGRAM NOT TO SCALE NTROL WIRING TO AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH a - ° d LV CABLING ( PER GENERATOR MANUFACTURER) IN A 1" CONDUIT TO THE e GENERATOR REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL. 41 as OPTIONAL STAND-BY GENERATOR. ELECTRICAL STUB -UP AREAS -d'° L n dd- EMERGENCY GENERATOR DETAIL —SEE STRUCTURAL DETAIL DRAWINGS S1.0 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION GROUND OBSERVATION BOX GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM 5/8" x 10'-0" CU. GROUND ROD. GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR o BOLLARDS REFER TO STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION CONCRETE SLAB 14 d° a GRADE ° SIDE VIEW 1/16" THICK WHITE PLASTIC WITH FACE COLORED PER SPECIFICATIONS 1/2" HIGH LETTERING i FOR PANELBOARD NAME �( �( PANEL "XXXX" 1/4" HIGH LETTERING I20/208V, 30, 4W FOR REMAINING TEXT FED FROM PANEL "XXXX" VIA T-XXX TYPICAL 120/2080V PANELBOARD PANELBOARD NAME PANEL "XXXX" PANELBOARD VOLTAGE 277/48OV, 30, 4W PANELBOARD SOURCE FED FROM PANEL "XXXX" TYPICAL 277/480V PANELBOARD NOTES: 1. NAMEPLATE SHALL BE 1/16" PHENOLIC PLASTIC LAMINATE WITH COLORS AS FOLLOWS: POWER SYSTEM NAMEPLATE LETTERING NORMAL BLACK PLATE WHITE TEXT CRITICAL BRANCH ORANGE PLATE BLACK TEXT LIFE SAFETY BRANCH YELLOW PLATE BLACK TEXT EQUIPMENT SYSTEM GREEN PLATE WHITE TEXT GENERATOR DISTRIBUTION PURPLE PLATE WHITE TEXT 2. SECURE NAMEPLATE TO SURFACES WITH TWO (2) 5/32" FLAT HEAD BRASS SCREWS. PANELBOARD NAMEPLATES NOT TO SCALE GROUNDING ELECTRODE n CONDUCTOR. CONNECT TO BUILDING STRUCTURE AND MA WATER LINE. (1) #250 kcmil AL. 5/8" x 10'-0" CU GROUND ROD, MINIMUM 10'-0" APART EQU I. REFEF UTILITY TRANSFORMER GENERATOR MDP LOAD A CIRCUIT BREAKER 0 A CIRCUIT BREAKER MAIN SERVICE AND GENERATOR GROUNDING DETAIL � NOT TO SCALE DETAIL NOTES 1. RECEPTACLE IN NEMA 311 ENCLOSURE. ENCLOSURE SHALL REMAIN WEATHER PROOF WHEN RECEPTACLE IS IN USE 2. 3/4" RIGID STEEL CONDUIT 3. GROUND 4. 1-5/8" GALVANIZED UNISTRUT SUPPORT, 36" LONG, 6" A.F.G. TO BOTTOM OF RECEPTACLE. WEATHERPROOF RECEPTACLE NOT TO SCALE EMERGENCY GENERATOR PLAN R766 (30.2) TYP. DOOR SWING CONCRETE SLAB R746 (29.4) TYP. DOOR SWING EMERGENCY GENERATOR :::�\\ AIR BOND TO GENERATOR ENCLOSURE GENERATOR ENCLOSURE AIRn \, AIR COPPER -CLAD GROUND d d - - - ° da ROD. HARGER CATALOG III Ns 5810. (TYPICAL) d, BOND TO FUEL OIL TANK AND GENERATOR FRAME MAIN LIGHTNING CONDUCTOR. DISCHARGE AIR HARGER CATALOG N2 29R. 34 ' SOLID COPPER AIR TERMINALMARGER — AIR U AIR U AIR CATALOG Ns 63. (TYPICAL) AIR TERMINAL (TYPICAL) MAIN LIGHTNING CONDUCTOR AIR INTAKE ADHESIVE CABLE HOLDER. HARGER AIR 10" TYP LIGHTNING PROTECTION, INC. CATALOG Ns 262. (TYPICAL) AIR TERMINAL BRACE HARGER CATALOG Ns 140 AD. (TYPICAL) ACCESS PANEL GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL 0wo12" REFER TO STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING DRAWINGS FOR CONCRETE PAD SIZING REQUIREMENTS. GRADE EMERGENCY GENERATOR ELEVATION NOTE: WHEN GENERATOR ENCLOSURE IS 48" OR GREATER, PROVIDE ONE AIR TERMINAL ON EACH CORNER. MAXIMUM SPACING OF AIR TERMINALS SHALL NOT EXCEED 20'-0" AND SHALL BE LOCATED WITHIN 24" OF THE GENERATOR SET PERIMETER. EMERGENCY GENERATOR ELEVATION AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS NOT TO SCALE 0 C 'i O O 0) ~ Ln z 470OQ c oM V m tj cV N tj �� w� C9CU W C LL w° a H z -z O (Dt 0 z IL IL wLLI w Z m cV a cV 00 — M t fV U o � Z cM M v CU W N — •� > O J Q LL u W L o 4- i 3 w L u W d N m W 2 .4 u Q J J x a W N W O O Q ZO cm W z a -a Ln cm M W crm 'C G a m •° 'i o W �w �^ W L a M t t z a MN GO.Ewls ilo �s0 • �( No 38680 44/ i Q�•. -STATE OF •��<(/ �� � •'•.'�CORIDP ••'G\ \� "'%ss/ON A\- 0\\. ////1111110 George Johnson, P.E. PE 38680 ISSUE DATE: 10/19/2018 PROJECT NUMBER: 2847 REVISIONS: NO. DATE DESCRIPTION ELECTRICAL DETAILS NOT TO SCALE TO THE BEST OF THE ENGINEERS KNOWLEDGE, THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS COMPLY WITH THE APPLICABLE MINIMUM BUILDING CODES AND THE APPLICABLE FIRE -SAFETY STANDARDS AS DETERMINED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY IN ACCORDANCE WITH CHAPTER 553.79 AND CHAPTER 633, FLORIDA STATUTES. © 2018APG ENGINEERIN, E301 Z Y 7 W Q U >- 5.: F Co a Z LU 0 3uz i oc ova IFj cvus Classified by underwriters Laboratories, Inc. to UL 1479 and CAN/ULCS115 System No. C-AJ-1184 ANSI/UL1479 (ASTM E814) CAN/ULC S115 F Rating — 3 Hr F Rating — 3 Hr T Rating — 0 Hr FT Rating — 0 Hr FH Rating — 3 Hr FTH Rating — 0 Hr 1. Floor or Wall Assembly — Min 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) thick reinforced lightweight or normal weight (100-150 pcf or 1600-2400 kg/m') concrete. Wall may also be constructed of any UL Classified Concrete Blocks*. Floor may also be constructed of any min 7-1/2 in. (190 mm) thick UL Classified hollow core Precast Concrete Units*. Max diam of opening is 14 in. (356 mm) when concrete floor or wall is used and max 7 in. (178 mm) when precast concrete units are used. See Concrete Blocks (CAZT) and Precast Concrete Units (CFTV) categories in the Fire Resistance Directory for names of manufacturers. 2. Through -Penetrants — One metallic pipe, conduit or tubing to be installed either concentrically or eccentrically within the firestop system. The annular space between pipe, conduit or tubing and periphery of opening shall be min 0 in. (point contact) to max 3-1/4 in. (83 mm). Pipe, conduit or tubing to be rigidly supported on both sides of floor or wall assembly. The following types and sizes of metallic pipes, conduits or tubing may be used: A. Steel Pipe — Nom 10 in. (254 mm) diam (or smaller) Schedule 10 (or heavier) steel pipe. B. Iron Pipe — Nom 10 in. (254 mm) diam (or smaller) cast or ductile iron pipe. C. Conduit — Nom 4 in. (102 mm) diam (or smaller) steel electrical metallic tubing or steel conduit. D. Copper Tubing — Nom 4 in. (102 mm) diam (or smaller) Type L (or heavier) copper tubing. E. Copper Pipe — Nom 4 in. (102 mm) diam (or smaller) regular (or heavier) copper pipe. 3. Forms — (Not Shown, Optional) — Used as a form to prevent leakage of fill material during installation. Forms to be rigid sheet material, cut to fit the contour of the penetrating item and positioned as required to accommodate the required thickness of fill material. Forms to be removed after fill material has cured. Additional forming material may be used concrete block wall is penetrated. A min 1/2 in. (13 mm) thickness of min 4 pcf (64 kg/m') mineral wool batt insulation is firmly packed into the annulus as a permanent form and recessed from both surfaces of the wall as required to accommodate the required thickness of fill material. 4. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* — Sealant — Min 1 in. (25 mm) thickness of fill material applied within the annulus. At the point contact location between through penetrant and concrete, a min 1/2 in. (13 mm) diam bead of fill material shall be applied at the concrete through penetrant interface. When precast concrete units are used, the fill material shall be installed within annular space, flush with lower surface of floor. When concrete block wall is penetrated, a min 1 in. (25 mm) thickness of fill material shall be applied within the annulus flush with both surfaces of wall. HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — FS605, FS-ONE Sealant or FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Sealant * Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification (such as Canada), respectively. Reproduced by HILTI, Inc. Courtesy of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Hilti Firestop Systems January07,2015 FLOOR OR WALL PENETRATIONS IFj c V� us Classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. to UL 1479 and CAN/ULC-S115 System No. W-L-1054 ANSI/UL1479 (ASTM E814) CAN/ULC S115 F Ratings —1 and 2 Hr (See Items 1 and F Ratings —1 and 2 Hr (See Items 1 and 3) 3) T Rating — 0 Hr FT Rating — 0 Hr L Rating at Ambient — Less Than 1 FH Ratings —1 and 2 Hr (See Items 1 CFM/sq ft and 3) L Rating at 400 F — Less Than 1 CFM/sq FTH Rating — 0 Hr ft FTH Rating — 0 Hr L Rating at Ambient — Less Than 1 CFM/sq ft L Rating at 400 F — Less Than 1 CFM/sq ft 1. Wall Assembly — The 1 or 2 hr fire -rated gypsum wallboard/stud wall assembly shall be constructed of the materials and in the manner specified in the individual U300 or U400 Series Wall and Partition Designs in the UL Fire Resistance Directory and shall include the following construction features: A. Studs — Wall framing may consist of either wood studs or steel channel studs. Wood studs to consist of nom 2 by 4 in. (51 by 102 mm) lumber spaced 16 in. (406 mm) OC. Steel studs to be min 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) wide and spaced max 24 in. (610 mm) OC. When steel studs are used and the diam of opening exceeds the width of stud cavity, the opening shall be framed on all sides using lengths of steel stud installed between the vertical studs and screw -attached to the steel studs at each end. The framed opening in the wall shall be 4 to 6 in. (102 to 152 mm) wider and 4 to 6 in. (102 to 152 mm) higher than the diam of the penetrating item such that, when the penetrating item is installed in the opening, a 2 to 3 in. (51 to 76 mm) clearance is present between the penetrating item and the framing on all four sides. B. Gypsum Board* — 5/8 in. (16 mm) thick, 4 It (122 cm) wide with square or tapered edges. The gypsum board type, thickness, number of layers, fastener type and sheet orientation shall be as specified in the individual U300 or U400 Series Design in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. Max diam of opening is 32-1/4 in. (819 mm) for steel stud walls. Max diam of opening is 14-1/2 in. (368 mm) for wood stud walls. The F and FH Ratings of the firestop system are equal to the fire rating of the wall assembly. 2. Through -Penetrants — One metallic pipe, conduit or tubing to be installed either concentrically or eccentrically within the firestop system. The annular space shall be min 0 in. to max 2-1/4 in. (57 mm). Pipe may be installed with continuous point contact. Pipe, conduit or tubing may be installed at an angle not greater than 45 degrees from perpendicular. Pipe, conduit or tubing to be rigidly supported on both sides of wall assembly. The following types and sizes of metallic pipes, conduits or tubing may be used: A. Steel Pipe — Nom 30 in. (762 mm) diam (or smaller) Schedule 10 (or heavier) steel pipe. B. Iron Pipe — Nom 30 in. (762 mm) diam (or smaller) cast or ductile iron pipe. C. Conduit — Nom 4 in. (102 mm) diam (or smaller) steel electrical metallic tubing or 6 in. (152 mm) . diam steel conduit. D. Copper Tubing — Nom 6 in. (152 mm) diam (or smaller) Type L (or heavier) copper tubing. E. Copper Pipe — Nom 6 in. (152 mm) diam (or smaller) regular (or heavier) copper pipe. 3. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* — Sealant — Min 5/8 in. (16 mm) thickness of fill material applied within the annulus, flush with both surfaces of wall. At the point or continuous contact locations between pipe and wall, a min 1/2 in. (13 mm) diam bead of fill material shall be applied at the pipe wall interface on both surfaces of wall. HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — FS-One Sealant or FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Sealant * Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification (such as Canada), respectively. Reproduced by HILTI, Inc. Courtesy of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Hifd Firestop Systierins January 23, 2015 WALL PENETRATIONS CV c V� us Classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. to UL 1479 and CAN/ULC•S115 System No. C-AJ-1421 ANSI/UL1479 (ASTM E814) CAN/ULC S115 F Ratings — 2 or 3 Hr F Ratings — 2 or 3 Hr T Rating — 0 Hr FT Rating — 0 Hr L Rating at Ambient — Less Than 1 FH Ratings — 2 or 3 Hr CFM/sq ft L Rating at 400 F — Less Than 1 FTH Rating — 0 Hr CFM/sq ft L Rating at Ambient — Less Than 1 CFM/sq ft L Rating at 400 F — Less Than 1 CFM/sq ft SECTION A -A 1. Floor or Wall Assembly — Min 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) thick reinforced lightweight or normal weight (100-150 pcf or 1600-2400 kg/m') concrete. Wall may also be constructed of any UL Classified Concrete Blocks*. Max diam of opening is 6 in. (152 mm). See Concrete Blocks (CAZT) category in the Fire Resistance Directory for names of manufacturers. 2. Metallic Sleeve — (Optional) Nom 6 in. (152 mm) diam (or smaller) Schedule 40 (or heavier) steel sleeve cast or grouted into floor or wall assembly, flush with floor or wall surfaces. 3. Through -Penetrant — One metallic pipe or conduit to be installed either concentrically or eccentrically within the firestop system. The annular space between pipe, tube or conduit and periphery of opening shall be min 0 in. (pant contact) to max 5-318 in. (137 mm). Pipe or conduit to be rigidly supported on both sides of floor or wall assembly. The following types and sizes of metallic pipes or conduits may be used: A. Steel Pipe — Nom 4 in. (102 mm) diam (or smaller) Schedule 10 (or heavier) steel pipe. B. Iron Pipe — Nom 4 in. (102 mm) diam (or smaller) cast or ductile iron pipe. C. Copper Pipe — Nom 4 in. (102 mm) diam (or smaller) Regular (or heavier) copper pipe. D. Copper Tubing — Nom 4 in. (102 mm) diam (or smaller) Type L (or heavier) copper tubing. E. Conduit — Nom 4 in. (102 mm) diam (or smaller) steel conduit. F. Conduit — Nom 4 in. (102 mm) diam (or smaller) steel electrical metallic tubing (EMT). 4. Firestop System — The firestop system shall consist of the following: A. Packing Material — Min 4 in. (102 mm) thickness of min 4 pcf (64 kg/m') mineral wool batt insulation firmly packed into opening as a permanent form. Packing material to be recessed from top surface of floor or from both surfaces of wall to accommodate the required thickness of fill material. B. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* - Sealant — Min 1/4 in. (6 mm) thickness of fill material applied within the annulus, flush with top surface of floor or with both surfaces of wall. For 3 Hr rated assemblies, a min 1/4 in. (6 mm) diam bead of fill material shall be applied at the concrete/pipe interface at the point contact location on the top surface of floor and on both surfaces of wall. HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CFS-S SIL GG, CFS-S SIL SL, FS-ONE Sealant, FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Sealant or CP604 Self -Leveling Firestop Sealant. CP604 and CFS-S SIL SL shall be used in floor applications only. When CP604, CFS-S SIL GG or CFS-S SIL SL (floors only) is used, F Rating is 2 Hr. * Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification (such as Canada), respectively. Reproduced by HILTI, Inc. Courtesy of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Hilti Firestop Systems January 28, 2015 FLOOR OR WALL PENETRATIONS NOT TO SCALE I NOT TO SCALE I �`�� NOT TO SCALE (A tki r- Lr) r- 0 Z C 0 0) •4) 0 5 5 Ln ZU E-MM(> _ Z Ln Ln N N �ti n n LU`° W C U_ W� ~ 3 � Z Z O (5 b O Z IL IL WUJI IX LL l7 Z m N J a N 00 — m t a on W Z can M LUN W CCU — > _O J CU Q Ll u QU L L o q -J = 3 LU Ln U W a N cv (11 Q dam' V a W IV W O O Q Iflc Z O LU Z -p Ln M M LU V C a '% o W >%� 4 1 �^ LU L. a M L L .c z 00 M a N \\Xj%IIIIII//// o�GIP-\-EWIS JOy� \\CENSF. SO * ,No 38680 0 TATE OF George Johnson, P.E. PE38680 ISSUE DATE: 10/19/2018 PROJECT NUMBER: 2847 REVISIONS: NO. DATE DESCRIPTION ELECTRICAL DETAILS TO THE BEST OF THE ENGINEERS KNOWLEDGE, THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS COMPLY WITH THE APPLICABLE MINIMUM BUILDING CODES AND THE APPLICABLE FIRE -SAFETY STANDARDS AS DETERMINED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY IN ACCORDANCE WITH CHAPTER 553.79 AND CHAPTER 633, FLORIDA STATUTES. 0 2018 APG ENGINEERING E302 02 � d av r m Lij co Z Y �UJZw u d PANEL LSMP ❑C DEVICE TYPE) Breaker ENCL❑-:URE. NEMA I MAINS(A): ML❑ C❑NTINU❑LS(A). 600 L❑CATI❑N1 MAIN ELECTRICAL R❑❑M DEVICE FAMILY: Bolt Or, M❑UNTING: Surface WIRING: 3-Phase 4-Wire BUS SC RATING(A) 22000 FED FR❑Mi ATS-LSMP-L V❑LTAGE: 2081120 FAULT CUPRENT(A): 15969 NORMAL SY_.TEM EXISTING PANELB❑ARD El I- NOTES DESCRIPTI❑N DEMAND VA CKT PHASE LOADS VA CKT IV 1) DEMAND DESCRIPTI❑N NOTES ❑C AMPS P CODE A B C C❑DE AMPS P 20 1 LTS - C I I I LIGHTIN 500 1 500 2 0 SPARE SPARE 20 1 20 1 LTS - C112 LIGHTIN 500 3 680 4 160 GENERAL FACP 20 1 20_1 LTS - C 1 10 LIGHTIN 500 5_ 6- - - - 1000 GENERAL BATTERY CHARGER GEN Rol 20 1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ------------ JACKET HEATER GEN -- - -- GENERAL. - -- 1200 7 120i>,---- 8 --- 0 -ARF SPARE ----------- SPARE ------------ - 20 1 LT-/REC GEN GEN_ER_AL__500 9_ 1 1000 10 �00 LIGHTIN LTS EXTERIUP. 20 1 __20_I 20 1 ________ ___-- PHONE BARD GENERAL 180 11 -__� 180 12 0 SPARE SPARE 20 1 20 1 SPARE SPARE 0 13 5A 14 500 LIGHTIN LTS CANEPY 20 1 20 I SPARE SPARE 0 I5 500 16 500 LIGHTIN LTS EXTERI❑R 20 1 20 1 LTS DINING LIGHTIN 500 17 1000 18 500 LIGHTIN LTS EXTERI❑R 20 1 201 LTS MECH/ELEC LIGHTIN 500 19 1000 20 500 LIGHTIN LTS - 1- �0 1 20 1 LTS EXTERI❑R LIGHTIN 500 21 DULIU 2c 50Ci GENERAL SPD NOTE 1 0 1 20 1 SPARE SPARE 0 23 0 24 0 SPACE SPACE 0 1 ALL C❑NNECTED KVA MAX PH AMPS + PHASE T❑TALS VA AMPS BUS T❑TALS KVA TOTAL CONNECTED 9.06 26.6 * A-N 3200.0 26:6 C❑NNECTED 0:00 TOTAL DEMAND 5.33 15:5 + B-N 3180.0 26,5 DEMAND 0,00 TOTAL DESIGN 5.88 17,1 C-N 2680.0 22,3 DEIGN 0,00 PR❑VIDE NEW CIRCUIT BREAKER, TYPE THUD PANELB❑ARD MANUFACTURER GE, TYPE PI IRCUITS MODIFIED UNDER SCOPE OF WORK TYPICAL ELECTRICAL PANEL SCHEDULE NOT TO SCALE OPTIONAL STAND-BY GENERATOR LOAD SUMMARY EXISTING DEMAND LOAD(S) DEMAND (kW) FACILITY MAXIMUM LOAD ( BASED ON 1 YEAR UTILITY BILLS): 235 FACILITY MAXIMUM LOAD ( BASED ON 1 YEAR UTILITY BILLS) X 1.25: 293.75 OPTIONAL STAND-BY GENERATOR LOAD 293.75 OPTIONAL STAND-BY GENERATOR CAPACITY 400 SHEET NOTES 1 CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY OWNER A MINIMUM OF 72 HRS PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF SHUTDOWN WORK. 2 NEW EMERGENCY GENERATOR SHALL BE SECURED IN ORDER TO MEET THE WIND LOADING REQUIREMENTS SET FORTH IN THE 2017 FLORIDA BUILDING CODE. VERIFY REQUIREMENTS WITH STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND GENERATOR SET MANUFACTURER. SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION 1. SET UP TEMPORARY GENERATOR AND TEMPORARY AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH. PERFORM SYSTEM TEST OF TEMPORARY GENERATOR AND AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH. 2. REMOVE EXISTING EMERGENY GENERATOR, DEMOLISH EXISTING EMERGENCY GENERATOR CONCRETE PAD. PREPARE SITE FOR NEW EMERGENCY GENERATOR CONCRETE PAD. 3. INSTALL NEW EMERGENCY GENERATOR AND NEW AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH CONCRETE PAD. 4. INSTALL NEW EMERGENCY GENERATOR AND NEW AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH. 5. ROUTE CONDUIT RACEWAY TO NEW EMERGENCY GENERATOR FROM THE NEW AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH. 6. CONNECT EXISTING CONDUIT RACEWAY TO THE NEW EMERGENCY GENERATOR. 7. SCHEDULE SHUTDOWN WITH FACILITY AND UTILITY POWER COMPANY. 8. INTERCEPT UTILITY CONDUITS AND ROUTE NEW CONDUIT RACEWAY TO NEW AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH. TERMINATE ALL CONDUCTORS. TEST COMPLETE SYSTEM 9. PERFORM GENERATOR ACCEPTANCE TEST AS PER NFPA 110. LL T_d�,,a KEYNOTES DEMOLITION 1 DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING 125 kW EMERGENCY GENERATOR. _M, 2 EXISTING 2 (SETS) 4 #500 kcmil AL, 1 #3/0 AWG AL GND, 3 1/2" C.REMOVE EXISTING FEEDER CONDUCTORS AND INTERCEPT UNDERGROUND FEEDER m. �... ._.. .... -._. _.w _.. _.•� _ - �� CONDUITS AT A CONVENIENTT LOCATION. REFER TO NEW CONSTRUCTION THIS SHEET FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. i 3 REMOVE EXISTING FEEDER CONDUCTORS AND INTERCEPT UNDERGROUND FEEDER CONDUITS AT A CONVENIENT LOCATION. REFER TO NEW CONSTRUCTION 177 SHEET FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION _ THIS -=y�' ; 4 REMOVE EXISTING MAIN NEUTRAL GROUND (N-G) BONDING JUMPER. <' ; 5 EXISTING 5 (SETS) 4 #600 kcmil AL, 1 #350 AWG AL GND, 3 1/2" C. 6 EXISTING 3 SETS 4 #500 kcmil AL 1 #4 0 AWG AL GND 3 1/2 C. r. _ r AL, 1 #6 AWG AL GND, 2 C 3; tea. ».,a... :.,.x . a ...aq ,,,,>a '�: < .. i ,.... , ¢ .. e , < • , r•. P; 1 k= 8 EXISTING 4 #1 AWG AL, 1 #6 AWG AL GND, 2" C. f 1 3 a i � 1.e r .. GEN 1 - 1 / Y 11 R Saf 9 EXISTING PULL BOX q 1 10 EXIST kcmil A �: , ;'• � _, , , ,�. � .. .... 1 .. � ,, I I L, #1/0 GND, 4 C. EXISTING 3 (SETS) 4 #500 I AWG AL W i 2" C k 11 EXISTING 4 #1 AWG #6 AWG AL GND, : L n PARTIAL ELECTRICAL RISER DIAGRAM DEMOLITION NOT TO SCALE ....._. x ..._ _ ..__...._. _. .._.. ` .. PARTIAL ELECTRICAL RISER DIAGRAM NEW CONSTRUCTION NOT TO SCALE 3 PANELBOARD MAIN TYPE, XX55 DESIGNATION MCB/MLO XX MAIN AMPACITY DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 1600 A CIRCUIT BREAKER 600 A CIRCUIT BREAKER- 1600 A 4 POLE GEN i N E ; 4�kkW I GRADE O KEYNOTES NEW CONSTRUCTION 1 NEW 400 kW, 208/120 V, 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE, NATURAL GAS SOUND ATTENUATED EMERGENCY GENERATOR WITH NOA RATED ENCLOSURE, FURNISHED BY OWNER, INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR. 2 PROVIDE NEW 5/8" X 10'-0" COPPER CLAD GROUND ROD. REFER TO SHEET E3.1 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 3 EXTEND UNDERGROUND RACEWAY TO NEW EMERGENCY GENERATOR LOCATION. PROVIDE 2 (SETS) 4 #500 kcmil AL, 1 #2/0 AWG AL GND, 3 1/2" C. 4 PROVIDE 5 (SETS) 4 #600 kcmil AL, 1 #350 kcmil AL GND, 4" C. 5 EXTEND RACEWAY TO NEW SERVICE RATED ATS LOCATION. PROVIDE 5 (SETS) 4 #600 kcmil AL, 4" C. 6 NEW 1600 A, 208/120 V, 3PHASE, 4 POLE, 65 kA WCR, PAD MOUNTED SERVICE ENTRANCE RATED AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH WITHIN A NEMA 3R WEATHERPROOF ENCLOSURE, FURNISHED BY OWNER INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR. 7 PROVIDE NEW SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE. POWERLOGIC, MODEL PQM200 208/120 V. CONNECT TO LOAD SIDE. 8 BOND TO GROUNDING SYSTEMS. REFER TO GROUNDING SYSTEM DETAIL ON SHEET E3.1 FOR ALL SYSTEMS TO BE BONDED. 9 PROVIDE NEW 1 #250 kcmil AL GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR. 10 EXISTING 5 (SETS) 4 #600 kcmil AL, 1 #350 AWG AL GND, 4" C. 11 EXISTING 2 (SETS) 4 #500 kcmil AL, 1 #2/0 AWG AL GND, 3 1/2" C. 12 EXISTING 4 #1/0 AWG AL, 1 #6 AWG AL GND, 2" C. 13 EXISTING 4 #1 AWG AL, 1 #6 AWG AL GND, 2" C. 14 EXISTING PULL BOX. 15 EXISTING 3 (SETS) 4 #500 kcmil AL, #1/0 AWG AL GND, 4" C. 16 EXISTING 4 #1 AWG AL, 1 #6 AWG AL GND, 2" C. 17 EXISTING 3 (SETS) 4 #500 kcmil AL, 1 #4/0 AWG AL GND, 3 1/2" C. 18 REPLACE EXISTING 400 A SPECTRA RMS CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIP PLUG,TYPE SRPG400A, WITH A NEW 350 A TRIP PLUG TYPE SRPG350A. 19 PROVIDE NEW SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE. POWERLOGIC, MODEL PQC50 208/120 V. CONNECT TO LOAD SIDE. NEW CONSTRUCTION LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION - EXISTING TO REMAIN NEW CONSTRUCTION CONNECT TO EXISTING AT THIS POINT DEMOLITION LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION EXISTING TO REMAIN -------------- EXISTING TO BE REMOVED DEMO TO THIS POINT ZQ '% O O al O Om Q u C O O U _ Z Ln Ln fV N 0 �x Lu Lu C LL w ° a z —Z O (5 p 0 z 1% IL w Lu cc LL Z 00 cV a V c00 — m t N o Z m M Co LY to J Q LL Q N .0 sr u c o b 4- ca = 3 Lu L W d 00 N 2 -4 u Q J J a W N W (A CC O O ZO LI.J -p en LA enZu M W .a M = C a cv i o W W a Ms L z M N -EWIS JO `C7.' ��G E NSF, No 38680 . tti: x 4u; Qom•, STATE OF •FC0RID •' G��� /,SOON A1-�.\\�. '��/IIIIll%%\\ George Johnson, P.E. PE 38680 ISSUE DATE: 10/19/2018 PROJECT NUMBER: 2847 REVISIONS: NO. DATE DESCRIPTION ELECTRICAL RISER DIAGRAM AND PANEL SCHEDULES E401 TO THE BEST OF THE ENGINEERS KNOWLEDGE, THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS COMPLY WITH THE APPLICABLE MINIMUM BUILDING CODES AND THE APPLICABLE FIRE -SAFETY STANDARDS AS DETERMINED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY IN ACCORDANCE WITH CHAPTER 553.79 AND CHAPTER 633, FLORIDA STATUTES. © 2018APG ENGINEERING ".. d f ar u }mw co 0 Z Y 0 3uz �LLI _ cr o u n. SECTION 260500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1- GENERAL 1.01SECTION INCLUDES A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS OF THE CONTRACT INCLUDING GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 01 SPECIFICATION SECTIONS APPLY TO ALL DIVISION 26 SECTIONS. B. FURNISH AND INSTALL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, AND ACCESSORIES IN ACCORDANCE WITH THIS SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS. 1.02RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. SECTION 03 3000 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE. B. SECTION 23 0000 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING. C. SECTION 07 8400 - FIRE AND SMOKE PROTECTION. 1.030THER RELATED REQUIREMENTS OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS 1.04SUBMITTALS A. COMPLY WITH PROVISIONS OF DIVISION 01. B. THE ENGINEER'S APPROVAL SHALL BE OBTAINED FOR ALL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS BEFORE DELIVERY TO THE JOB SITE. DELIVERY, STORAGE OR INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS WHICH HAS NOT HAD PRIOR APPROVAL WILL NOT BE PERMITTED. C. ALL SUBMITTALS SHALL INCLUDE 2 COPIES OF ADEQUATE DESCRIPTIVE LITERATURE, CATALOG, SHOP DRAWINGS, TEST REPORTS, CERTIFICATIONS, SAMPLES, AND OTHER DATA NECESSARY TO ASCERTAIN THAT THE PROPOSED EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS COMPLY WITH DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS REQUIREMENTS D. SUBMITTALS FOR INDIVIDUALS SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT ASSEMBLIES WHICH CONSIST OF MORE THAN ONE ITEM OR COMPONENT SHALL BE MADE FOR THE SYSTEM OR ASSEMBLY AS A WHOLE. PARTIAL SUBMITTALS WILL NOT BE CONSIDERED FOR APPROVAL. 1. MARK THE SUBMITTALS, "SUBMITTED UNDER SECTION" " 2. SUBMIT EACH SECTION SEPARATELY. E. SUBMIT ELEMENTARY AND INTERCONNECTION OR POINT-TO-POINT WIRING DIAGRAMS FOR FIRE ALARM, COMMUNICATION AND SIGNAL, AND CONTROL SYSTEMS. ALLTERMINAL POINT SHALL BE IDENTIFIED ON WIRING DIAGRAMS. F. SUBMIT DIMENSIONED EQUIPMENT ROOM LAYOUTS. 1. SHOW LOCATION OF ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN ROOMS INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO: A. ELECTRICAL ROOMS AND CLOSETS G. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SUBMITTALS WILL BE REJECTED WITHOUT DIMENSIONED EQUIPMENT ROOM OR EQUIPMENT LOCATION LAYOUTS.. 1.05REFERENCE STANDARDS A. PERFORM WORK SPECIFIED IN DIVISION 26 IN ACCORDANCE WITH STANDARDS LISTED BELOW OF THE LATEST APPLICABLE EDITION ADOPTED BY THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS SHALL TAKE PRECEDENT IN THOSE INSTANCES WHERE REQUIREMENTS ARE GREATER THAN THOSE STATED IN THE BELOW CODES AND STANDARDS. IN CASE OF CONFLICT, OBTAIN A DECISION FROM THE ENGINEER. B. ADA STANDARDS FOR ACCESSIBLE DESIGN(2010) C. AIA GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF HEALTH CARE FACILITIES (2014) D. FLORIDA BUILDING CODE (2017) E. U.L. FIRE RESISTANCE INDEX. F. NFPA 1: FIRE CODE (2015) G. NFPA 37: STANDARD FOR THE INSTALLATION AND USE OF STATIONARY COMBUSTION ENGINES AND GAS TURBINES; 2015, H. NFPA 70: NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (2014) I. NFPA 90A: STANDARD FOR THE INSTALLATION OF AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATING SYSTEMS (2015) J. NFPA 99: STANDARD FOR HEALTH CARE FACILITIES 2015 K. NFPA 101: LIFE SAFETY CODE (2015) L. NFPA 110: STANDARD FOR EMERGENCY AND STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS (2013) M. NFPA 241: STANDARD FOR SAFEGUARDING BUILDING CONSTRUCTION, ALTERATION AND DEMOLITION OPERATIONS (2013) N. OTHER STANDARDS: 1. ANSI 2. ASME 3. ASHRAE 4. ASTM 5. IEEE 6. IESNA 7. ISO 8. NECA 9. NEMA 10. OSHA 11. UL 1.06QUALITY ASSURANCE A. COMPLY WITH APPLICABLE LOCAL, STATE, AND FEDERAL CODES. B. WARRANT ELECTRICAL WORK AGAINST FAULTY MATERIAL OR WORKMANSHIP IN ACCORDANCE WITH DIVISION 01. IF THE PROJECT IS OCCUPIED OR THE SYSTEMS PLACED IN OPERATION IN SEVERAL PHASES AT THE REQUEST OF THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE, THEN THE WARRANTY OF EACH SYSTEM OR PIECE OF EQUIPMENT USED, SHALL BEGIN ON THE DATE EACH SYSTEM OR PIECE OF EQUIPMENT WAS PLACED IN SATISFACTORY OPERATION AND ACCEPTED AS SUCH, IN WRITING, BY THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. THE USE OF BUILDING EQUIPMENT FOR TEMPORARY SERVICE AND TESTING DOES NOT CONSTITUTE THE BEGINNING OF THE WARRANTY. EQUIPMENT MATERIAL PRO C. EQ I UNDER THIS DIVISION SHALL BE PERIODICALLY INSPECTED AND PROVIDED SERVICED BY COMPETENT MECHANICS. THIS FUNCTION BECOMES THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE WHEN THE SYSTEM IS ACCEP TED BY THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. THE ONE YEAR MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP WARRANTY IS NOT INTENDED TO SUPPLANT NORMAL INSPECTION OR SERVICE AND SHALL NOT BE CONSTRUED TO MEAN THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE FREE SERVICE FOR NORMAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS SUCH AS PERIODIC LUBRICATION AND ADJUSTMENT DUE TO NORMAL USE, NOR TO CORRECT WITHOUT CHARGE, BREAKAGE, MALADJUSTMENT, AND OTHER TROUBLE CAUSED BY IMPROPER MAINTENANCE. D. TURN OVER ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PROVIDED UNDER THIS DIVISION TO THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE IN LUBRICATED CONDITION. INCLUDE INSTRUCTIONS ON FURTHER LUBRICATION IN THE OPERATING MANUAL. E. UPON COMPLETION OF CONTRACT AND PROGRESSIVELY AS WORK PROCEEDS, CLEAN-UP AND REMOVE DIRT DEBRIS AND SCRAP MATERIALS. MAINTAIN PREMI SES NEAT AND CLEAN. PROTECT AND PRESERVE ACCESS TOENERGIZED E UIPMENT AT ALL TIMES.CLEAN ITEMS WITH FACTORY FINISHES. TOUCH-UP Q MINOR DAMAGE TO SURFACES; REFINISH ENTIRE PIECE OF EQUIPMENT WHEN SUSTAINED MAJOR DAMAGE. USE ONLY FACTORY SUPPLIED PAINTS OF MATCHING COLOR AND FORMULA. 1.07QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCT AND SERVICES) A. MANUFACTURE'S QUALIFICATIONS: THE MANUFACTURER SHALL REGULARLY AND CURRENTLY PRODUCE, AS ONE OF THE MANUFACTURER'S PRINCIPAL PRODUCTS, THE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS SPECIFIED FOR THIS PROJECT, AND SHALL HAVE MANUFACTURED THE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS FOR AT LEAST THREE YEARS. B. PRODUCT QUALIFICATION: 1. MANUFACTURED EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS SHALL HAVE BEEN IN SATISFACTORY OPERATION, ON THREE INSTALLATION OF SIMILAR SIZE AND TYPE AS THIS PROJECT AT LEAST FOR THREE YEARS. 2. THE ENGINEER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REQUIRE THE CONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT A LIST OF INSTALLATIONS WHERE THE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS HAVE BEEN IN OPERATION BEFORE APPROVAL. C. SERVICE QUALIFICATIONS: THERE SHALL BE A PERMANENT SERVICE ORGANIZATION MAINTAINED OR TRAINED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHICH WILL RENDER SATISFACTORY SERVICE TO THIS INSTALLATION WITHIN FOUR HOURS OF RECEIPT OF NOTIFICATION THAT SERVICE IS NEEDED. SUBMIT NAME AND ADDRESS OF SERVICE ORGANIZATIONS. 1.08DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. DELIVER EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS IN MANUFACTURER'S ORIGINAL UNOPENED PACKAGING. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS SHALL BE PROTECTED DURING SHIPMENT AND STORAGE AGAINST PHYSICAL DAMAGE, VERMIN, DIRT, CORROSIVE SUBSTANCES, FUME, MOISTURE, COLD, AND RAIN. EVIDENCE OF DAMAGE FROM WATER OR OTHER CONTAMINANTS WILL BE CAUSE OF REJECTION. 1. STORE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS INDOORS IN CLEAN DRY SPACE WITH UNIFORM TEMPERATURE TO PREVENT CONDENSATION. 2. DURING INSTALLATION, EQUIPMENT SHALL BE PROTECTED AGAINST ENTRY OF INSTANCES MATTER, AND BE VACUUM -CLEANED BOTH INSIDE AND OUTSIDE BEFORE TESTING AND OPERATING. COMPRESSED AIR SHALL NOT BE USED TO CLEAN EQUIPMENT. REMOVE LOOSE PACKING AND FLAMMABLE MATERIALS FROM INSIDE EQUIPMENT. 3. DAMAGED EQUIPMENT SHALL BE REPAIRED OR REPLACED, AS DETERMINED BY THE ENGINEER. 4. PAINTED SURFACES SHALL BE PROTECTED WITH FACTORY INSTALLED REMOVABLE HEAVY CRAFT PAPER, SHEET VINYL OR EQUAL. 5. DAMAGED PAINT ON EQUIPMENT SHALL BE REFINISHED WITH THE SAME QUALITY OF PAINT AS USED BY MANUFACTURER SO REPAIRED AREAS ARE NT OBVIOUS. 1.09OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. PROVIDE MANUALS IN ACCORDANCE WITH DIVISION 01. B. SUBMIT AS REQUIRED FOR SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT SPECIFIED IN THE TECHNICAL SECTIONS. FURNISH IN HARDCOVER OR AN APPROVED EQUIVALENT. 1. INSCRIBE THE FOLLOWING IDENTIFICATION "MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION MANUAL", THE NAME AND LOCATION OF THE SYSTEM, EQUIPMENT, BUILDING, NAME OF CONTRACTOR, AND CONTRACT NAME AND NUMBER. 2. PROVIDE A TABLE OF CONTENTS AND ASSEMBLE THE MANUAL TO CONFORM TO THE TABLE OF CONTENTS, WITH TAB SHEETS PLACED BEFORE INSTRUCTIONS COVERING THE SUBJECT. THE INSTRUCTION SHALL BE LEGIBLE AND EASILY TO READ, WITH LARGE SHEETS OF DRAWINGS FOLDED IN. 3. THE MANUALS SHALL INCLUDE: A. INTERNAL AND INTERCONNECTING WIRING AND CONTROL DIAGRAMS WITH DATA TO EXPLAIN DETAILED OPERATION AND CONTROL OF THE EQUIPMENT. B. A CONTROL SEQUENCE DESCRIBING START-UP, OPERATION, AND SHUTDOWN. C. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS D. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE. E. PERIODIC MAINTENANCE AND TESTING PROCEDURES. F. PERFORMANCE DATA. G. PICTORIAL "EXPLODED" PARTS LIST WITH PART NUMBERS. THE LIST SHALL INDICATE SOURCE OF SUPPLY, RECOMMENDED SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS, AND NAME OF SERVICING ORGANIZATION. C. IN ADDITION TO REQUIRED SUBMITTALS, INCLUDE COPIES OF ALL TEST REPORTS REQUIRED IN PART 3, EXECUTION OF SECTION 26 OS 00. D. PROVIDE COMPLETED WARRANTY CERTIFICATES FOR SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT. 1.10RECORD DRAWINGS A. COMPLY WITH PROVISIONS OF DIVISION 01. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. ALL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS SHALL BE LISTED, LABELED, OR CERTIFIED BY A NATIONALLY RECOGNIZED TESTING LABORATORY (NRTL) TO MEET UNDERWRITES LABORATORIES, UL. (UL), STANDARDS WHERE STANDARDS HAVE BEEN ESTABLISHED. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS WHICH ARE NOT COVERED BY UL STANDARDS WILL BE ACCEPTED, PROVIDING THAT EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS STD LABELED CERTIFIED OR OTHERWISE DETERMINED TO MEET THE SAFETY ARE LISTED, REQUIREMENTS OF A NRTL. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS NOT LISTED, LABELED OR DETERMINED TO BE SAFE WILL BE CONSIDERED IF SUBMITTED ACCORDING TO DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND INDUSTRY STANDARDS AND SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION. B. SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS INDICATE NAME, TYPE AND/OR CATALOG NUMBER OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT TO ESTABLISH STANDARDS OF QUALITY. SUBMITTALS SHALL BE BASED ON THE STANDARDS Q SPECIFIED. THE STANDARDS SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS LIMITING COMPETITION. C. IF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS OTHER THAN SPECIFIED HEREIN ARE INTENDED TO BE SUBMITTED, A LETTER PROVIDING A LIST OF ALL THE SUGGESTED ALTERNATES BY SECTION NUMBER, BRAND AND SERIES OR MODEL SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE ENGINEER FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL. SUBMIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH DIVISION 01 AND A MINIMUM OF 14 DAYS PRIOR TO SUBMISSION FOR BIDS. D. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS FURNISHED SHALL BE OF CURRENT PRODUCTION BY MANUFACTURERS REGULARLY ENGAGED IN THE MANUFACTURE OF SUCH PRODUCTS, AND FOR WHICH REPLACEMENT PARTS SHALL BE AVAILABLE 2.02 WALL AND CEILING ACCESS PANELS A. STYLE AND TYPE AS REQUIRED FOR MATERIAL IN WHICH INSTALLED. B. SIZE: 16" X 16" MINIMUM, AS INDICATED, OR AS REQUIRED TO ALLOW INSPECTION, SERVICE AND REMOVAL OF ITEMS SERVED C. 14 GAUGE MINIMUM SHEET METAL FOR DOORS, 16 GAUGE FRAMES OF CADMIUM -PLATED OR GALVANIZED CONSTRUCTION. DOORS SHALL HAVE EXPANDED PLASTER RINGS WHERE LOCATED IN PLASTER WALLS OR FLANGED FINISH WHERE LOCATED IN DRYWALL OR BLOCK CONSTRUCTION D. PANELS SHALL HAVE SPRING HINGES WITH SCREWDRIVER LOCKS IN NON-PUBLIC AREAS. KEY LOCK, KEYED ALIKE, FOR PANELS IN PUBLIC AREAS E. PRIME PAINTED OR RUST INHIBITIVE PAINT FINISH F. UL LABELED WHEN IN FIRE -RATED CONSTRUCTION, 1 1/2 HOUR RATING G. PROVIDE IN WALLS FLOORS AND CEILINGS TO PERMIT ACCESS TO ALL EQUIPMENT AND JUNCTION BOXES. H. FURNISH AND LOCATE ACCESS PANELS UNDER THIS DIVISION. COORDINATE WITH TRADES WHO ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR BUILDING SYSTEM IN WHICH PANELS ARE TO BE INSTALLED. I. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES: MILCOR, NYSTROM, KARP, I.L. INDUSTRIES, OR WILLIAMS BROTHERS. USE PANELS EQUAL TO MILCOR STYLE M FOR MASONRY AND DRYWALL CONSTRUCTION; EQUAL TO MILCOR STYLE K FOR PLASTERED MASONRY WALLS AND CEILINGS. STAINLESS STEEL PANELS SHALL BE USED IN CERAMIC TILE OR GLAZED STRUCTURAL TILE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION A. INSTALL EQUIPMENT IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. WHERE CONFLICTS OCCUR BETWEEN CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND THESE RECOMMENDATIONS, REQUEST A RULING BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH SUCH WORK. VISIT SITE AND OBSERVE CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH WORK MUST BE PERFORMED. NO SUBSEQ UENT UENT Q ALLOWANCE WILL BE MADE BECAUSE OF ERROR OR FAILURE TO OBTAIN NECESSARY INFORMATION TO COMPLETELY ESTIMATE AND PERFORM WORK REQUIRED BY THESE DOCUMENTS. C. EXAMINE SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS TO BE FAMILIAR WITH ITEMS WHICH REQUIRE ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS AND COORDINATION. ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC AND SHALL NOT BE SCALED FOR EXACT SIZES. D. PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF INSTALLATION, PREPARE COORDINATION DRAWINGS FOR WORK UNDER THIS DIVISION, AS SPECIFIED IN DIVISION 01 AND AS CALLED FOR HEREIN. COORDINATE WORK UNDER OTHER DIVISIONS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, FIRE PROTECTION, TELECOMMUNICATION AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TO DEVELOP THESE COORDINATION DRAWINGS THAT WILL SERVE AS THE AGREED UPON PLAN FOR A COORDINATED INSTALLATION OF WORK FOR ALLTRADES. INCLUDE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, SWITCHGEAR, PANELBOARDS, STARTERS, DISCONNECT SWITCHES, CABLE TRAY, CONDUIT RACKS AND CONDUITS 3" AND LARGER ON DRAWINGS CONFIRMING COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES. INCORPORATE THE INFORMATION ONTO THE COORDINATION DRAWINGS REQUIRED UNDER DIVISION 01 AND 23 TO DEVELOP MASTER COORDINATION DRAWINGS. ACCOUNT FOR LIGHTING FIXTURE DEPTHS IN THE COORDINATION. INFORM DESIGN PROFESSIONAL OF CONFLICTS THAT CANNOT BE RESOLVED. 3.02 FEES AND PERMITS A. OBTAIN AND PAY FOR ALL NECESSARY PERMITS AND INSPECTION FEES REQUIRED FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION. 3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. COMPLY WITH PROVISIONS OF DIVISION 01 B. REPAIR OR REPLACE ROUTINE DAMAGE CAUSED BY CUTTING IN PERFORMANCE OF WORK UNDER THIS DIVISION. C. CORRECT UNNECESSARY DAMAGE CAUSED DUE TO INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL WORK, BROUGHT ABOUT THROUGH CARELESSNESS OR LACK OF COORDINATION. D. HOLES CUT THROUGH FLOOR SLABS SHALL BE CORE DRILLED WITH DRILL DESIGNED FOR THIS PURPOSE. ALL OPENINGS, SLEEVES, AND HOLES IN SLABS BETWEEN FLOORS SHALL BE PROPERLY SEALED, FIRE PROOFED AND WATER PROOFED. E. HOLES CUT THROUGH WALLS SHALL BE DRILLED OR CUT WITH TOOLS DESIGNED FOR THE PURPOSE. ALL OPENINGS, SLEEVES AND HOLES IN WALLS THAT EXTEND TO UNDERSIDE OF FLOOR ABOVE SHALL BE PROPER LY SEALED AND FIRE PROOFED. F. REPAIRS SHALL BE PERFORMED WITH MATERIALS WHICH MATCH ATCH EXISTING MATERIALS AND BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPROPRIATE SECTIONS OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS. G. CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT BE PERMITTED TO CUT OR MODIFY ANY STRUCTURAL MEMBERS WITHOUT THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THE ARCHITECT. 3.04 TRENCHING, EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING, AND REPAIRS A. COMPLY WITH PROVISIONS OF DIVISION 31. B. PROVIDE TRENCHING, EXCAVATION, AND BACKFILLING NECESSARY FOR PERFORMANCE OF WORK UNDER THIS DIVISION. E C. PROVIDE SHEATHING, SHORING DEWATERING AND CLEANING NECESSARY TO KEEP TRENCHES AND THEIR GRADES IN PROPER CONDITION FOR WORK TO BE PERFORMED. D. TRENCHING AND EXCAVATION SHALL BE UNCLASSIFIED. NO EXTRA WILL BE PAID IN EVENT THAT ROCK IS ENCOUNTERED. 3.05 FOUNDATIONS AND PADS A. PROVIDE CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS AND PADS FOR EQUIPMENT PER THE REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 03. LOCATE AND SIZE FOUNDATIONS, PADS, AND ANCHOR BOLTS AS REQUIRED FOR EQUIPMENT IN THIS DIVISION. B. PROVIDE CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS AND PADS AS REQUIRED FOR ELECTRICAL UTILITY COMPANY'S EQUIPMENT SUCH AS TRANSFORMERS, CT CABINETS, METERING CABINETS, SWITCHES, FUSED S COMPLIANCE IT THE UTILITY DISCONNECTS, AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS ALL WORK HALL BE IN NCE WITH E IL TY COMPANY'S SPECIFICATIONS. 3.06 TESTING ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. ON COMPLETION OF WORK, INSTALLATION SHALL BE COMPLETELY OPERATIONAL AND ENTIRELY FREE FROM GROUNDS SHORT CIRCUITS AND OPEN CIRCUITS. PERFORM OPERATIONAL TESTS AS REQUIRED TO DEMONSTRATE SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION OF THE WORK. BALANCE CIRCUITS SO THAT FEEDERS TO PANELS ARE NOT MORE THAN 10% OUT OF BALANCE BETWEEN PHASES WITH ALL AVAILABLE LOAD ENERGIZED AND OPERATING. FURNISH ALL LABOR, MATERIALS AND INSTRUMENTS FOR ABOVE TESTS. ALL AMPERE READINGS SHALL BE MADE WITH A TRUE RMS READING METER. B. PERFORM MEGGER TESTS OF ALL SERVICE ENTRANCE CIRCUITS, FEEDER AND BRANCH CIRCUITS SIZE #4 AWG AND LARGER. PROVIDE A REPORT OF ALL SUCH MEGGER TEST RESULTS. C. FURNISH THE ENGINEER A COPY OF TEST REPORTS AND REQUIRED CERTIFICATION INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE FOLLOWING: 1. SERVICE GROUND RESISTANCE TEST 2. SWITCHBOARD AND PANELBOARD LOAD TEST- INCLUDE AMPERE READINGS OF ALL PANELS AND MAJOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS D. PRIOR TO FINAL OBSERVATION AND ACCEPTANCE TEST, INSTALL ALL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT COMPLETE AND IN SATISFACTORY OPERATING CONDITION. END OF SECTION SECTION 260519 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART1 GENERAL 1.01SECTION INCLUDES A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS OF THE CONTRACT, INCLUDING GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 01 SPECIFICATION SECTIONS APPLY TO TO THIS SECTION. B. COMPLY WITH PROVISION OF SECTION 26 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL. C. THIS SECTION SPECIFIES THE FURNISHING, INSTALLATION, CONNECTION, AND TESTING OF THE ELECTRICAL CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR USE IN ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS RATED 600 V AND BELOW, INDICATED AS CABLE(S), CONDUCTOR(S), WIRE, OR WIRING IN THIS SECTION. D. FURNISH AND INSTALL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, AND ACCESSORIES IN ACCORDANCE WITH THIS SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS E. SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE. 1.02RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. SECTION 26 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL. B. SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR GROUNDING CONDUCTORS AND GROUNDING CONNECTORS. C. SECTION 26 0534 - RACEWAYS AND CONDUIT SYSTEMS. D. SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS AND REQUIREMENTS. 1.03REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM B3 - STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR SOFT OR ANNEALED COPPER WIRE; 2013. B. ASTM B8 - STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CONCENTRIC -LAY -STRANDED COPPER CONDUCTORS, HARD, MEDIUM -HARD, OR SOFT; 2011. C. ASTM B33 - STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR TIN -COATED SOFT OR ANNEALED COPPER WIRE FOR ELECTRICAL PURPOSES; 2010 (REAPPROVED 2014). D. ASTM B787/B787M - STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR 19 WIRE COMBINATION UNILAY-STRANDED COPPER CONDUCTORS FOR SUBSEQUENT INSULATION; 2004 (REAPPROVED 2014). E. NECA 1- STANDARD FOR GOOD WORKMANSHIP IN ELECTRICAL 2010. F. NECA 104 - RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR INSTALLING ALUMINUM BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE; 2012. G. NEMA WC 70 - NONSHIELDED POWER CABLE 2000 V OR LESS FOR THE DISTRIBUTION OF ELECTRICAL ENERGY; 2009. H. NETA ATS - ACCEPTANCE TESTING SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL POWER EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS; 2013. I. NFPA 70 - NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE; MOST RECENT EDITION ADOPTED BY AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION INCLUDING ALL APPLICABLE AMENDMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTS. J. UL 44 - THERMOSET -INSULATED WIRES AND CABLES; CURRENT EDITION INCLUDING ALL REVISIONS. K. UL 83 - THERMOPLASTIC -INSULATED WIRES AND CABLES; CURRENT EDITION, INCLUDING ALL REVISIONS. L. UL 493 - THERMOPLASTIC -INSULATED UNDERGROUND FEEDER AND BRANCH -CIRCUIT CABLES; CURRENT EDITION, INCLUDING ALL REVISIONS. 1.04ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. COORDINATION: 1. COORDINATE SIZES OF RACEWAYS, BOXES, AND EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS WITH THE ACTUAL CONDUCTORS TO BE INSTALLED, INCLUDING ADJUSTMENTS FOR CONDUCTOR SIZES INCREASED FOR VOLTAGE DROP. 2. COORDINATE THE INSTALLATION OF DIRECT BURIAL CABLE WITH OTHER TRADES TO AVOID CONFLICTS WITH PIPING OR OTHER POTENTIAL CONFLICTS. 3. COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS TO PROVIDE TERMINATIONS SUITABLE FOR USE WITH THE CONDUCTORS TO BE INSTALLED. 4. NOTIFY ENGINEER OF ANY CONFLICTS WITH OR DEVIATIONS FROM THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. OBTAIN DIRECTION BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH WORK. 1.05SUBMITTALS A. PRODUCT DATA: PROVIDE MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD CATALOG PAGES AND DATA SHEETS FOR CONDUCTORS AND CABLES, INCLUDING DETAILED INFORMATION ON MATERIALS, CONSTRUCTION, RATINGS, LISTINGS, AND AVAILABLE SIZES, CONFIGURATIONS, AND STRANDING. B. DESIGN DATA: INDICATE VOLTAGE DROP AND AMPACITY CALCULATIONS FOR ALUMINUM CONDUCTORS SUBSTITUTED FOR COPPER CONDUCTORS. INCLUDE PROPOSED MODIFICATIONS TO RACEWAYS, BOXES, WIRING GUTTERS, ENCLOSURES, ETC. TO ACCOMMODATE SUBSTITUTED CONDUCTORS. C. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS: RECORD ACTUAL INSTALLED CIRCUITING ARRANGEMENTS. RECORD ACTUAL ROUTING FOR UNDERGROUND CIRCUITS. 1.06QUALITY ASSURANCE A. CONFORM TO REQUIREMENTS OF NFPA 70 . B. MAINTAIN AT THE PROJECT SITE A COPY OF EACH REFERENCED DOCUMENT THAT PRESCRIBES EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS. C. MANUFACTURERQUALIFICATIONS: COMPANY SPECIALIZING IN MANUFACTURING THE PRODUCTS SPECIFIED IN THIS SECTION WITH MINIMUM THREE YEARS DOCUMENTED EXPERIENCE. 1.07DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. FURNISH WIRES AND CABLES ON REELS OR COILS FACTORY -WRAPPED WITH WATERPROOF FLEXIBLE COVERING TO PROTECT AGAINST PHYSICAL DAMGE. EACH CABLE AND THE OUTSIDE OF EACH REEL OR COIL, SHALL BE PLAINLY MARKED OR TAGGED TO INDICATE THE CABLE LANGHT, VOLTAGE RATING, CONDUCTOR SIZE, AND MANUFACTURER'S LOT NUMBER AND REEL NUMBER. EACH COIL OR REEL SHALL CONTAIN ONLY ONE CONTINUOS CABLE WITHOT SPLICES. DAMAGED CABLE, WIRE OR CONNECTORS SHALL BE REMOVED FROM PROJECT SITE. B. RECEIVE, INSPECT, HANDLE, AND STORE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. 1.08FIELD CONDITIONS A. DO NOT INSTALL OR OTHERWISE HANDLE THERMOPLASTIC -INSULATED CONDUCTORS AT TEMPERATURES LOWER THAN 14 DEGREES F, UNLESS OTHERWISE PERMITTED BY MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. WHEN INSTALLATION BELOW THIS TEMPERATURE IS UNAVOIDABLE, NOTIFY ENGINEER AND OBTAIN DIRECTION BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH WORK. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS A. DO NOT USE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR APPLICATIONS OTHER THAN AS PERMITTED BY NFPA 70 AND PRODUCT LISTING. B. PROVIDE SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE INSTALLED IN SUITABLE RACEWAY UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, PERMITTED, OR REQUIRED. 2.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE MANUFACTURERS A. CERRO WIRE LLC: WWW.CERROWIRE.COM. B. ENCORE WIRE CORPORATION: WWW.ENCOREWIRE.COM. C. SOUTHWIRE COMPANY: WWW.SOUTHWIRE.COM. D. AMERICAN INSULATED WIRE E. SUPERIOR ESSEX F. GENERAL CABLE G. THE OKONITE CO. H. REPUBLIC WIRE I. UNITED COPPER J. ALCAN PRODUCT CORPORATION K. PRYSMIAN POWER CABLES AND SYSTEMS L. SUBSTITUTIONS: SEE SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS. 2.03 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. PROVIDE PRODUCTS THAT COMPLY WITH REQUIREMENTS OF NFPA 70 B. PROVIDE PRODUCTS LISTED CLASSIFIED AND LABELED AS SUITABLE FOR THE PURPOSE INTENDED. R SE INTEND D C. UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED TO BE EXCLUDED, PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED CONDUIT, BOXES, WIRING, CONNECTORS, ETC. AS REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE OPERATING SYSTEM. D. COMPLY WITH NEMA WC 70 . E. THERMOPLASTIC -INSULATED CONDUCTORS AND CABLES: LISTED AND LABELED AS COMPLYING WITH UL 83. F. THERMOSET -INSULATED CONDUCTORS AND CABLES: LISTED AND LABELED AS COMPLYING WITH UL 44 G. CONDUCTORS FOR GROUNDING AND BONDING: ALSO COMPLY WITH SECTION 260526. H. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES INSTALLED IN CABLE TRAY: LISTED AND LABELED AS SUITABLE FOR CABLE TRAY USE. 1. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES INSTALLED WHERE EXPOSED TO DIRECT Y F E RAYS O SUN: LISTED AND LABELED AS SUNLIGHT RESISTANT. J. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES INSTALLEDEXPOSED XPO ED IN SPACES USED FOR ENVIRONMENTAL AIR (ONLY WHERE SPECIFICALLY PERMITTED): PLENUM RATED, LISTED AND LABELED AS SUITABLE FOR USE IN RETURN AIR PLENUMS. K. CONDUCTOR MATERIAL: 1. PROVIDE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY. ALUMINUM CONDUCTORS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE FOR THIS PROJECT. CONDUCTOR SIZES INDICATED ARE BASED ON COPPER. 2. COPPER CONDUCTORS: SOFT DRAWN ANNEALED, 98 PERCENT CONDUCTIVITY, UNCOATED COPPER CONDUCTORS COMPLYING WITH ASTM B3, ASTM B8, OR ASTM B787/B 787M UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 3. TINNED COPPER CONDUCTORS: COMPLY WITH ASTM B33 . L. MINIMUM CONDUCTOR SIZE: 12 AWG. 1. BRANCH CIRCUITS: 12 AWG. A. EXCEPTIONS: 1 20 A 120 V CIRCUITS LONGER THAN 75 FEET : 10 AWG, FOR VOLTAGE DROP. 2) 20 A, 120 V CIRCUITS LONGER THAN 150 FEET: 8 AWG, FOR VOLTAGE DROP. 3) 20 A, 277 V CIRCUITS LONGER THAN 150 FEET: 10 AWG, FOR VOLTAGE DROP. M. WHERE CONDUCTOR SIZE 15 NOT INDICATED, SIZE TO COMPLY WITH NFPA 70 BUT NOT LESS THAN APPLICABLE MINIMUM SIZE REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED. N. CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING: 1. COLOR CODE CONDUCTORS AS INDICATED UNLESS OTHERWISE REQUIRED BY THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. MAINTAIN CONSISTENT COLOR CODING THROUGHOUT PROJECT, 2. INSTALL IN EACH BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARD A LEGEND EXPLAINING THE COLOR CODE FOR UNGROUNDED CONDUCTORS 3. COLOR CODING METHOD: INTEGRALLY COLORED INSULATION. A. CONDUCTORS SIZE 4 AWG AND LARGER MAY HAVE BLACK INSULATION COLOR CODED USING VINYL COLOR CODING ELECTRICAL TAPE. 4. COLOR CODE: A. 480Y/277 V, 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE SYSTEM: 1) PHASE A: BROWN. 2) PHASE B: ORANGE. 3) PHASE C: YELLOW. 4) NEUTRAL: GRAY. 5) GROUND : GREEN. B. 208Y/120 V, 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE SYSTEM: 1) PHASE A: BLACK. 2) PHASE B: RED. 3) PHASE C: BLUE. 4) NEUTRAL : WHITE. 5) GROUND : GREEN. C. EQUIPMENT GROUND, ALL SYSTEMS: GREEN. D. FOR CONTROL CIRCUITS, COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED COLOR CODE. 2.04 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE A. DESCRIPTION: SINGLE CONDUCTOR INSULATED WIRE. B. CONDUCTOR STRANDING: 1. FEEDERS AND BRANCH CIRCUITS: A. SIZE 10 AWG AND SMALLER: STRANDED. B. SIZE 8 AWG AND LARGER: STRANDED. 2. CONTROL CIRCUITS: STRANDED. C. INSULATION VOLTAGE RATING: 600 V. D. INSULATION: 1. COPPER BUILDING WIRE: TYPE THHN/THWN OR THHN/THWN-2, EXCEPT AS INDICATED BELOW. A. SIZE 4 AWG AND LARGER: TYPE THHN/THWN. B. INSTALLED UNDERGROUND: TYPE XHHW-2. C. FIXTURE WIRING WITHIN LUMINAIRES: TYPE TFFN/TFN FOR LUMINAIRES WITH LABELED MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE OF 90 DEGREES C; APPROVED SUITABLE TYPE FOR LUMINAIRES WITH LABELED MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE GREATER THAN 90 DEGREES C. 2.05 WIRING CONNECTORS A. DESCRIPTION: WIRING CONNECTORS APPROPRIATE FOR THE APPLICATION, SUITABLE FOR USE WITH THE CONDUCTORS TO BE CONNECTED, AND LISTED AS COMPLYING WITH UL 486A-486B OR UL 486C AS APPLICABLE. B. CONNECTORS FOR GROUNDING AND BONDING: COMPLY WITH SECTION 260526. C. WIRING CONNECTORS FOR SPLICES AND TAPS: 1. COPPER CONDUCTORS SIZE 8 AWG AND SMALLER: USE TWIST -ON INSULATED SPRING CONNECTORS. 2. COPPER CONDUCTORS SIZE 6 AWG AND LARGER: USE MECHANICAL CONNECTORS. D. WIRING CONNECTORS FOR TERMINATIONS: 1. PROVIDE TERMINAL LUGS FOR CONNECTING CONDUCTORS TO EQUIPMENT FURNISHED WITH TERMINATIONS DESIGNED FOR TERMINAL LUGS. 2. PROVIDE COMPRESSION ADAPTERS FOR CONNECTING CONDUCTORS TO EQUIPMENT FURNISHED WITH MECHANICAL LUGS WHEN ONLY COMPRESSION CONNECTORS ARE SPECIFIED. 3. WHERE OVER -SIZED CONDUCTORS ARE LARGER THAN THE EQUIPMENT TERMINATIONS CAN ACCOMMODATE, PROVIDE CONNECTORS SUITABLE FOR REDUCING TO APPROPRIATE SIZE, BUT NOT LESS THAN REQUIRED FOR THE RATING OF THE OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE. 4. PROVIDE MOTOR PIGTAIL CONNECTORS FOR CONNECTING MOTOR LEADS IN ORDER TO FACILITATE DISCONNECTION. 5. COPPER CONDUCTORS SIZE 8 AWG AND LARGER: USE MECHANICAL CONNECTORS WHERE CONNECTORS ARE REQUIRED. 6. STRANDED CONDUCTORS SIZE 10 AWG AND SMALLER: USE CRIMPED TERMINALS FOR CONNECTIONS TO TERMINAL SCREWS. 7. CONDUCTORS FOR CONTROL CIRCUITS: USE CRIMPED TERMINALS FOR ALL CONNECTIONS. E. DO NOT USE INSULATION -PIERCING OR INSULATION -DISPLACEMENT CONNECTORS DESIGNED FOR USE WITH CONDUCTORS WITHOUT STRIPPING INSULATION. F. DO NOT USE PUSH -IN WIRE CONNECTORS AS A SUBSTITUTE FOR TWIST -ON INSULATED SPRING CONNECTORS. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. VERIFY THAT INTERIOR OF BUILDING HAS BEEN PROTECTED FROM WEATHER. B. VERIFY THAT WORK LIKELY TO DAMAGE WIRE AND CABLE HAS BEEN COMPLETED. C. VERIFY THAT RACEWAYS, BOXES, AND EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES ARE INSTALLED AND ARE PROPERLY SIZED TO ACCOMMODATE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 70 . D. VERIFY THAT FIELD MEASUREMENTS ARE AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. E. VERIFY THAT CONDITIONS ARE SATISFACTORY FOR INSTALLATION PRIOR TO STARTING WORK. 3.02 PREPARATION A. CLEAN RACEWAYS THOROUGHLY TO REMOVE FOREIGN MATERIALS BEFORE INSTALLING CONDUCTORS AND CABLES. B. COMPLETE CONDUIT SYSTEM, INCLUDING BUSHINGS, BEFORE PULLING WIRES OR CABLES. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. CIRCUITING REQUIREMENTS: 1. ARRANGE CIRCUITING TO MINIMIZE SPLICES. 2. INCLUDE CIRCUIT LENGTHS REQUIRED TO INSTALL CONNECTED DEVICES WITHIN 10 FT OF LOCATION SHOWN. 3. MAINTAIN SEPARATION OF CLASS 1, CLASS 2, AND CLASS 3 REMOTE -CONTROL, SIGNALING, AND POWER -LIMITED CIRCUITS IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 70 . 4. MAINTAIN SEPARATION OF WIRING FOR EMERGENCY SYSTEMS IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 70 . 5. CIRCUITING ADJUSTMENTS: UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, WHEN BRANCH CIRCUITS ARE SHOWN AS SEPARATE, COMBINING THEM TOGETHER IN A SINGLE RACEWAY IS NOT PERMITTED. A. PROVIDE NO MORE THAN SIX CURRENT -CARRYING CONDUCTORS IN A SINGLE RACEWAY. DEDICATED NEUTRAL CONDUCTORS ARE CONSIDERED CURRENT -CARRYING CONDUCTORS. 6. COMMON NEUTRALS: UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, SHARING OF NEUTRAL/GROUNDED CONDUCTORS AMONG UP TO THREE SINGLE PHASE BRANCH CIRCUITS OF DIFFERENT PHASES INSTALLED IN THE SAME RACEWAY IS NOT PERMITTED. PROVIDE DEDICATED NEUTRAL/GROUNDED CONDUCTOR FOR EACH INDIVIDUAL BRANCH CIRCUIT. B. INSTALL PRODUCTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. C. INSTALL CONDUCTORS AND CABLE IN A NEAT AND WORKMANLIKE MANNER IN ACCORDANCE WITH NECA 1. D. INSTALLATION IN RACEWAY: 1. TAPE ENDS OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES TO PREVENT INFILTRATION OF MOISTURE AND OTHER CONTAMINANTS. 2. PULL ALL CONDUCTORS AND CABLES TOGETHER INTO RACEWAY AT SAME TIME. 3. DO NOT DAMAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES OR EXCEED MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED MAXIMUM PULLING TENSION AND SIDEWALL PRESSURE. 4. USE SUITABLE WIRE PULLING LUBRICANT WHERE NECESSARY, EXCEPT WHEN LUBRICANT IS NOT RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. E. EXPOSED CABLE INSTALLATION (ONLY WHERE SPECIFICALLY PERMITTED): 1. ROUTE CABLES PARALLEL OR PERPENDICULAR TO BUILDING STRUCTURAL MEMBERS AND SURFACES. 2. PROTECT CABLES FROM PHYSICAL DAMAGE. F. SECURE AND SUPPORT CONDUCTORS AND CABLES IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 70 USING SUITABLE SUPPORTS AND METHODS APPROVED BY THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. PROVIDE INDEPENDENT SUPPORT FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE. DO NOT PROVIDE SUPPORT FROM RACEWAYS, PIPING, DUCTWORK, OR OTHER SYSTEMS. 1. INSTALLATION ABOVE SUSPENDED CEILINGS: DO NOT PROVIDE SUPPORT FROM CEILING SUPPORT SYSTEM. DO NOT PROVIDE SUPPORT FROM CEILING GRID OR ALLOW CONDUCTORS AND CABLES TO LAY ON CEILING TILES. G. INSTALL CONDUCTORS WITH A MINIMUM OF 12 INCHES OF SLACK AT EACH OUTLET. H. WHERE CONDUCTORS ARE INSTALLED IN ENCLOSURES FOR FUTURE TERMINATION BY OTHERS, PROVIDE A MINIMUM OF 5 FEET OF SLACK. I. NEATLY TRAIN AND BUNDLE CONDUCTORS INSIDE BOXES, WIREWAYS, PANELBOARDS AND OTHER EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES. J. GROUP OR OTHERWISE IDENTIFY NEUTRAL/GROUNDED CONDUCTORS WITH ASSOCIATED UNGROUNDED CONDUCTORS INSIDE ENCLOSURES IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 70 . K. MAKE WIRING CONNECTIONS USING SPECIFIED WIRING CONNECTORS. 1. MAKE SPLICES AND TAPS ONLY IN ACCESSIBLE BOXES. DO NO U T PULL SPLICES INTO RACEWAYS OR MAKE SPLICES IN CONDUIT BODIES OR WIRING GUTTERS. 2. REMOVE APPROPRIATE AMOUNT OF CONDUCTOR INSULATION FOR MAKING CONNECTIONS WITHOUT CUTTING, NICKING OR DAMAGING CONDUCTORS. 3. DO NOT REMOVE CONDUCTOR STRANDS TO FACILITATE INSERTION INTO CONNECTOR. 4. CLEAN CONTACT SURFACES ON CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS TO SUITABLE REMOVE CORROSION, OXIDES, AND OTHER CONTAMINATES. DO NOT USE WIRE BRUSH ON PLATED CONNECTOR SURFACES. L. INSULATE SPLICES AND TAPS THAT ARE MADE WITH UNINSULATED CONNECTORS USING METHODS SUITABLE FOR THE APPLICATION, WITH INSULATION AND MECHANICAL STRENGTH AT LEAST EQUIVALENT TO UNSPLICED CONDUCTORS. 1. DRY LOCATIONS: USE INSULATING COVERS SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED FOR THE CONNECTORS, ELECTRICALTAPE OR HEAT SHRINK TUBING. A. FOR TAPED CONNECTIONS, FIRST APPLY ADEQUATE AMOUNT OF RUBBER SPLICING ELECTRICAL TAPE OR ELECTRICAL FILLER TAPE, FOLLOWED BY OUTER COVERING OF VINYL INSULATING ELECTRICAL TAPE. B. FOR TAPED CONNECTIONS LIKELY TO REQUIRE RE-ENTERING, INCLUDING MOTOR LEADS, FIRST APPLY VARNISHED CAMBRIC ELECTRICAL TAPE, FOLLOWED BY ADEQUATE AMOUNT OF RUBBER SPLICING ELECTRICALTAPE, FOLLOWED BY OUTER COVERING OF VINYL INSULATING ELECTRICAL TAPE. M. IDENTIFY CONDUCTORS AND CABLES IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 260553. N. INSTALL FIRESTOPPING TO PRESERVE FIRE RESISTANCE RATING OF PARTITIONS AND OTHER ELEMENTS, USING MATERIALS AND METHODS SPECIFIED IN SECTION 078400. 0. UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED TO BE EXCLUDED, PROVIDE FINAL CONNECTIONS TO ALL EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES, INCLUDING THOSE FURNISHED BY OTHERS, AS REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE OPERATING SYSTEM. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. INSPECT AND TEST IN ACCORDANCE WITH NETA ATS, EXCEPT SECTION 4. B. ELECTRICAL TESTS: 1. AFTER INSTALLATION BUT BEFORE CONNECTION TO UTILIZATION DEVICES, SUCH AS FIXTURES, MOTORS, OR APPLIANCES, TEST CONDUCTORS PHASE -TO -PHASE AND PHASE -TO -GROUND RESISTANCE WITH AN INSULATION RESISTANCE TESTER. EXISTING CONDUCTORS TO BE REUSED SHALL ALSO BE TESTED. 2. APPLIED VOLTAGE SHALL BE 500 V DC FOR 300 V RATED CABLE, AND 1000 V DC FOR 600 V RATED CABLE. APPLY TEST FOR ONE MINUTE OR UNTIL READING IS CONSTANT FOR 15 SECONDS, WHICHEVER IS LONGER. MINIMUM INSULATION RESISTANCE VALUES SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 25 MEGOHMS FOR 300 V RATED CABLE AND 100 MEGOHMS FOR 600 V RATED CABLE. A. FEEDER (600A & SMALLER) CIRCUITS AND BRANCH CIRCUITS 1) USE EITHER A MOTOR DRIVEN (BIDDLE 359) OR A HAND CRANK (BIDDLE MJ159) MEGGER. 2) PERFORM A DIELECTRIC ABSORPTION RATIO TEST USING A 60-SECOND TEST PERIOD. RECORD THE MEGOHM READINGS AT 30 SECONDS AND 60 SECONDS. CALCULATE THE DIELECTRIC ABSORPTION RATIO (60 SEC / 30 SEC READINGS) AND RECORD B. PERFORM INSPECTIONS AND TESTS LISTED IN NETA ATS, SECTION 7.3.2. THE INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST IS REQUIRED FOR ALL CONDUCTORS. THE RESISTANCE TEST FOR PARALLEL CONDUCTORS LISTED AS OPTIONAL IS NOT REQUIRED. 1. DISCONNECT SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDS) PRIOR TO PERFORMING ANY HIGH POTENTIAL TESTING. REPLACE SPDS DAMAGED BY PERFORMING HIGH POTENTIAL TESTING WITH NEW SPDS. D. CORRECT DEFICIENCIES AND REPLACE DAMAGED OR DEFECTIVE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES. E. PROVIDE 8 COPIES OF THE MEGGER TEST REPORT TO THE ENGINEER. THE REPORT SHALL BE IN A TABULATED FORMAT AND SHALL INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING AS A MINIMUM. 1. CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION 2. TYPE OF RACEWAY 3. APPROXIMATE LENGTH OF CIRCUIT 4. MEGOHM READINGS 5. AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 6. APPROXIMATE HUMIDITY (DRY, AVERAGE, OR HUMID) END OF SECTION SECTION 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01SECTION INCLUDES A. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS ALONG WITH DIVISION 01 GENERA REQUIREMENTS, L THAT ARE APPLICABLE TO ALL DIVISION 26 SECTIONS B. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS OF THE CONTRACT, INCLUDING GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 01 SPECIFICATION SECTIONS APPLY TO ALL DIVISION 26 SECTIONS. C. COMPLY WITH PROVISION OF SECTION 26 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL. D. THIS SECTION SPECIFIES THE FURNISHING, INSTALLATION, CONNECTION, AND TESTING OF GROUNDING AND BONDING EQUIPMENT, INDICATED AS GROUNDING EQUIPMENT IN THIS SECTION. E. "GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM" REFERS TO GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTORS AND ALL ELECTRODES REQUIRED OR ALLOWED BY NEC, AS WELL AS MADE, SUPPLEMENTARY, AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM GROUNDING ELECTRODES. F. GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS. G. CONDUCTORS FOR GROUNDING AND BONDING. H. CONNECTORS FOR GROUNDING AND BONDING. I. GROUND BARS. J. GROUND ROD ELECTRODES. K. GROUND ACCESS WELLS. 1.02RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. SECTION 26 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL. B. SECTION 260519 - LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES: ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONDUCTORS FOR GROUNDING AND BONDING, INCLUDING CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING. C. SECTION 26-0533 - RACEWAYS AND CONDUIT SYSTEMS. D. SECTION 26 2413 - SWITCHBOARDS. E. SECTION 26 2416 - PANELBOARDS. F. SECTION 26 3213 - ENGINE GENERATORS. G. SECTION 26 3623 - AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES. H. SECTION 260553 -IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS AND REQUIREMENTS. I. SECTION 264113 - LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES. J. SECTION 265600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING: ADDITIONAL GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS FOR POLE -MOUNTED LUMINAIRES. 1.03REFERENCE STANDARDS A. IEEE 81 - IEEE GUIDE FOR MEASURING EARTH RESISTIVITY, GROUND IMPEDANCE, AND EARTH SURFACE POTENTIALS OF A GROUNDING SYSTEM; 2012. B. NECA 1- STANDARD FOR GOOD WORKMANSHIP IN ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION; 2010. C. NEMA GR 1- GROUNDING ROD ELECTRODES AND GROUNDING D NG ROD ELECTRODE COUPLINGS; 2007. D. NETA ATS - ACCEPTANCE TESTING SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL POWER EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS; 2013. E. NFPA 70 - NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE; MOST RECENT EDITION ADOPTED BY AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION, INCLUDING ALL APPLICABLE AMENDMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTS. F. NFPA 99 - HEALTH CARE FACILITIES CODE; 2015. G. NFPA 780 - STANDARD FOR THE INSTALLATION OF LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS; 2014. H. UL 467 - GROUNDING AND BONDING EQUIPMENT; CURRENT EDITION, INCLUDING ALL REVISIONS. 1.04ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. COORDINATION: 1. VERIFY EXACT LOCATIONS OF UNDERGROUND METAL WAT ER ER SERVICE PIPE ENTRANCES TO BUILDING. 2. COORDINATE THE WORK WITH OTHER TRADES TO PROVIDE STEEL REINFORCEMENT COMPLYING WITH SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE -ENCASED ELECTRODE. 3. NOTIFY ENGINEER OF ANY CONFLICTS WITH OR DEVIATIONS FROM THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. OBTAIN DIRECTION BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH WORK. B. SEQUENCING: 1. DO NOT INSTALL GROUND ROD ELECTRODES UNTIL FINAL BACKFILL AND COMPACTION IS COMPLETE. 1.05SUBMITTALS A. SEE SECTION 013000 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMITTALS PROCEDURES. B. PRODUCT DATA: PROVIDE MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD CATALOG PAGES AND DATA SHEETS FOR GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEM COMPONENTS. C. MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS: INDICATE APPLICATION CONDITIONS AND LIMITATIONS OF USE STIPULATED BY PRODUCT TESTING AGENCY. INCLUDE INSTRUCTIONS FOR STORAGE, HANDLING, PROTECTION, EXAMINATION, PREPARATION, AND INSTALLATION OF PRODUCT. D. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL TEST REPORTS. E. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS: RECORD ACTUAL LOCATIONS OF GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND CONNECTIONS. 1.06QUALITY ASSURANCE A. CONFORM TO REQUIREMENTS OF NFPA 70 . B. MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS: COMPANY SPECIALIZING IN MANUFACTURING THE PRODUCTS SPECIFIED IN THIS SECTION WITH MINIMUM THREE YEARS DOCUMENTED EXPERIENCE. C. INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS FOR SIGNAL REFERENCE GRIDS: COMPANY WITH MINIMUM FIVE YEARS DOCUMENTED EXPERIENCE WITH HIGH FREQUENCY GROUNDING SYSTEMS. 1.07DELIVERY STORAG E, AND HANDLING A. RECEIVE, INSPECT, HANDLE, AND STORE PRODUCTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS A. EXISTING WORK: WHERE EXISTING GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEM COMPONENTS ARE INDICATED TO BE REUSED, THEY MAY BE REUSED ONLY WHERE THEY ARE FREE FROM CORROSION, INTEGRITY AND CONTINUITY ARE VE RIFIED, AND WHERE ACCEPTABLE TO THE AUTH ORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. B. DO NOT USE PRODUCTS FOR APPLICATIONS OTHER THAN AS PERMITTED BY NFPA 70 AND PRODUCT LISTING. C. UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED TO BE EXCLUDED, PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED COMPONENTS, CONDUCTORS, CONNECTORS, CONDUIT, BOXES, FITTINGS, SUPPORTS, ACCESSORIES, ETC. AS NECESSARY FOR A COMPLETE GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEM. D. WHERE CONDUCTOR SIZE IS NOT INDICATED, SIZE TO COMPLY WITH NFPA 70 BUT NOT LESS THAN APPLICABLE MINIMUM SI ZE REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED. E. EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDU CTORS UCTORS SHALL BE INSULATED STRANDED COPPE R, EXCEPT THAT SIZES NO. 10 AWG AND SMALLER SO SHALL E l B LID COPPER. INSULATION COLOR SHALL BE CONTINUOUS GREEN FOR ALL EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS, EXCEPTTHAT WIRE SIZES NO.4 AWG AND LARGER SHALL BE IDENTIFIED PER NEC. F. BONDING CONDUCTORS SHALL BE BARE STRANDED COPPER, EXCEPT THAT SIZES NO. 10 AWG AND SMALLER SHALL BE BARE SOLID COPPER. BONDING CONDUCTORS SHALL BE STRANDED FOR FINAL CONNECTION TO MOTORS, TRANSFORMERS, AND VIBRATING EQUIPMENT. G. CONDUCTOR SIZES SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS, OR NOT LESS THAN REQUIRED BY THE NEC, WHICHEVER IS GREATER. H. INSULATION: THHN-THWN AND XHHW-2. XHHW-2 SHALL BE USED FOR ISOLATED POWER SYSTEMS. 1. GROUNDING SYSTEM RESISTANCE: 1. ACHIEVE SPECIFIED GROUNDING ROUND NG SYSTEM RESISTANCE E ISTANCE UNDER NORMALLY DRY CONDITIONS DIT ONS UNLESS OTHERWISE APPROVED BY ENGINEER. PRECIPITATION WITHIN THE PREVIOUS 48 HOURS DOES NOT CONSTITUTE NORMALLY DRY CONDITIONS. 2. GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM: NOT GREATER THAN 5 OHMS TO GROUND, WHEN TESTED ACCORDING- TO IEEE 81 USING FALL OF POTENTIAL METHOD. 3. BETWEEN GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM AND MAJOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FRAMES, SYSTEM NEUTRAL, AND DERIVED NEUTRAL POINTS: NOT GREATER THAN 0.5 OHMS, WHEN TESTED USING POINT-TO-POINT" METHODS. J. GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM: 1. PROVIDE CONNECTION TO REQUIRED AND SUPPLEMENTAL GROUNDING ELECTRODES INDICATED TO FORM GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM. A. PROVIDE CONTINUOUS GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTORS WITHOUT SPLICE OR JOINT. B. INSTALL GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTORS IN RACEWAY WHERE EXPOSED TO PHYSICAL DAMAGE. BOND GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR TO METALLIC RACEWAYS AT EACH END WITH BONDING JUMPER. 2. METAL UNDERGROUND WATER PIPE(5): A. PROVIDE CONNECTION TO UNDERGROUND METAL DOMESTIC AND FIRE PROTECTION (WHERE PRESENT) WATER SERVICE PIPE(S) THAT ARE IN DIRECT CONTACT WITH EARTH FOR AT LEAST 10 FEET AT AN ACCESSIBLE LOCATION NOT MORE THAN 5 FEET FROM THE POINT OF ENTRANCE TO THE BUILDING. B. PROVIDE BONDING JUMPER(S) AROUND INSULATING JOINTS/PIPES AS REQUIRED TO MAKE PIPE ELECTRICALLY CONTINUOUS. C. PROVIDE BONDING JUMPER AROUND WATER METER OF SUFFICIENT LENGTH TO PERMIT REMOVAL OF METER WITHOUT DISCONNECTING JUMPER. 3. METAL BUILDING OR STRUCTURE FRAME: A. PROVIDE CONNECTION TO METAL BUILDING OR STRUCTURE FRAME EFFECTIVELY GROUNDED IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 70 AT NEAREST ACCESSIBLE LOCATION. 4. CONCRETE -ENCASED ELECTRODE: A. PROVIDE CONNECTION TO CONCRETE -ENCASED ELECTRODE CONSISTING OF NOT LESS THAN 20 FEET OF EITHER STEEL REINFORCING BARS OR BARE COPPER CONDUCTOR NOT SMALLER THAN 4 AWG EMBEDDED WITHIN CONCRETE FOUNDATION OR FOOTING THAT IS IN DIRECT CONTACT WITH EARTH IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 70. 5. GROUND ROD ELECTRODE(S): A. PROVIDE THREE ELECTRODES IN AN EQUILATERAL TRIANGLE CONFIGURATION UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED OR REQUIRED. B. SPACE ELECTRODES NOT LESS THAN 10 FEET FROM EACH OTHER AND ANY OTHER GROUND ELECTRODE. C. WHERE LOCATION IS NOT INDICATED, LOCATE ELECTRODE(S) AT LEAST 5 FEET OUTSIDE BUILDING PERIMETER FOUNDATION AS NEAR AS POSSIBLE TO ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE; WHERE POSSIBLE, LOCATE IN SOFTSCAPE (UNCOVERED) AREA. D. PROVIDE GROUND ENHANCEMENT MATERIAL AROUND ELECTRODE WHERE INDICATED. E. PROVIDE GROUND ACCESS WELL FOR EACH ELECTRODE. TO THE BEST OF THE ENGINEERS KNOWLEDGE, THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS COMPLY WITH THE APPLICABLE MINIMUM BUILDING CODES AND THE APPLICABLE FIRE -SAFETY STANDARDS AS DETERMINED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY IN ACCORDANCE WITH CHAPTER 553.79 AND CHAPTER 633, FLORIDA STATUTES. (45 Q 'sueO Oal �u OOOLn 6 6 < z I u m m IiiIiiIiiiIiiiiIiiiiIO Z Ln Ln w n r, 2 N cV tj I\ n w u w ,u ll J_ �_ 0- z - z IiiiiiiiiiIIiiiIiiIiii Op (5 O zIx a w W I% LL W Z m 2 O 0. cV a N 00 - CA J t N u � o Z cM U 41 M Lu O C "L_ W CIA C � O - v Q LL J V4) = i C ++ N _ Z to .ct M i C r' 3 Ln (D 00 Luu la-00 T - Q 4 U mi = w = a W N W ILA w m LL O O ` 1 = Q w Z O W Ln .O e+A Z V =M W � c .° v a ( I'1 cc O O �j� N. W L � a :E L O A Lu 2 (" m z Q M N \\ ,_\_EWIS JO ��i�� N, 4� �CENgF ...6! -� . 'p . .\ I No 38680 _ .: �L ,� * �\ _ - t '� � _ ti �.z STATE OF , ;% 11 i tORID ••\ /111111110\ George Johnson, P.E. PE38680 ISSUE DATE: 10/19/2018 PROJECT NUMBER: 2847 REVISIONS: NO. DATE I DESCRIPTION ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS E501 © 2018 APG ENGINEERING i 0 do = Y 4. d Q r u r m F zLuo 3 u z w o u a 6. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL GROUND ELECTRODE(S) AS REQUIRED TO ACHIEVE SPECIFIED GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM RESISTANCE. 7. GROUND BAR: PROVIDE GROUND BAR, SEPARATE FROM SERVICE EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURE, FOR COMMON CONNECTION POINT OF GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM BONDING JUMPERS AS PERMITTED IN NFPA 70. CONNECT GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR PROVIDED FOR SERVICE -SUPPLIED SYSTEM GROUNDING TO THIS GROUND BAR. A. INSTALL BUS HORIZONTALLY, ON INSULATED SPACERS 2 INCHES (50 MM) MINIMUM FROM WALL, B. PRE -DRILLED RECTANGULAR COPPER BAR WITH STAND-OFF INSULATORS, WITH HOLE SIZE, QUANTITY, AND SPACING PER DETAIL SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. PROVIDE INSULATORS AND MOUNTING BRACKETS. C. GROUND BAR SIZE: 1/4 BY 4 BY 12 INCHES UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED OR REQUIRED. D. WHERE GROUND BAR LOCATION IS NOT INDICATED, LOCATE IN ACCESSIBLE LOCATION AS NEAR AS POSSIBLE TO SERVICE DISCONNECT ENCLOSURE. E. GROUND BAR MOUNTING HEIGHT: 18 INCHES ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. K. SERVICE -SUPPLIED SYSTEM GROUNDING: 1. FOR EACH SERVICE DISCONNECT, PROVIDE GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR TO CONNECT NEUTRAL GROUNDED SERVICE CON DUCTOR TO GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, MAKE CONNECTION AT NEUTRAL (GROUNDED) BUS IN SERVICE DISCONNECT ENCLOSURE. 2. FOR EACH SERVICE DISCONNECT, PROVIDE MAIN BONDING JUMPER TO CONNECT NEUTRAL (GROUNDED) BUS TO EQUIPMENT GROUND BUS WHERE NOT FACTORY -INSTALLED. DO NOT MAKE ANY OTHER CONNECTIONS BETWEEN NEUTRAL (GROUNDED) CONDUCTORS AND GROUND ON LOAD SIDE OF SERVICE DISCONNECT. L. BONDING AND EQUIPMENT GROUNDING: 1. PROVIDE BONDING FOR EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS, EQUIPMENT GROUND BUSSES, METALLIC EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES, METALLIC RACEWAYS AND BOXES, DEVICE GROUNDING TERMINALS, AND OTHER NORMALLY NON -CURRENT -CARRYING CONDUCTIVE MATERIALS ENCLOSING ELECTRICAL CONDUCTORS/EQUIPMENT OR LIKELY TO BECOME ENERGIZED AS INDICATED AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 70 . 2. PROVIDE INSULATED EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR IN EACH FEEDER AND BRANCH CIRCUIT RACEWAY. DO NOT USE RACEWAYS AS SOLE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR. 3. WHERE CIRCUIT CONDUCTOR SIZES ARE INCREASED FOR VOLTAGE DROP, INCREASE SIZE OF EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR PROPORTIONALLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 70 . 4. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, CONNECT WIRING DEVICE GROUNDING TERMINAL TO BRANCH CIRCUIT EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR AND TO OUTLET BOX WITH BONDING JUMPER. 5. TERMINATE BRANCH CIRCUIT EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS ON SOLIDLY BONDED EQUIPMENT GROUND BUS ONLY. DO NOT TERMINATE ON NEUTRAL (GROUNDED) OR ISOLATED/INSULATED GROUND BUS. 6. PROVIDE BONDING FOR INTERIOR METAL PIPING SYSTEMS IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 70. THIS INCLUDES BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO: A. METAL WATER PIPING WHERE NOT ALREADY EFFECTIVELY BONDED TO METAL UNDERGROUND WATER PIPE USED AS GROUNDING ELECTRODE. B. METAL GAS PIPING. 7. PROVIDE BONDING FOR METAL BUILDING FRAME WHERE NOT USED AS A GROUNDING ELECTRODE. 8. PROVIDE BONDING FOR METAL SIDING NOT EFFECTIVELY BONDED THROUGH ATTACHMENT TO METAL BUILDING FRAME. 9. PROVIDE REDUNDANT GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR PATIENT CARE AREAS OF HEALTHCARE FACILITIES IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 70 AND NFPA 99 . M. ISOLATED GROUND SYSTEM: 1. WHERE ISOLATED GROUND RECEPTACLES OR OTHER ISOLATED GROUND CONNECTIONS ARE INDICATED, PROVIDE SEPARATE ISOLATED/INSULATED EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS. 2. ISOLATED GROUNDING RECEPTACLE CIRCUITS: INSTALL AN INSULATED EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR CONNECTED TO THE RECEPTACLE GROUNDING TERMINAL. ISOLATE CONDUCTOR FROM RACEWAY AND FROM PANELBOARD GROUNDING TERMINALS. TERMINATE AT EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR TERMINAL OF THE APPLICABLE DERIVED SYSTEM OR SERVICE UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 3. CONNECT ISOLATED/INSULATED EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS ONLY TO SEPARATE ISOLATED/INSULATED EQUIPMENT GROUND BUSSES. 4. CONNECT THE ISOLATED/INSULATED EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS TO THE SOLIDLY BONDED EQUIPMENT GROUND BUS ONLY AT THE SERVICE DISCONNECT OR SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEM DISCONNECT. DO NOT MAKE ANY OTHER CONNECTIONS BETWEEN ISOLATED GROUND SYSTEM AND NORMAL EQUIPMENT GROUND SYSTEM ON THE LOAD SIDE OF THIS CONNECTION. 5. ISOLATED EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURE CIRCUITS: FOR DESIGNATED EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED BY A BRANCH CIRCUIT OR FEEDER, ISOLATE EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURE FROM SUPPLY CIRCUIT RACEWAY WITH A NONMETALLIC RACEWAY FITTING LISTED FOR THE PURPOSE. INSTALL FITTING WHERE RACEWAY ENTERS ENCLOSURE, AND INSTALL A SEPARATE INSULATED EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR. ISOLATE CONDUCTOR FROM RACEWAY AND FROM PANELBOARD GROUNDING TERMINALS. TERMINATE AT EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR TERMINAL OF THE APPLICABLE DERIVED SYSTEM OR SERVICE UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 6. GREEN -COLORED INSULATION WITH CONTINUOUS YELLOW STRIPE. ON FEEDERS WITH ISOLATED GROUND, IDENTIFY GROUNDING CONDUCTOR WHERE VISIBLE TO NORMAL INSPECTION, WITH ALTERNATING BANDS OF GREEN AND YELLOW TAPE, WITH AT LEAST THREE BANDS OF GREEN AND TWO BANDS OF YELLOW. N. COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS GROUNDING AND BONDING: 1. PROVIDE INTERSYSTEM BONDING TERMINATION AT SERVICE EQUIPMENT OR METERING EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURE AND AT DISCONNECTING MEANS FOR ANY ADDITIONAL BUILDINGS OR STRUCTURES IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 70 . 2. PROVIDE BONDING JUMPER IN RACEWAY FROM INTERSYSTEM BONDING TERMINATION TO EACH COMMUNICATIONS ROOM OR BACKBOARD AND PROVIDE GROUND BAR FOR TERMINATION. A. BONDING JUMPER SIZE: 6 AWG, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED OR REQUIRED. B. RACEWAY SIZE: 3/4 INCH UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED OR REQUIRED. C. GROUND BAR SIZE: 1/4 BY 2 BY 12 INCHES UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED OR REQUIRED. D. GROUND BAR MOUNTING HEIGHT: 18 INCHES ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. O. LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS, IN ADDITION TO REQUIREMENTS OF SECTION 264113: 1. DO NOT USE GROUNDING ELECTRODE DEDICATED FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR COMPONENT OF BUILDING GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM PROVIDE D UNDER THIS SECTION. 2. PROVIDE BONDING OF BUILDING GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM PROVIDED UNDER THIS SECTION AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 70 AND NFPA 780. 2.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: I ABLE FOR THE PURPOSE INTENDED. I LISTED CLASSIFIED T 1. PROVIDE PRODUCTS U , AND LABELED AS SUITABLE 2. PROVIDE PRODUCTS LISTED AND LABELED AS COMPLYING WIT H UL 467 WHERE APPLICABLE. M B. CONDUCTORS FOR GROUNDING AND BONDING, IN ADDITION TO REQUIREMENTS OF SECTION 260526: 1. USE INSULATED COPPER CONDUCTORS UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. A. EXCEPTIONS: 1) USE BARE COPPER CONDUCTORS WHERE INSTALLED UNDERGROUND IN DIRECT CONTACT WITH EARTH. 2) USE BARE COPPER CONDUCTORS WHERE DIRECTLY ENCASED IN CONCRETE (NOT IN RACEWAY). 2. FACTORY PRE -FABRICATED BONDING JUMPERS: FURNISHED WITH FACTORY -INSTALLED FERRULES; SIZE BRAIDED CABLES TO PROVIDE EQUIVALENT GAUGE OF SPECIFIED CONDUCTORS. B. CONNECTORS FOR GROUNDING AND BONDING: 1. DESCRIPTION: CONNECTORS APPROPRIATE FOR THE APPLICATION AND SUITABLE FOR THE CONDUCTORS AND ITEMS TO BE CONNECTED; LISTED AND LABELED AS COMPLYING WITH UL 467 2. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, USE EXOTHERMIC WELDED CONNECTIONS FOR UNDERGROUND, CONCEALED AND OTHER INACCESSIBLE CONNECTIONS. A. EXCEPTIONS: 1) USE MECHANICAL CONNECTORS FOR CONNECTIONS TO ELECTRODES AT GROUND ACCESS WELLS. 3. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, USE MECHANICAL CONNECTORS, COMPRESSION CONNECTORS, OR EXOTHERMIC WELDED CONNECTIONS FOR ACCESSIBLE CONNECTIONS. A. EXCEPTIONS: 1) USE EXOTHERMIC WELDED CONNECTIONS FOR CONNECTIONS TO METAL BUILDING FRAME. D. GROUND BARS: 1. DESCRIPTION: COPPER RECTANGULAR GROUND BARS WITH MOUNTING BRACKETS AND INSULATORS. 2. SIZE: AS INDICATED. 3. HOLES FOR CONNECTIONS: AS INDICATED OR AS REQUIRED FOR CONNECTIONS TO BE MADE. E. GROUND ROD ELECTRODES: 1. COMPLY WITH NEMA GR 1 . 2. MATERIAL: COPPER -BONDED (COPPER -CLAD) STEEL. 3. SIZE: 3/4 INCH DIAMETER BY 10 FEET LENGTH, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 4. WHERE ROD LENGTHS OF GREATER THAN 10 FEET ARE INDICATED OR OTHERWISE REQUIRED, SECTIONALIZED GROUND RODS MAY BE USED. F. GROUND ACCESS WELLS: 1. DESCRIPTION: OPEN BOTTOM ROUND OR RECTANGULAR WELL WITH ACCESS COVER FOR TESTING AND INSPECTION; SUITABLE FOR THE EXPECTED LOAD AT THE INSTALLED LOCATION. 2. SIZE: AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE ADEQUATE ACCESS FOR TESTING AND INSPECTION, BUT NOT LESS THAN MINIMUM SIZE REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED. A. ROUND WELLS: NOT LESS THAN 8 INCHES IN DIAMETER. B. RECTANGULAR WELLS: NOT LESS THAN 12 BY 12 INCHES. 3. DEPTH: AS REQUIRED TO EXTEND BELOW FROST LINE TO PREVENT FROST UPHEAVAL, BUT NOT LESS THAN 10 INCHES. 4. COVER: FACTORY -IDENTIFIED BY PERMANENT MEANS WITH WORD "GROUND". PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. VERIFY THAT WORK LIKELY TO DAMAGE GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEM COMPONENTS HAS BEEN COMPLETED. B. VERIFY THAT FIELD MEASUREMENTS ARE AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. C. VERIFY THAT CONDITIONS ARE SATISFACTORY FOR INSTALLATION PRIOR TO STARTING WORK. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. INSTALL PRODUCTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. B. INSTALL GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEM COMPONENTS IN A NEAT AND WORKMANLIKE MANNER IN ACCORDANCE WITH NECA 1 . C. GROUND ROD ELECTRODES: UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, INSTALL GROUND ROD ELECTRODES VERTICALLY. WHERE ENCOUNTERED ROCK PROHIBITS VERTICAL INSTALLATION, INSTALL AT 45 DEGREE ANGLE OR BURY HORIZONTALLY IN TRENCH AT LEAST 30 INCHES (750 MM) DEEP IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 70 OR PROVIDE GROUND PLATES. 1. OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS: UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, INSTALL WITH TOP OF ROD 24 INCHES BELOW FINISHED GRADE. 2. INDOOR INSTALLATIONS: UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, INSTALL WITH 4 INCHES OF TOP OF ROD EXPOSED. D. MAKE GROUNDING AND BONDING CONNECTIONS USING SPECIFIED CONNECTORS. 1. REMOVE APPROPRIATE AMOUNT OF CONDUCTOR INSULATION FOR MAKING CONNECTIONS WITHOUT CUTTING, NICKING OR DAMAGING CONDUCTORS. DO NOT REMOVE CONDUCTOR STRANDS TO FACILITATE INSERTION INTO CONNECTOR. 2. REMOVE NONCONDUCTIVE PAINT, ENAMEL, OR SIMILAR COATING AT THREADS, CONTACT POINTS, AND CONTACT SURFACES. ECT 3. EXOTHERMIC WELDS: MAKE CON N IONS USING MOLDS AND WELD MATERIAL SUITABLE FOR THE ITEMS TO BE CONNECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. 4. MECHANICAL CONNECTORS: SECURE CONNECTIONS ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED TORQUE SETTINGS. 5. COMPRESSION CONNECTORS: SECURE CONNECTIONS USING MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED TOOLS AND DIES. E. IDENTIFY GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEM COMPONENTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 260553. F. INACCESSIBLE GROUNDING CONNECTION: 1. MAKE GROUNDING CONNECTIONS, WHICH ARE NORMALLY BURIED OR OTHERWISE INACCESSIBLE, BY EXOTHERMIC WELD. G. MAIN ELECTRICAL ROOM GROUNDING: 1. PROVIDE GROUND BUS BAR AND MOUNTING HARDWARE AT EACH MAIN ELECTRICAL ROOM WHERE INCOMING FEEDERS ARE TERMINATED, AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. CONNECT TO PIGTAIL EXTENSIONS OF THE BUILDING GROUNDING RING, AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. H. RACEWAY 1. CONDUIT SYSTEMS: A. GROUND ALL METALLIC CONDUIT SYSTEMS. ALL METALLIC CONDUIT SYSTEMS SHALL CONTAIN AN EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR. B. NON-METALLIC CONDUIT SYSTEMS, EXCEPT NON-METALLIC FEEDER CONDUITS THAT CARRY A GROUNDED CONDUCTOR FROM EXTERIOR TRANSFORMERS TO INTERIOR OR BUILDING -MOUNTED SERVICE ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT, SHALL CONTAIN AN EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR. C. METALLIC CONDUITTHAT ONLY CONTAINS A GROUNDING CONDUCTOR, AND IS PROVIDED FOR ITS MECHANICAL PROTECTION, SHALL BE BONDED TO THAT CONDUCTOR AT THE ENTRANCE AND EXIT FROM THE CONDUIT. D. METALLIC CONDUITS WHICH TERMINATE WITHOUT MECHANICAL CONNECTION TO AN ELECTRICAL GS R ADAPTERS,SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH HOUSING BY MEANS OF LOCKNUT AND BUSHINGS 0 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING BUSHINGS. CONNECT BUSHINGS WITH A EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR TO THE EQUIPMENT GROUND BUS. 2. FEEDERS AND BRANCH CIRCUITS: INSTALL EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS WITH ALL R ITS: TAL Q UI P FEEDERS, AND POWER AND LIGHTING BRANCH CIRCUITS. 3. BOXES, CABINETS, ENCLOSURES, AND PANELBOARDS: A. BOND THE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR TO EACH PULLBOX, JUNCTION BOX, OUTLET BOX, DEVICE BOX, CABINETS, AND OTHER ENCLOSURES THROUGH WHICH THE CONDUCTOR PASSES (EXCEPT FOR SPECIAL GROUNDING SYSTEMS FOR INTENSIVE CARE UNITS AND OTHER CRITICAL UNITS SHOWN). B. PROVIDE LUGS IN EACH BOX AND ENCLOSURE FOR EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR TERMINATION. 4. WIREWAY SYSTEMS: A. BOND THE METALLIC STRUCTURES OF WIREWAY TO PROVIDE ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY THROUGHOUT THE WIREWAY SYSTEM, BY CONNECTING A NO. 6 AWG BONDING JUMPER AT ALL INTERMEDIATE METALLIC ENCLOSURES AND ACROSS ALL SECTION JUNCTIONS. B. INSTALL INSULATED NO. 6 AWG BONDING JUMPERS BETWEEN THE WIREWAY SYSTEM, BONDED AS REQUIRED ABOVE, AND THE CLOSEST BUILDING GROUND AT EACH END AND APPROXIMATELY EVERY 50 FEET. C. USE INSULATED NO. 6 AWG BONDING JUMPERS TO GROUND OR BOND METALLIC WIREWAY AT EACH END FOR ALL INTERMEDIATE METALLIC ENCLOSURES AND ACROSS ALL SECTION JUNCTIONS. D. USE INSULATED NO. 6 AWG BONDING JUMPERS TO GROUND CABLE TRAY TO COLUMN -MOUNTED BUILDING GROUND PLATES (PADS) AT EACH END AND APPROXIMATELY EVERY 48 FEET. 5. RECEPTACLES SHALL NOT BE GROUNDED THROUGH THEIR MOUNTING SCREWS. GROUND RECEPTACLES WITH A JUMPER FROM THE RECEPTACLE GREEN GROUND TERMINAL TO THE DEVICE BOX GROUND SCREW AND A JUMPER TO THE BRANCH CIRCUIT EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR. 6. GROUND LIGHTING FIXTURES TO THE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR OF THE WIRING SYSTEM. FIXTURES CONNECTED WITH FLEXIBLE CONDUIT SHALL HAVE A GREEN GROUND WIRE INCLUDED WITH THE POWER WIRES FROM THE FIXTURE THROUGH THE FLEXIBLE CONDUIT TO THE FIRST OUTLET BOX. 7. FIXED ELECTRICAL APPLIANCES AND EQUIPMENT SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A GROUND LUG FOR TERMINATION OF THE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR. 8. RAISED FLOORS: PROVIDE BONDING FOR ALL RAISED FLOOR COMPONENTS AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. 9. PANELBOARD BONDING IN PATIENT CARE AREAS: THE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING TERMINAL BUSES OF THE NORMAL AND ESSENTIAL BRANCH CIRCUIT PANEL BOARDS SERVING THE SAME INDIVIDUAL PATIENT VICINITY SHALL BE BONDED TOGETHER WITH AN INSULATED CONTINUOUS COPPER CONDUCTOR NOT LESS THAN NO. 10 AWG, INSTALLED IN RIGID METAL CONDUIT. 1. CONDUCTIVE PIPING: 1. BOND ALL CONDUCTIVE PIPING SYSTEMS, INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR, TO THE GROUNDING ELECTRODE OS AS PRACTICAL TO THE EQUIPMENT SYSTEM. BONDING CONNECTIONS SHALL BE MADE AS CLOSE Q GROUND BUS. 2. IN OPERATING ROOMS AND AT INTENSIVE CARE AND CORONARY CARE TYPE BEDS, BOND THE MEDICAL GAS PIPING AND MEDICAL VACUUM PIPING ATTHE OUTLETS DIRECTLY TO THE PATIENT GROUND BUS. 3. METAL WATER SERVICE PIPE: INSTALL INSULATED COPPER GROUNDING CONDUCTORS, IN CONDUIT, FROM BUILDING'S MAIN SERVICE EQUIPMENT, OR GROUNDING BUS, TO MAIN METAL WATER SERVICE ENTRANCES TO BUILDING. CONNECT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS TO MAIN METAL WATER SERVICE PIPES; USE A BOLTED CLAMP CONNECTOR OR BOLT A LUG -TYPE CONNECTOR TO A PIPE FLANGE BY USING ONE OF THE LUG BOLTS OF THE FLANGE. WHERE A DIELECTRIC MAIN WATER FITTING IS INSTALLED, CONNECT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR ON STREET SIDE OF FITTING. BOND METAL GROUNDING CONDUCTOR CONDUIT OR SLEEVE TO CONDUCTOR AT EACH END. 4. WATER METER PIPING: USE BRAIDED -TYPE BONDING JUMPERS TO ELECTRICALLY BYPASS WATER METERS. CONNECT TO PIPE WITH A BOLTED CONNECTOR. 5. BONDING INTERIOR METAL DUCTS: BOND METAL AIR DUCTS TO EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS OF ASS OCIATED FANS BLOWERS ELECTRIC HEATER S, AND AIR CLEANERS. INSTALL TINNED BONDING JUMPER TO BOND ACROSS FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS TO ACHIEVE CONTINUITY. J. EXTERIOR LIGHT POLES: 1. PROVIDE 20 FEET OF NO.4 AWG BARE COPPER COILED AT BOTTOM OF POLE BASE EXCAVATION PRIOR TO POUR, PLUS ADDITIONAL UNSPLICED LENGTH IN AND ABOVE FOUNDATION AS REQUIRED TO REACH POLE GROUND STUD. K. TELEPHONE SYSTEM: 1. PROVIDE GROUNDING MEANS FOR THE TELEPHONE SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH ARTICLE 800-100 OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, AND THE SYSTEM MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. 2. MAIN TELEPHONE SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING MEANS SHALL INCLUDE BUT NOT BE LIMITED TO A NO. 4 AWG, GREEN, INSULATED, COPPER GROUNDING CONDUCTOR CONNECTED TO THE MAIN ELECTRICAL SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUND BUS. TERMINATE THIS CONDUCTOR AT THE TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT LOCATIO N WITH AN ILSCO NB 350 42 R16 GROUNDING BUS MO UNTED ON THE PLYWOOD BACKBOARD. 3. TELEPHONE TERMINAL BOARDS AND OTHER REMOTE TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING MEANS SHALL INCLUDE BUT NOT BE LIMITED TO A MINIMUM N0.6 AW G, GREEN INSULATED COPPER CONDUCTOR CONNECTED TO THE EQUIPMENT GROUND BUS IN THE LOW VOLTAGE PANELBOARD SERVING THE TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT OR BRANCH CIRCUITS IN THE IMMEDIATE VICINITY. TERMINATE THESE CONDUCTORS TO AN ILSCO NB-350-12-R16 GROUNDING BUS MOUNTED ON THE PLYWOOD BACKBOARD. 4. ROUTE THE TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS IN 3/4 INCH CONDUIT BY THE MOST DIRECT MEANS FROM THE TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT GROUND BUS TO THE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT GROUNDING SYSTEM. 5. PROVIDE PERMANENT, ENGRAVED LABELS AT THE TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT GROUND BUSSES IDENTIFYING THESE AS THE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING MEANS AND IDENTIFYING THE LOCATION OF CONNECTION OF THE GROUNDING CONDUCTORS TO THE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT GROUNDING SYSTEM. L. LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM: 1. BOND THE LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM TO THE ELECTRICAL GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM. 2. BOND ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM GROUND DIRECTLY TO LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM GROUNDING CONDUCTOR AT CLOSEST POINT TO ELECTRICAL SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE. USE BONDING CONDUCTOR SIZED SAME AS SYSTEM GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR, AND INSTALL IN CONDUIT. M. GROUND RESISTANCE: 1. GROUNDING SYSTEM RESISTANCE TO GROUND SHALL NOT EXCEED 5 OHMS. MAKE ANY MODIFICATIONS OR ADDITIONS TO THE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM NECESSARY FOR COMPLIANCE. FINAL TESTS SHALL ENSURE THAT THIS REQUIREMENT IS MET. 2. GROUNDING SYSTEM RESISTANCE SHALL COMPLY WITH THE ELECTRIC UTILITY COMPANY GROUND RESISTANCE REQUIREMENTS. N. TEST WELLS: INSTALL AT LEAST ONE TEST WELL FOR EACH SERVICE UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. INSTALLATTHE GROUND ROD ELECTRICALLY CLOSESTTO SERVICE ENTRANCE. SETTOP OF TEST WELL FLUSH WITH FINISHED GRADE OR FLOOR. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. PERFORM INSPECTION, TESTING, AND ADJUSTING IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 014000. B. INSPECT AND TEST IN ACCORDANCE WITH NETA ATS EXCEPT SECTION 4. C. TESTS AND I NSPECTIONS: 1. AFTER INSTALLING GROUNDING SYSTEM BUT BEFORE PERMANENT ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS HAVE BEEN ENERGIZED, TEST FOR COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS. 2. INSPECT PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL CONDITION. VERIFY TIGHTNESS OF ACCESSIBLE, BOLTED, ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS WITH A CALIBRATED TORQUE WRENCH ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS. 3. TEST COMPLETED GROUNDING SYSTEM AT EACH LOCATION WHERE A MAXIMUM GROUND -RESISTANCE LEVEL IS SPECIFIED, AT SERVICE DISCONNECT ENCLOSURE GROUNDING TERMINAL, AT GROUND TEST WELLS, AND AT INDIVIDUAL GROUND RODS. MAKE TESTS AT GROUND RODS BEFORE ANY CONDUCTORS ARE CONNECTED. A. MEASURE GROUND RESISTANCE NO FEWER THAN TWO FULL DAYS AFTER LAST TRACE OF PRECIPITATION AND WITHOUT SOIL BEING MOISTENED BY ANY MEANS OTHER THAN NATURAL DRAINAGE OR SEEPAGE AND WITHOUT CHEMICAL TREATMENT OR OTHER ARTIFICIAL MEANS OF REDUCING NATURAL GROUND RESISTANCE. 4. PERFORM TESTS BY FALL -OF -POTENTIAL METHOD ACCORDING TO IEEE 81. 5. PREPARE DIMENSIONED DRAWINGS LOCATING EACH TEST WELL, GROUND ROD AND GROUND -ROD ASSEMBLY, AND OTHER GROUNDING ELECTRODES. IDENTIFY EACH BY LETTER IN ALPHABETICAL ORDER, AND KEY TO THE RECORD OF TESTS AND OBSERVATIONS. INCLUDE THE NUMBER OF RODS DRIVEN AND THEIR DEPTH AT EACH LOCATION, AND INCLUDE OBSERVATIONS OF WEATHER AND OTHER PHENOMENA THAT MAY AFFECT TEST RESULTS. DESCRIBE MEASURES TAKEN TO IMPROVE TEST RESULTS D. GROUNDING SYSTEM WILL BE CONSIDERED DEFECTIVE IF IT DOES NOT PASS TESTS AND INSPECTIONS E. REPORT MEASURED GROUND RESISTANCES THAT EXCEED THE FOLLOWING VALUES: 1. POWER AND LIGHTING EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM WITH CAPACITY OF 500 KVA AND LESS: 10 OHMS. 2. POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS OR PANELBOARDS SERVING ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT: 3 OHMS. F. INPATIENT CARE AREAS, TEST THE EFFECTIVENESS OF THE GROUNDING SYSTEM BY PERFORMING VOLTAGE AND IMPEDANCE MEASUREMENTS. MAKE THE MEASUREMENTS AS REQUIRED BY NFPA 99. RECORD THE RESULTS AND MAKE THEM AVAILABLE TO THE AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION AT THE TIME OF FINAL INSPECTION BY THESE AUTHORITIES. 1. UTILIZE TEST INSTRUMENTS EQUAL TO THOSE SPECIFIED IN NFPA 99. 2. CORRECT ANY WIRING FOUND DEFICIENT. G. PERFORM TESTS UNDER THE SUPERVISION OF THE MASTER ELECTRICIAN LICENSED IN THE JURISDICTION WHO WILL CERTIFY THE FINDINGS. THE USE OF A NETA CERTIFIED TESTING AGENCY IS ACCEPTABLE H. PERFORM INSPECTIONS AND TESTS LISTED IN NETA ATS, SECTION 7.13. 1. PERFORM GROUND ELECTRODE RESISTANCE TESTS UNDER NORMALLY DRY CONDITIONS. PRECIPITATION WITHIN THE PREVIOUS 48 HOURS DOES NOT CONSTITUTE NORMALLY DRY CONDITIONS. J. INVESTIGATE AND CORRECT DEFICIENCIES WHERE MEASURED GROUND RESISTANCES DO NOT COMPLY WITH SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS. K. SUBMIT DETAILED REPORTS INDICATING INSPECTION AND TESTING RESULTS AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS TAKEN. END OF SECTION SECTION 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01SECTION INCLUDES A. COMPLY WITH PROVISION OF SECTION 26 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL. B. SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS FOR EQUIPMENT, CONDUIT, CABLE, BOXES, AND OTHER ELECTRICAL WORK. C. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS, ALONG WITH DIVISION 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, THAT ARE APPLICABLE TO ALL DIVISION 26 SECTIONS 1.02RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. SECTION 260534 - RACEWAYS AND CONDUIT SYSTEMS: ADDITIONAL SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT REQUIREMENTS FOR CONDUITS. B. SECTION 260537 - PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES: ADDITIONAL SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT REQUIREMENTS FOR BOXES. C. SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING: ADDITIONAL SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT REQUIREMENTS FOR INTERIOR LUMINAIRES. D. SECTION 265600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING: ADDITIONAL SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT REQUIREMENTS FOR EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES. 1.03REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A123/A123M - STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ZINC (HOT -DIP GALVANIZED) COATINGS ON IRON AND STEEL PRODUCTS; 2015. B. ASTM A153/A153M - STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ZINC COATING (HOT -DIP) ON IRON AND STEEL HARDWARE; 2009. C. ASTM B633 - STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRODEPOSITED COATINGS OF ZINC ON IRON AND STEEL; 2013. D. MFMA 4 METAL FRAMING STANDARDS PUBLICATION; 2004. E. NECA 1- STANDARD FOR GOOD WORKMANSHIP IN ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION; 2010. F. NFPA 70 - NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE; MOST RECENT EDITION ADOPTED BY AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION, INCLUDING ALL APPLICABLE AMENDMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTS. G. UL 513 - STRUT -TYPE CHANNEL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS; CURRENT EDITION, INCLUDING ALL REVISIONS. 1.04SUBMITTALS A. SEE SECTION 013000 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS, FOR SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. B. PRODUCT DATA: PROVIDE MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD CATALOG PAGES AND DATA SHEETS FOR METAL CHANNEL (STRUT) FRAMING SYSTEMS, NON -PENETRATING ROOFTOP SUPPORTS, AND POST -INSTALLED CONCRETE AND MASONRY ANCHORS. C. SHOP DRAWINGS: INCLUDE DETAILS FOR FABRICATED HANGERS AND SUPPORTS WHERE MATERIALS OR METHODS OTHER THAN THOSE INDICATED ARE PROPOSED FOR SUBSTITUTION. D. INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS: INCLUDE EVIDENCE OF COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS. E. MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS: INDICATE APPLICATION CONDITIONS AND LIMITATIONS OF USE STIPULATED BY PRODUCTTESTING AGENCY. INCLUDE INSTRUCTIONS FOR STORAGE, HANDLING, PROTECTION, EXAMINATION, PREPARATION, AND INSTALLATION OF PRODUCT. 1.05QUALITY ASSURANCE A. COMPLY WITH NFPA 70 . B. COMPLY WITH APPLICABLE BUILDING CODE. C. MAINTAIN AT THE PROJECT SITE A COPY OF EACH REFERENCED DOCUMENT THAT PRESCRIBES EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS. D. INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS FOR POWDER -ACTUATED FASTENERS (WHEN SPECIFIED): CERTIFIED BY FASTENER SYSTEM MANUFACTURER WITH CURRENT OPERATOR'S LICENSE. E. INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS FOR FIELD -WELDING: AS SPECIFIED IN SECTION 055000. F. PRODUCT LISTING ORGANIZATION QUALIFICATIONS: AN ORGANIZATION RECOGNIZED BY OSHA AS A NATIONALLY RECOGNIZED TESTING LABORATORY (NRTL) AND ACCEPTABLE TO AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION. 1.06DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. RECEIVE, INSPECT, HANDLE, AND STORE PRODUCTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 1. PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED HANGERS SUPPORTS ANCHORS FASTENERS FITTINGS ACCESSORIES AND HARDWARE AS NECESSARY FOR THE COMPLETE INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL WORK. 2. PROVIDE PRODUCTS LISTED, CLASSIFIED, AND LABELED AS SUITABLE FOR THE PURPOSE INTENDED, WHERE APPLICABLE. 3. WHERE SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENT TYPES AND SIZES ARE NOT INDICATED, SELECT IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S APPLICATION CRITERIA AS REQUIRED FOR THE LOAD TO BE SUPPORTED. INCLUDE CONSIDERATION FOR VIBRATION, EQUIPMENT OPERATION, AND SHOCK LOADS WHERE APPLICABLE. 4. DO NOT USE PRODUCTS FOR APPLICATIONS OTHER THAN AS PERMITTED BY NFPA 70 AND PRODUCT LISTING. 5. DO NOT USE WIRE, CHAIN, PERFORATED PIPE STRAP, OR WOOD FOR PERMANENT SUPPORTS UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED OR PERMITTED. 6. STEEL COMPONENTS: USE CORROSION RESISTANT MATERIALS SUITABLE FOR THE ENVIRONMENT WHERE INSTALLED. A. INDOOR DRY LOCATIONS: USE ZINC -PLATED STEEL OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. B. ZINC -PLATED STEEL: ELECTROPLATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM B633 . C. GALVANIZED STEEL: HOT -DIP GALVANIZED AFTER FABRICATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM A123/A123M OR ASTM A153/A153M. B. OUTLET BOX SUPPORTS: HANGERS, BRACKETS, ETC. SUITABLE FOR THE BOXES TO BE SUPPORTED. 1. MANUFACTURERS: A. COOPER CROUSE-HINDS, A DIVISION OF EATON CORPORATION: WWW.000PERINDUSTRIES.COM. B. ERICO INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION: WWW.ERICO.COM. C. O-Z/GEDNEY, A BRAND OF EMERSON INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION: WWW.EMERSONINDUSTRIAL.COM. D. THOMAS & BETTS CORPORATION: WWW.TNB.COM. E. UNISTRUT; TYCO INTERNATIONAL, LTD. C. METAL CHANNEL (STRUT) FRAMING SYSTEMS: FACTORY -FABRICATED CONTINUOUS -SLOT METAL CHANNEL (STRUT) AND ASSOCIATED FITTINGS, ACCESSORIES, AND HARDWARE REQUIRED FOR FIELD -ASSEMBLY OF SUPPORTS. 1. MANUFACTURERS: A. COOPER B-LINE, A DIVISION OF EATON CORPORATION: WWW.000PERINDUSTRIES.COM. B. THOMAS & BETTS CORPORATION: WWW.TNB.COM. C. UNISTRUT, A BRAND OF ATKORE INTERNATIONAL INC: WWW.UNISTRUT.COM. D. HANGER RODS: THREADED ZINC -PLATED STEEL UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 1. MINIMUM SIZE, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED OR REQUIRED: A. EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS: 1/4 DIAMETER. B. SINGLE CONDUIT UP TO 1 INCH (27MM) TRADE SIZE: 1/4 INCH DIAMETER. C. SINGLE CONDUIT LARGER THAN 1 INCH (27MM) TRADE SIZE: 3/8 INCH DIAMETER. D. TRAPEZE SUPPORT FOR MULTIPLE CONDUITS: 3/8 INCH DIAMETER. E. OUTLET BOXES: 1/4 INCH DIAMETER. F. LUMINAIRES: 1/4 INCH DIAMETER. E. ANCHORS AND FASTENERS: 1. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED AND WHERE NOT OTHERWISE RESTRICTED, USE THE ANCHOR AND FASTENER TYPES INDICATED FOR THE SPECIFIED APPLICATIONS. 2. CONCRETE: USE PRESET CONCRETE INSERTS, EXPANSION ANCHORS, OR SCREW ANCHORS. 3. SOLID OR GROUT -FILLED MASONRY: USE EXPANSION ANCHORS OR SCREW ANCHORS. 4. STEEL: USE BEAM CLAMPS, MACHINE BOLTS, OR WELDED THREADED STUDS. 5. PLASTIC AND LEAD ANCHORS ARE NOT PERMITTED. 6. PRESET CONCRETE INSERTS: CONTINUOUS METAL CHANNEL (STRUT) AND SPOT INSERTS SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED TO BE CAST IN CONCRETE CEILINGS, WALLS, AND FLOORS. A. COMPLY WITH MFMA-4. B. CHANNEL MATERIAL: USE GALVANIZED STEEL. C. MANUFACTURER: SAME AS MANUFACTURER OF METAL CHANNEL (STRUT) FRAMING SYSTEM. 7. POST -INSTALLED CONCRETE AND MASONRY ANCHORS: EVALUATED AND RECOGNIZED BY ICC EVALUATION SERVICE, ( 1 LLC ICC-ES FOR COMPLIANCE WITH APPLICABLE BUILDING CODE. 8. MANUFACTURERS -MECHANICAL ANCHORS: A. HILT[, INC: WWW.US.HILTI.COM. B. ITW RED HEAD, A DIVISION OF ILLINOIS TOOL WORKS, INC: WWW.ITWREDHEAD.COM. C. POWERS FASTENERS, INC: WWW.POWERS.COM. D. SIMPSON STRONG -TIE COMPANY INC: WWW.STRONGTIE.COM. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. VERIFY THAT FIELD MEASUREMENTS ARE AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. B. VERIFY THAT MOUNTING SURFACES ARE READY TO RECEIVE SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS. C. VERIFY THAT CONDITIONS ARE SATISFACTORY FOR INSTALLATION PRIOR TO STARTING WORK. 3.02 INSTALLATION A INSTALL PRODUCTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. B. INSTALL SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS IN A NEAT AND WORKMANLIKE MANNER IN ACCORDANCE WITH NECA 1 . C. INSTALL ANCHORS AND FASTENERS IN ACCORDANCE WITH ICC EVALUATION SERVICES, LLC (ICC-ES) EVALUATION REPORT CONDITIONS OF USE WHERE APPLICABLE. D. PROVIDE INDEPENDENT SUPPORT FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE. DO NOT PROVIDE SUPPORT FROM PIPING, DUCTWORK, OR OTHER SYSTEMS. E. UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED OR APPROVED BY ENGINEER, DO NOT PROVIDE SUPPORT FROM SUSPENDED CEILING SUPPORT SYSTEM OR CEILING GRID. F. UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED OR APPROVED BY ENGINEER, DO NOT PROVIDE SUPPORT FROM ROOF DECK. G. DO NOT PENETRATE OR OTHERWISE NOTCH OR CUT STRUCTURAL MEMBERS WITHOUT APPROVAL OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. H. EQUIPMENT SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT: 1. USE METAL FABRICATED SUPPORTS OR SUPPORTS ASSEMBLED FROM METAL CHANNEL (STRUT) TO SUPPORT EQUIPMENT AS REQUIRED. 2. USE METAL CHANNEL (STRUT) SECURED TO STUDS TO SUPPORT EQUIPMENT SURFACE -MOUNTED ON HOLLOW STUD WALLS WHEN WALL STRENGTH IS NOT SUFFICIENT TO RESIST PULL-OUT. 3. USE METAL CHANNEL (STRUT) TO SUPPORT SURFACE -MOUNTED EQUIPMENT IN WET OR DAMP LOCATIONS TO PROVIDE SPACE BETWEEN EQUIPMENT AND MOUNTING SURFACE. 4. SECURELY FASTEN FLOOR -MOUNTED EQUIPMENT. DO NOT INSTALL EQUIPMENT SUCH THAT IT RELIES ON ITS OWN WEIGHT FOR SUPPORT. I. CONDUIT SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT: ALSO COMPLY WITH SECTION 260534. J. BOX SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT: ALSO COMPLY WITH SECTION 260537. K. INTERIOR LUMINAIRE SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT: ALSO COMPLY WITH SECTION 265100. L. SECURE FASTENERS ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED TORQUE SETTINGS. M. REMOVE TEMPORARY SUPPORTS. N. FOR SUPPORT OF LOW VOLTAGE WIRING NOT REQUIRED TO BE IN CONDUIT, CONTRACTOR SHALL BUNDLE CABLES TOGETHER IN A NEAT MANNER USING APPROVED NYLON CABLE TIES. BUNDLED CABLES SHALL BE SUPPORTED WITH "J" HOOKS ON TELEPHONE TYPE BRIDLE RINGS, A MINIMUM OF SIX FEET ON CENTERS. 1. USE UL LISTED CABLE TIES FOR PLENUM USE IN PLENUM AREAS. 2. MAXIMUM SUPPORTED WEIGHT RATING OF "1" HOOKS SHALL NOT BE EXCEEDED. 3. IDENTIFY DIFFERING TYPES OF CABLES AND TAG THEM WITH TAPE INDICATING SERVICE, I.E. TELEPHONE, NURSE CALL AND DICTATION. 4. IDENTIFICATION TAPE SHALL BE PROVIDED AT MINIMUM INTERVALS OF 25 FEET ON CENTER AND WITHIN EACH INDIVIDUAL SPACE. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. SEE SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS, FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. B. INSPECT SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS FOR DAMAGE AND DEFECTS. C. REPAIR CUTS AND ABRASIONS IN GALVANIZED FINISHES USING ZINC -RICH PAINT RECOMMENDED BY MANUFACTURER. REPLACE COMPONENTS THAT EXHIBIT SIGNS OF CORROSION. D. CORRECT DEFICIENCIES AND REPLACE DAMAGED OR DEFECTIVE SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS. END OF SECTION SECTION 260533 RACEWAYS AND CONDUIT SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01SECTION INCLUDES A. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS, ALONG WITH DIVISION 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, THAT ARE APPLICABLE TO ALL DIVISION 26 SECTIONS. B. COMPLY WITH PROVISION OF SECTION 26 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL. C. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC). D. LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC). E. ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT). F. RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT. G. LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE NONMETALLIC CONDUIT (LFNC). H. CONDUIT FITTINGS. I. ACCESSORIES. 1.02RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. SECTION 078400 - FIRESTOPPING. B. SECTION 26 0500= COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL. C. SECTION 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. 1. INCLUDES ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FITTINGS FOR GROUNDING AND BONDING. D. SECTION 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. E. SECTION 260537 - BOXES. F. SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS AND REQUIREMENTS. 1.03REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI C80.3 - AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD FOR STEEL ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT); 2005. B. NECA 1- STANDARD FOR GOOD WORKMANSHIP IN ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION; NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION • 2010. C. NEMA TC 2 - ELECTRICAL POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT; NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION; 2003. D. NFPA 70 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE; NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION; MOST RECENT EDITION ADOPTED BY AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION, INCLUDING ALL APPLICABLE AMENDMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTS. E. UL 1- FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT; CURRENT EDITION, INCLUDING ALL REVISIONS. F. UL 360 - LIQUID -TIGHT FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT; CURRENT EDITION, INCLUDING ALL REVISIONS. G. UL 797 - ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING -STEEL; CURRENT EDITION, INCLUDING ALL REVISIONS. H. UL 1660 - LIQUID -TIGHT FLEXIBLE NONMETALLIC CONDUIT; CURRENT EDITION INCLUDING ALL REVISIONS. 1.04ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. COORDINATION: 1. COORDINATE MINIMUM SIZES OF CONDUITS WITH THE ACTUAL CONDUCTORS TO BE INSTALLED, INCLUDING ADJUSTMENTS FOR CONDUCTOR SIZES INCREASED FOR VOLTAGE DROP. 2. COORDINATE THE ARRANGEMENT OF CONDUITS WITH STRUCTURAL MEMBERS, DUCTWORK, PIPING, EQUIPMENT AND OTHER POTENTIAL CONFLICTS INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS OR BY OTHERS. 3. VERIFY EXACT CONDUIT TERMINATION LOCATIONS REQUIRED FOR BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND EQUIPMENT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS OR BY OTHERS. 4. COORDINATE THE WORK WITH OTHER TRADES TO PROVIDE ROOF PENETRATIONS THAT PRESERVE THE INTEGRITY OF THE ROOFING SYSTEM AND DO NOT VOID THE ROOF WARRANTY. 5. NOTIFY ENGINEER OF ANY CONFLICTS WITH OR DEVIATIONS FROM THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. OBTAIN DIRECTION BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH WORK. B. SEQUENCING: 1. DO NOT BEGIN INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES UNTIL INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT IS COMPLETE BETWEEN OUTLET, JUNCTION AND SPLICING POINTS. 1.05SUBMITTALS A. SUBMITTAL OF PRODUCTS FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION ARE NOT REQUIRED. 1.06QUALITY ASSURANCE A. CONFORM TO REQUIREMENTS OF NFPA 70. 1.07DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. RECEIVE, INSPECT, HANDLE, AND STORE CONDUIT AND FITTINGS IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS A. DO NOT USE CONDUIT AND ASSOCIATED FITTINGS FOR APPLICATIONS OTHER THAN AS PERMITTED BY NFPA 70 AND PRODUCT LISTING. B. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED AND WHERE NOT OTHERWISE RESTRICTED, USE THE CONDUIT TYPES INDICATED FOR THE SPECIFIED APPLICATIONS. WHERE MORE THAN ONE LISTED APPLICATION APPLIES, COMPLY WITH THE MOST RESTRICTIVE REQUIREMENTS. WHERE CONDUIT TYPE FOR A PARTICULAR APPLICATION IS NOT SPECIFIED, USE GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT. C. UNDERGROUND: 1. UNDER SLAB ON GRADE: USE GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT OR RIGID PVC CONDUIT. 2. EXTERIOR, DIRECT -BURIED: USE GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT OR RIGID PVC CONDUIT. 3. WHERE RIGID POLYVINYL (PVC) CONDUIT IS PROVIDED, TRANSITION TO GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT OR INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC) WHERE EMERGING FROM UNDERGROUND. 4. WHERE RIGID POLYVINYL (PVC) CONDUIT LARGER THAN 2 INCH (53 MM) TRADE SIZE IS PROVIDED, USE GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT ELBOWS FOR BENDS. 5. WHERE STEEL CONDUIT IS INSTALLED IN DIRECT CONTACT WITH EARTH WHERE SOIL HAS A RESISTIVITY OF LESS THAN 2000 OHM -CENTIMETERS OR IS CHARACTERIZED AS SEVERELY CORROSIVE BASED ON SOILS REPORT OR LOCAL EXPERIENCE, USE CORROSION PROTECTION TAPE TO PROVIDE SUPPLEMENTARY CORROSION PROTECTION OR USE PVC -COATED GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT. D. CONCEALED WITHIN HOLLOW STUD WALLS: USE ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT). E. CONCEALED ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILINGS: USE ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT). F. INTERIOR, DAMP OR WET LOCATIONS: USE GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT OR INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC). G. CONNECTIONS TO LUMINAIRES ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILINGS: USE FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT. 1. MAXIMUM LENGTH: 6 FEET. 2. DO NOT USE FOR MORE THAN 6 FEET ON EMERGENCY SYSTEM. H. CONNECTIONS TO VIBRATING EQUIPMENT: 1. DRY LOCATIONS: USE FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT. 2. DAMP, WET, OR CORROSIVE LOCATIONS: USE LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT. 3. MAXIMUM LENGTH: 6 FEET UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 4. VIBRATING EQUIPMENT INCLUDES, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO: A. MOTORS. 2.02 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS A. EXISTING WORK: WHERE EXISTING CONDUITS ARE INDICATED TO BE REUSED, THEY MAY BE REUSED ONLY WHERE THEY COMPLY WITH SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS, ARE FREE FROM CORROSION AND INTEGRITY IS VERIFIED BY PULLING A MANDREL THROUGH THEM. B. COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS CONDUITS: ALSO COMPLY WITH SECTION 271005. C. FITTINGS FOR GROUNDING AND BONDING: ALSO COMPLY WITH SECTION 260526. D. PROVIDE ALL CONDUIT, FITTINGS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE RACEWAY SYSTEM. E. PROVIDE PRODUCTS LISTED, CLASSIFIED, AND LABELED BY UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES INC. (UL) OR TESTING FIRM ACCEPTABLE TO AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION AS SUITABLE FOR THE PURPOSE INDICATED. F. THE WIRING FOR THE LIFE SAFETY AND CRITICAL BRANCHES SHALL BE MECHANICALLY PROTECTED. G. MINIMUM CONDUIT SIZE, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED: 1. BRANCH CIRCUITS: 3/4 INCH (21 MM) TRADE SIZE. 2. BRANCH CIRCUIT HOMERUNS: 3/4 INCH (21 MM) TRADE SIZE. 3. CONTROL CIRCUITS: 3/4 INCH TRADE SIZE. 4. FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS TO LUMINAIRES: 3/8 INCH (12 MM) TRADE SIZE. 5. UNDERGROUND, INTERIOR: 1 INCH (27 MM) TRADE SIZE. 6. UNDERGROUND, EXTERIOR: 1 INCH (27 MM) TRADE SIZE. 7. COMMUNICATION: 1 INCH. H. WHERE CONDUIT SIZE IS NOT INDICATED, SIZE TO COMPLY WITH NFPA 70 BUT NOT LESS THAN APPLICABLE MINIMUM SIZE REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED. 2.03 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC) A. DESCRIPTION: NFPA 70, TYPE FMC STANDARD WALL STEEL FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT LISTED AND LABELED AS COMPLYING WITH UL 1, AND LISTED FOR USE IN CLASSIFIED FIRESTOP SYSTEMS TO BE USED. 2.04 LFMC LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC) A. DESCRIPTION: NFPA 70, TYPE LFMC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) JACKETED STEEL FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT LISTED AND LABELED AS COMPLYING WITH UL 360. 2.05 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. DESCRIPTION: NFPA 70, TYPE EMT STEEL ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING COMPLYING WITH ANSI C80.3 AND LISTED AND LABELED AS COMPLYING WITH UL 797. 2.06 RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT A. MANUFACTURERS: 1. CANTEX INC: WWW.CANTEXINC.COM. 2. CARLON, A BRAND OF THOMAS & BETTS CORPORATION: WWW.CARLON.COM. 3. JM EAGLE: WWW.JMEAGLE.COM. B. DESCRIPTION: NFPA 70, TYPE PVC RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE CONDUIT COMPLYING WITH NEMA TC 2 AND LISTED AND LABELED AS COMPLYING WITH UL 651; SCHEDULE 80 UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED; RATED FOR USE WITH CONDUCTORS RATED 90 DEGREES C. CAN BE USED AS FEEDERS IN PATIENT CARE AREAS. DO NOT USE FOR BRANCH CIRCUIT IN PATIENT CARE AREAS. 2.07 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE NONMETALLIC CONDUIT (LFNC) A. DESCRIPTION: NFPA 70, TYPE LFNC LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE NONMETALLIC CONDUIT LISTED AND LABELED AS COMPLYING WITH UL 1660, PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. VERIFY THAT FIELD MEASUREMENTS ARE AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. B. VERIFY THAT MOUNTING SURFACES ARE READY TO RECEIVE CONDUITS. C. VERIFY THAT CONDITIONS ARE SATISFACTORY FOR INSTALLATION PRIOR TO STARTING WORK. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. INSTALL PRODUCTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. B. INSTALL CONDUIT IN A NEAT AND WORKMANLIKE MANNER IN ACCORDANCE WITH NECA 1. C. INSTALL RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH NECA 111. D. INSTALL LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE NONMETALLIC CONDUIT (LFNC) IN ACCORDANCE WITH NECA 111. E. CONDUIT ROUTING: 1. UNLESS DIMENSIONED, CONDUIT ROUTING INDICATED IS DIAGRAMMATIC. 2. WHEN CONDUIT DESTINATION IS INDICATED AND ROUTING IS NOT SHOWN, DETERMINE EXACT ROUTING REQUIRED. 3. FAILURE TO ROUTE CONDUITTHROUGH BUILDING WITHOUT INTERFERING WITH OTHER EQUIPMENT AND CONSTRUCTION SHALL NOT CONSTITUTE A REASON FOR AN EXTRA CHARGE. EQUIPMENT, CONDUIT, ANDFIXTURES SHALL FIT INTO AVAILABLE SPACES IN BUILDING AND SHALL NOT BE INTRODUCED INTO BUILDING AT SUCH TIMES AND MANNER AS TO CAUSE DAMAGE TO STRUCTURE. EQUIPMENT REQUIRING SERVICING SHALL BE READILY ACCESSIBLE. 4. PROVIDE 1/4" NYLON PULL ROPE IN ALL PRIMARY POWER AND INCOMING TELEPHONE SERVICE ENTRANCE CONDUITS. 5. INSTALL PULL WIRES IN EMPTY CONDUITS. PULL WIRES SHALL BE PLASTIC HAVING MINIMUM 200 POUND TENSILE STRENGTH. LEAVE 3'-0" MINIMUM SLACK AT EACH END OF THE CONDUIT THENCONDUIT CAPPED AND BUSHED. 6. CONCEAL ALL CONDUITS UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED TO BE EXPOSED. 7. CONDUITS IN THE FOLLOWING AREAS MAY BE EXPOSED, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED: A. ELECTRICAL ROOMS. B. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ROOMS. C. WITHIN JOISTS IN AREAS WITH NO CEILING. 8. CUT SQUARE, REAM, REMOVE BURRS, AND DRAW UP TIGHT. FLATTE NED, DENTED, OR DEFORMED CONDUIT IS NOT PERMITTED. REMOVE AND REPLACE THE DAMAGED CONDUITS WITH NEW UNDAMAGED MATERIA L. 9. CONDUITS INSTALLED UNDERGROUND O EMBEDDED R E EDDED IN CONCRETE MAY BE ROUTED IN THE SHORTEST POSSIBLE MANNER UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. ROUTE ALL OTHER CONDUITS PARALLEL OR PERPENDICULAR TO BUILDING STRUCTURE AND SURFACES, FOLLOWING SURFACE CONTOURS WHERE PRACTICAL. 10. ARRANGE CONDUIT TO MAINTAIN ADEQUATE HEADROOM, CLEARANCES, AND ACCESS. 11. ARRANGE CONDUIT TO PROVIDE NO MORE THAN THE EQUIVALENT OF FOUR 90 DEGREE BENDS BETWEEN PULL POINTS. 12. ARRANGE CONDUIT TO PROVIDE NO MORE THAN 100 FEET BETWEEN PULL POINTS. 13. ROUTE CONDUITS ABOVE WATER AND DRAIN PIPING WHERE POSSIBLE. 14. ARRANGE CONDUIT TO PREVENT MOISTURE TRAPS. PROVIDE DRAIN FITTINGS AT LOW POINTS AND AT SEALING FITTINGS WHERE MOISTURE MAY COLLECT. 15. MAINTAIN MINIMUM CLEARANCE OF 6 INCHES BETWEEN CONDUITS AND PIPING FOR OTHER SYSTEMS 16. MAINTAIN MINIMUM CLEARANCE OF 12 INCHES BETWEEN CONDUITS AND HOT SURFACES. THIS INCLUDES, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO: A. HEATERS. B. HOT WATER PIPING. C. FLUES. 17. GROUP PARALLEL CONDUITS IN THE SAME AREA TOGETHER ON A COMMON RACK. F. CONDUIT SUPPORT: 1. SECURE AND SUPPORT CONDUITS IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 70 AND SECTION 260529 USING SUITABLE SUPPORTS AND METHODS APPROVED BY THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. 2. PROVIDE INDEPENDENT SUPPORT FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE. DO NOT PROVIDE SUPPORT FROM PIPING, DUCTWORK, OR OTHER SYSTEMS. 3. INSTALLATION ABOVE SUSPENDED CEILINGS: DO NOT PROVIDE SUPPORT FROM CEILING SUPPORT SYSTEM. DO NOT PROVIDE SUPPORT FROM CEILING GRID OR ALLOW CONDUITS TO LAY ON CEILING TILES. 4. USE CONDUIT STRAP TO SUPPORT SINGLE SURFACE -MOUNTED CONDUIT. A. USE CLAMP BACK SPACER WITH CONDUIT STRAP FOR DAMP AND WET LOCATIONS TO PROVIDE SPACE BETWEEN CONDUIT AND MOUNTING SURFACE. 5. USE METAL CHANNEL (STRUT) WITH ACCESSORY CONDUIT CLAMPS TO SUPPORT MULTIPLE PARALLEL SURFACE -MOUNTED CONDUITS. 6. USE CONDUIT CLAMP TO SUPPORT SINGLE CONDUIT FROM BEAM CLAMP OR THREADED ROD. 7. USE TRAPEZE HANGERS ASSEMBLED FROM THREADED RODS AND METAL CHANNEL (STRUT) WITH ACCESSORY CONDUIT CLAMPS TO SUPPORT MULTIPLE PARALLEL SUSPENDED CONDUITS. 8. USE OF SPRING STEEL CONDUIT CLIPS FOR SUPPORT OF CONDUITS IS NOT PERMITTED. 9. USE OF WIRE FOR SUPPORT OF CONDUITS IS NOT PERMITTED. 10. WHERE CONDUIT SUPPORT INTERVALS SPECIFIED IN NFPA 70 AND NECA STANDARDS DIFFER, COMPLY WITH THE MOST STRINGENT REQUIREMENTS. 11. SUPPORT WITHIN 12 IN OF CHANGES OF DIRECTION, AND WITHIN 12 IN OF EACH ENCLOSURE TO WHICH IS CONNECTED. Z C I- q:* Rt Q 'i O O 0) 0) dJ O O O O L11 Q ZQ U C M M U - Z Ln Lli N N N t\ n W O i c wW J W ll O s LL H d z _z (5 - t cle wLu w Z m 2 3 i N a N 00 - M _Cw Q U o r- Ix Z M M t N M ' W CIA AC O N O � > Q LL 41 L L • o 4- MQ C W '.1 3 W N a 06 Q q,t U v) ami crm a W N W LA = O O ` 1 Q w Z O uj Z Q � 11� Ln Ln m M W r n V w .a ca C a - m 'I` o LL W :;, W �I ?: W 2 L a e» •2 s L. A .r Z Q M N \\ jjl 11111//,// \�\ GE \_EW IS jOti // `��� .L�CENSF•' i5' " 11 0 . 'L No 38680 - * )\�-QJ Q .p` </ STATE OF�c��O•,� ;/' ON A1- �\O //I111111\\\ George Johnson, P.E. PE 38680 ISSUE DATE: 10/19/2018 PROJECT NUMBER: 2847 REVISIONS: NO. DATE I DESCRIPTION ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS E502 TO THE BEST OF THE ENGINEERS KNOWLEDGE, THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS COMPLY WITH THE APPLICABLE MINIMUM BUILDING CODES AND THE APPLICABLE FIRE -SAFETY STANDARDS AS DETERMINED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY IN ACCORDANCE WITH CHAPTER 553.79 AND CHAPTER 633, FLORIDA STATUTES. © 2018 APG ENGINEERING t .L 7 Y! Q Z u > m F Lu Zo 3 u Z W o u a G. CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS: 1. USE SUITABLE ADAPTERS WHERE REQUIRED TO TRANSITION FROM ONE TYPE OF CONDUIT TO ANOTHER. 2. PROVIDE DRIP LOOPS FOR LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT CONNECTIONS TO PREVENT DRAINAGE OF LIQUID INTO CONNECTORS. 3. WHERE SPARE CONDUITS STUB UP THROUGH CONCRETE FLOORS AND ARE NOT TERMINATED IN A BOX OR ENCLOSURE, PROVIDE THREADED COUPLINGS EQUIPPED WITH THREADED PLUGS SET FLUSH WITH FINISHED FLOOR. 4. PROVIDE INSULATING BUSHINGS OR INSULATED THROATS AT ALL CONDUIT TERMINATIONS TO PROTECT CONDUCTORS. 5. SECURE JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS TO PROVIDE MAXIMUM MECHANICAL STRENGTH AND ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY. 6. PROVIDE GROUNDING BUSHINGS ON ALL FEEDER CONDUITS IN CRITICAL CARE AREAS IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEC ARTICLE 517. 7. PROVIDE INSULATED BUSHING ON BOTH ENDS OF EMPTY CONDUITS. 8. WHERE CONDUITS STUB UP IN CONDUIT SPACE BENEATH SWITCHBOARDS OR SWITCHGEAR AND DO NOT CONNECT DIRECTLY TO EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES, INSTALL MALLEABLE IRON NYLON INSULATED GROUND BUSHING COMPLETE WITH BONDING CONNECTION AND BOND TO SWITCHBOARD GROUND BUS. 9. RECESSED LIGHTING FIXTURES SHALL BE CONNECTED WITH FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT FROM OUTLET BOX TO FIXTURE. DO NOT USE IN HOSPITAL EMERGENCY SYSTEM IF IT IS NOT NECESSARY FOR FLEXIBLE CONNECTION. 10. WHERE FEEDER OR BRANCH CONDUITS ENTER PULL BOXES OR JUNCTION BOXES, CLEARLY MARK ONCONDUIT ON THE ENTERING AND LEAVING SIDE OF EACH BOX THE PANEL NAME AND CIRCUIT NUMBER(S) CONTAINED WITHIN THE CONDUIT USING A PERMANENT BLACK MARKER. H. MOTORS AND VIBRATING EQUIPMENT: 1. USE FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT FOR CONNECTIONS TO MOTORS AND OTHER ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SUBJECT TO MOVEMENT, VIBRATION, MISALIGNMENT, CRAMPED QUARTERS, OR NOISE TRANSMISSION. 2. USE LIQUID -TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT FOR INSTALLATION IN EXTERIOR LOCATIONS, MOISTURE OR HUMIDITY LADEN ATMOSPHERE, CORROSIVE ATMOSPHERE, WATER OR SPRAY WASH -DOWN OPERATIONS, INSIDE AIRSTREAM OF HVAC UNITS, AND LOCATIONS SUBJECT TO SEEPAGE OR DRIPPING OF OIL, GREASE, OR WATER. PROVIDE A GREEN EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR WITH FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT. 1. PENETRATIONS: 1. DO NOT PENETRATE OR OTHERWISE NOTCH OR CUT STRUCTURAL MEMBERS, INCLUDING FOOTINGS AND GRADE BEAMS, WITHOUT APPROVAL OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. 2. MAKE PENETRATIONS PERPENDICULAR TO SURFACES UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 3. PROVIDE SLEEVES FOR PENETRATIONS AS INDICATED OR AS REQUIRED TO FACILITATE INSTALLATION. SET SLEEVES FLUSH WITH EXPOSED SURFACES UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED OR REQUIRED. 4. CONCEAL BENDS FOR CONDUIT RISERS EMERGING ABOVE GROUND. 5. SEAL INTERIOR OF CONDUITS ENTERING THE BUILDING FROM UNDERGROUND AT FIRST ACCESSIBLE POINT TO PREVENT ENTRY OF MOISTURE AND GASES. 6. WHERE CONDUITS PENETRATE WATERPROOF MEMBRANE, SEAL AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN INTEGRITY OF MEMBRANE. 7. MAKE PENETRATIONS FOR ROOF -MOUNTED EQUIPMENT WITHIN ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT OPENINGS AND CURBS WHERE POSSIBLE TO MINIMIZE ROOFING SYSTEM PENETRATIONS. WHERE PENETRATIONS ARE NECESSARY, SEAL AS INDICATED OR AS REQUIRED TO PRESERVE INTEGRITY OF ROOFING SYSTEM AND MAINTAIN ROOF WARRANTY. INCLUDE PROPOSED LOCATIONS OF PENETRATIONS AND METHODS FOR SEALING WITH SUBMITTALS. 8. INSTALL FIRESTOPPING TO PRESERVE FIRE RESISTANCE RATING OF PARTITIONS AND OTHER ELEMENTS, USING MATERIALS AND METHODS SPECIFIED IN SECTION 078400. J. UNDERGROUND INSTALLATION: 1. PROVIDE TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTIONS 312316 AND 312323. 2. MINIMUM COVER, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED OR REQUIRED: A. UNDERGROUND, EXTERIOR: 24 INCHES. B. UNDER SLAB ON GRADE: 12 INCHES TO BOTTOM OF SLAB. 3. NO PVC SHALL EMERGE FROM THE GROUND, CONCRETE SLAB, OR CONCRETE ENCASEMENT. PVC SHALL CONVERT TO GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT AT LEAST 6 INCHES BEFORE EXITING CONCRETE SLAB OR CONCRETE ENCASEMENT. SCHEDULE 80 PVC SHALL BE USED IF SHOWN ON DRAWING. INSTALL MANUFACTURED DUCT ELBOWS FOR STUB -UPS AT POLES AND EQUIPMENT AND AT BUILDING ENTRANCES THROUGH FLOOR UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. ENCASE ELBOWS FOR STUB -UP DUCTS THROUGHOUT LENGTH OF ELBOW. 4. INSTALL MANUFACTURED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT ELBOWS FOR STUB -UPS AT POLES AND EQUIPMENT AND AT BUILDING ENTRANCES THROUGH FLOOR. A. COUPLE STEEL CONDUITS TO DUCTS WITH ADAPTERS DESIGNED FOR THIS PURPOSE, AND ENCASE COUPLING WITH 3 INCHES OF CONCRETE FOR A MINIMUM OF 12 INCHES ON EACH SIDE OF THE COUPLING. B. FOR STUB -UPS AT EQUIPMENT MOUNTED ON OUTDOOR CONCRETE BASES AND WHERE CONDUITS PENETRATE BUILDING FOUNDATIONS, EXTEND STEEL CONDUIT HORIZONTALLY A MINIMUM OF 60 INCHES FROM EDGE OF FOUNDATION OR EQUIPMENT BASE. INSTALL INSULATED GROUNDING BUSHINGS ON TERMINATIONS AT EQUIPMENT. 5. PROVIDE UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 260553 ALONG ENTIRE CONDUIT LENGTH FOR SERVICE ENTRANCE WHERE NOT CONCRETE -ENCASED. K. PROVIDE PULL STRING IN ALL EMPTY CONDUITS AND IN CONDUITS WHERE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES ARE TO BE INSTALLED BY OTHERS. LEAVE MINIMUM SLACK OF 12 INCHES AT EACH END. L. PROVIDE GROUNDING AND BONDING IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 260526. M. IDENTIFY CONDUITS IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 260553. 1. WHERE FEEDER OR BRANCH CONDUITS ENTER PULL BOXES OR JUNCTION BOXES, CLEARLY MARK ON CONDUIT ON THE ENTERING AND LEAVING SIDE OF EACH BOX THE PANEL NAME AND CIRCUIT NUMBER(S) CONTAINED WITHIN THE CONDUIT USING A PERMANENT BLACK MARKER. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. SEE SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS, FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. B. CORRECT DEFICIENCIES AND REPLACE DAMAGED OR DEFECTIVE CONDUITS. 3.04 CLEANING A. CLEAN INTERIOR OF CONDUITS TO REMOVE MOISTURE AND FOREIGN MATTER. 3.05 PROTECTION A. IMMEDIATELY AFTER INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT, USE SUITABLE MANUFACTURED PLUGS TO PROVIDE PROTECTION FROM ENTRY OF MOISTURE AND FOREIGN MATERIAL AND DO NOT REMOVE UNTIL READY FOR INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS. END OF SECTION SECTION 260537 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01SECTION INCLUDES A. OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES UP TO 100 CUBIC INCHES, INCLUDING THOSE USED AS JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES. B. CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES, INCLUDING JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES LARGER THAN 100 CUBIC INCHES. C. BOXES FOR HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATIONS. D. FLOOR BOXES. E. UNDERGROUND BOXES/ENCLOSURES. 1.02RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. B. SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. C. SECTION 260534 - RACEWAYS AND CONDUIT SYSTEMS: 1. CONDUIT BODIES AND OTHER FITTINGS. 2. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LOCATING BOXES TO LIMIT CONDUIT LENGTH AND/OR NUMBER OF BENDS BETWEEN PULLING POINTS. D. SECTION 260535 - SURFACE RACEWAYS: 1. ACCESSORY BOXES DESIGNED SPECIFICALLY FOR SURFACE RACEWAY SYSTEMS. 2. LAY -IN WIREWAYS AND WIRING TROUGHS WITH REMOVABLE COVERS. E. SECTION 260540 - UNDERFLOOR DUCTS: JUNCTION BOXES FOR UNDERFLOOR DUCT SYSTEMS. F. SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS AND REQUIREMENTS. G. SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES: 1. WALL PLATES. 2. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LOCATING BOXES FOR WIRING DEVICES. 1.03REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1- STANDARD FOR GOOD WORKMANSHIP IN ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION; 2010. B. NECA 130 - STANDARD FOR INSTALLING AND MAINTAINING WIRING DEVICES; 2010. C. NEMA OS 1- SHEET -STEEL OUTLET BOXES, DEVICE BOXES, COVERS, AND BOX SUPPORTS; 2013. D. NEMA 250 - ENCLOSURES FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (1000 VOLTS MAXIMUM); 2014. E. NFPA 70 - NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE; MOST RECENT EDITION ADOPTED BY AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION, INCLUDING ALL APPLICABLE AMENDMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTS. F. UL 50 - ENCLOSURES FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, NON -ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS; CURRENT EDITION, INCLUDING ALL REVISIONS. G. UL 50E - ENCLOSURES FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS; CURRENT EDITION, INCLUDING ALL REVISIONS. H. UL 514A - METALLIC OUTLET BOXES; CURRENT EDITION, INCLUDING ALL REVISIONS. 1.04ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. COORDINATION: 1. COORDINATE THE WORK WITH OTHER TRADES TO AVOID PLACEMENT OF DUCTWORK, PIPING, EQUIPMENT, OR OTHER POTENTIAL OBSTRUCTIONS WITHIN THE DEDICATED EQUIPMENT SPACES AND WORKING CLEARANCES FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT REQUIRED BY NFPA 70 . 2. COORDINATE ARRANGEMENT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WITH THE DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THE ACTUAL EQUIPMENT TO BE INSTALLED. 3. COORDINATE MINIMUM SIZES OF BOXES WITH THE ACTUAL INSTALLED ARRANGEMENT OF CONDUCTORS, CLAMPS, SUPPORT FITTINGS, AND DEVICES, CALCULATED ACCORDING TO NFPA 70 4. COORDINATE THE PLACEMENT OF BOXES WITH MILLWORK, FURNITURE, DEVICES, EQUIPMENT, ETC. INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS OR BY OTHERS. 5. COORDINATE THE WORK WITH OTHER TRADES TO PRESERVE INSULATION INTEGRITY. 6. COORDINATE THE WORK WITH OTHER TRADES TO PROVIDE WALLS SUITABLE FOR INSTALLATION OF FLUSH -MOUNTED BOXES WHERE INDICATED. 7. NOTIFY ENGINEER OF ANY CONFLICTS WITH OR DEVIATIONS FROM THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. OBTAIN DIRECTION BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH WORK. 1.05SUBMITTALS A. SEE SECTION 013000 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS, FOR SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. B. PRODUCT DATA: PROVIDE MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD CATALOG PAGES AND DATA SHEETS FOR CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES, BOXES FOR HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATIONS, FLOOR BOXES, AND UNDERGROUND BOXES/ENCLOSURES. 1. UNDERGROUND BOXES/ENCLOSURES: INCLUDE REPORTS FOR LOAD TESTING IN ACCORDANCE WITH SCTE 77 CERTIFIED BY A PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER OR AN INDEPENDENT TESTING AGENCY UPON REQUEST. C. MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS: INDICATE APPLICATION CONDITIONS AND LIMITATIONS OF USE STIPULATED BY PRODUCT TESTING AGENCY. INCLUDE INSTRUCTIONS FOR STORAGE, HANDLING, PROTECTION, EXAMINATION, PREPARATION, AND INSTALLATION OF PRODUCT. 1.06QUALITY ASSURANCE A. CONFORM TO REQUIREMENTS OF NFPA 70 . B. MAINTAIN AT THE PROJECT SITE A COPY OF EACH REFERENCED DOCUMENT THAT PRESCRIBES EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS. 1.07DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. RECEIVE, INSPECT, HANDLE, AND STORE PRODUCTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BOXES A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 1. DO NOT USE BOXES AND ASSOCIATED ACCESSORIES FOR APPLICATIONS OTHER THAN AS PERMITTED BY NFPA 70 AND PRODUCT LISTING. 2. PROVIDE ALL BOXES, FITTINGS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE RACEWAY SYSTEM AND TO ACCOMMODATE DEVICES AND EQUIPMENT TO BE INSTALLED. 3. PROVIDE PRODUCTS LISTED CLASSIFIED AND LABELED AS SUITABLE FOR THE PURPOSE INTENDED. 4. WHERE BOX SIZE IS NOT INDICATED, SIZE TO COMPLY WITH NFPA 70 BUT NOT LESS THAN APPLICABLE MINIMUM SIZE REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED. 5. PROVIDE GROUNDING TERMINALS WITHIN BOXES WHERE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS TERMINATE. B. OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES UP TO 100 CUBIC INCHES, INCLUDING THOSE USED AS JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES: 1. USE SHEET -STEEL BOXES FOR DRY LOCATIONS UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED OR REQUIRED. 2. USE RAISED COVERS SUITABLE FOR THE TYPE OF WALL CONSTRUCTION AND DEVICE CONFIGURATION WHERE REQUIRED. 3. USE SHALLOW BOXES WHERE REQUIRED BY THE TYPE OF WALL CONSTRUCTION. 4. DO NOT USE THROUGH -WALL BOXES DESIGNED FOR ACCESS FROM BOTH SIDES OF WALL. 5. SHEET -STEEL BOXES: COMPLY WITH NEMA OS 1, AND LIST AND LABEL AS COMPLYING WITH UL 514A 6. BOXES FOR SUPPORTING LUMINAIRES AND CEILING FANS: LISTED AS SUITABLE FOR THE TYPE AND WEIGHT OF LOAD TO BE SUPPORTED; FURNISHED WITH FIXTURE STUD TO ACCOMMODATE MOUNTING OF LUMINAIRE WHERE REQUIRED. 7. BOXES FOR GANGED DEVICES: USE MULTIGANG BOXES OF SINGLE -PIECE CONSTRUCTION. DO NOT USE FIELD -CONNECTED GANGABLE BOXES. 8. MINIMUM BOX SIZE, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED: A. WIRING DEVICES (OTHER THAN COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS OUTLETS): 4 INCH SQUARE BY 1-1/2 INCH DEEP (100 BY 38 MM) TRADE SIZE. B. COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS OUTLETS: COMPLY WITH SECTION 271005. C. CEILING OUTLETS: 4 INCH OCTAGONAL OR SQUARE BY 1-1/2 INCH DEEP (100 BY 38 MM) TRADE SIZE. 9. WALL PLATES: COMPLY WITH SECTION 262726. C. CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES, INCLUDING JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES LARGER THAN 100 CUBIC INCHES: 1. COMPLY WITH NEMA 250, AND LIST AND LABEL AS COMPLYING WITH UL 50 AND UL 50E, OR UL 508A 2. NEMA 250 ENVIRONMENT TYPE, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED: A. INDOOR CLEAN, DRY LOCATIONS: TYPE 1, GALVANIZED STEEL. B. OUTDOOR LOCATIONS: TYPE 3R, PAINTED STEEL. 3. JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES LARGER THAN 100 CUBIC INCHES: A. PROVIDE SCREW -COVER OR HINGED -COVER ENCLOSURES UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. B. BOXES 6 SQUARE FEET AND LARGER: PROVIDE SECTIONALIZED SCREW -COVER OR HINGED -COVER ENCLOSURES. 4. CABINETS AND HINGED -COVER ENCLOSURES, OTHER THAN JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES: A. PROVIDE LOCKABLE HINGED COVERS, ALL LOCKS KEYED ALIKE UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. B. BACK PANELS: PAINTED STEEL, REMOVABLE. C. TERMINAL BLOCKS: PROVIDE VOLTAGE/CURRENT RATINGS AND TERMINAL QUANTITY SUITABLE FOR PURPOSE INDICATED, WITH 25 PERCENT SPARE TERMINAL CAPACITY. 5. FINISH FOR PAINTED STEEL ENCLOSURES: MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD GREY UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. VERIFY THAT FIELD MEASUREMENTS ARE AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. B. VERIFY THAT MOUNTING SURFACES ARE READY TO RECEIVE BOXES. C. VERIFY THAT CONDITIONS ARE SATISFACTORY FOR INSTALLATION PRIOR TO STARTING WORK. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. INSTALL PRODUCTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. B. PERFORM WORK IN A NEAT AND WORKMANLIKE MANNER IN ACCORDANCE WITH NECA 1 AND, WHERE APPLICABLE, NECA 130, INCLUDING MOUNTING HEIGHTS SPECIFIED IN THOSE STANDARDS WHERE MOUNTING HEIGHTS ARE NOT INDICATED. C. ARRANGE EQUIPMENT TO PROVIDE MINIMUM CLEARANCES IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS AND NFPA 70 . D. PROVIDE SEPARATE BOXES FOR EMERGENCY POWER AND NORMAL POWER SYSTEMS. E. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, PROVIDE SEPARATE BOXES FOR LINE VOLTAGE AND LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS. F. FLUSH -MOUNT BOXES IN FINISHED AREAS UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED TO BE SURFACE -MOUNTED. G. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, BOXES MAY BE SURFACE -MOUNTED WHERE EXPOSED CONDUITS ARE INDICATED OR PERMITTED. H. BOX LOCATIONS: 1. LOCATE BOXES TO BE ACCESSIBLE. PROVIDE ACCESS PANELS IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 083100 AS REQUIRED WHERE APPROVED BY THE ARCHITECT. 2. UNLESS DIMENSIONED, BOX LOCATIONS INDICATED ARE APPROXIMATE. 3. LOCATE BOXES AS REQUIRED FOR DEVICES INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS OR BY OTHERS. A. SWITCHES, RECEPTACLES, AND OTHER WIRING DEVICES: COMPLY WITH SECTION 262726. B. COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS OUTLETS: COMPLY WITH SECTION 271005. 4. LOCATE BOXES SO THAT WALL PLATES DO NOT SPAN DIFFERENT BUILDING FINISHES. 5. LOCATE BOXES SO THAT WALL PLATES DO NOT CROSS MASONRY JOINTS. 6. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, WHERE MULTIPLE OUTLET BOXES ARE INSTALLED AT THE SAME LOCATION AT DIFFERENT MOUNTING HEIGHTS, INSTALL ALONG A COMMON VERTICAL CENTER LINE. 7. DO NOT INSTALL FLUSH -MOUNTED BOXES ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF WALLS BACK-TO-BACK. PROVIDE MINIMUM 6 INCHES HORIZONTAL SEPARATION UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. REQUIRED FIRE RESISTANCE RATED WALLS: INSTALL FLUSH -MOUNTED BOXES SUCH THAT THE RE 8. FIRE E Q RESISTANCE WILL NOT BE REDUCED. A. DO NOT INSTALL FLUSH -MOUNTED BOXES ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF WALLS BACK-TO-BACK; PROVIDE MINIMUM 24 INCHES SEPARATION WHERE WALL IS CONSTRUCTED WITH INDIVIDUAL NONCOM MUNICATING STUD CAVITIES OR PROTECT BOTH BOXES WITH LISTED PUTTY PADS. B. DO NOT INSTALL FLUSH -MOUNTED BOXES WITH AREA LARGER THAN 16 SQUARE INCHES OR SUCH THAT THE TOTAL AGGREGATE AREA OF OPENINGS EXCEEDS 100 SQUARE INCHES FOR ANY 100 SQUARE FEET OF WALL AREA. 9. LOCATE JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES AS INDICATED, AS REQUIRED TO FACILITATE INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS, AND TO LIMIT CONDUIT LENGTH AND/OR NUMBER OF BENDS BETWEEN PULLING POINTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 260534. 10. LOCATE JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES IN THE FOLLOWING AREAS, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED OR APPROVED BY THE ARCHITECT: A. CONCEALED ABOVE ACCESSIBLE SUSPENDED CEILINGS. B. WITHIN JOISTS IN AREAS WITH NO CEILING. C. ELECTRICAL ROOMS. D. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ROOMS. I. BOX SUPPORTS: 1. SECURE AND SUPPORT BOXES IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 70 AND SECTION 260529 USING SUITABLE SUPPORTS AND METHODS APPROVED BY THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. 2. PROVIDE INDEPENDENT SUPPORT FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE EXCEPT FOR CAST METAL BOXES (OTHER THAN BOXES USED FOR FIXTURE SUPPORT) SUPPORTED BY THREADED CONDUIT CONNECTIONS IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 70. DO NOT PROVIDE SUPPORT FROM PIPING, DUCTWORK, OR OTHER SYSTEMS. 3. INSTALLATION ABOVE SUSPENDED CEILINGS: DO NOT PROVIDE SUPPORT FROM CEILING GRID OR CEILING SUPPORT SYSTEM. 4. USE FAR -SIDE SUPPORT TO SECURE FLUSH -MOUNTED BOXES SUPPORTED FROM SINGLE STUD IN HOLLOW STUD WALLS. REPAIR OR REPLACE SUPPORTS FOR BOXES THAT PERMIT EXCESSIVE MOVEMENT. J. INSTALL BOXES PLUMB AND LEVEL. K. FLUSH -MOUNTED BOXES: 1. INSTALL BOXES IN NONCOMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS SUCH AS CONCRETE, TILE, GYPSUM, PLASTER, ETC. SO THAT FRONT EDGE OF BOX OR ASSOCIATED RAISED COVER IS NOT SET BACK FROM FINISHED SURFACE MORE THAN 1/4 INCH OR DOES NOT PROJECT BEYOND FINISHED SURFACE. 2. INSTALL BOXES IN COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS SUCH AS WOOD SO THAT FRONT EDGE OF BOX OR ASSOCIATED RAISED COVER IS FLUSH WITH FINISHED SURFACE. 3. REPAIR ROUGH OPENINGS AROUND BOXES IN NONCOMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS SUCH AS CONCRETE, TILE, GYPSUM, PLASTER, ETC. SO THAT THERE ARE NO GAPS OR OPEN SPACES GREATER THAN 1/8 INCH AT THE EDGE OF THE BOX. L. INSTALL BOXES AS REQUIRED TO PRESERVE INSULATION INTEGRITY. M. INSTALL PERMANENT BARRIER BETWEEN GANGED WIRING DEVICES WHEN VOLTAGE BETWEEN ADJACENT DEVICES EXCEEDS 300 V. N. INSTALL FIRESTOPPING TO PRESERVE FIRE RESISTANCE RATING OF PARTITIONS AND OTHER ELEMENTS, USING MATERIALS AND METHODS SPECIFIED IN SECTION 078400. 0. CLOSE UNUSED BOX OPENINGS. P. INSTALL BLANK WALL PLATES ON JUNCTION BOXES AND ON OUTLET BOXES WITH NO DEVICES OR EQUIPMENT INSTALLED OR DESIGNATED FOR FUTURE USE. Q. PROVIDE GROUNDING AND BONDING IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 260526. R. IDENTIFY BOXES I C N ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 260553. S. COLOR CODE PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES AND IDENTIFY FEEDERS AND CIRCUITS ENTERING PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES AS CALLED FOR IN SECTION 26 05 53. 3.03 CLEANING A. CLEAN INTERIOR OF BOXES TO REMOVE DIRT, DEBRIS, PLASTER AND OTHER FOREIGN MATERIAL. 3.04 PROTECTION A. IMMEDIATELY AFTER INSTALLATION, PROTECT BOXES FROM ENTRY OF MOISTURE AND FOREIGN MATERIAL UNTIL READY FOR INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS. END OF SECTION SECTION 260538 OUTLET BOXES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01WORK INCLUDED A. COMPLY WITH THE PROVISIONS OF SECTION 26 0500. B. PROVIDE EACH FIXTURE, SWITCH, RECEPTACLE, AND OTHER WIRING DEVICE WITH A GALVANIZED OUTLET BOX OF APPROPRIATE SIZE AND DEPTH FOR ITS PARTICULAR LOCATION AND USE. 1.02RELATED WORK A. SECTION 26 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. B. SECTION 26 0533 - RACEWAYS AND CONDUIT SYSTEMS. C. SECTION 26 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. 1.03SUBM ITTALS A. SUBMITTAL OF PRODUCTS FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION IS NOT REQUIRED. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. NATIONAL B. APPLETON. C. RACO. D. GENERAL ELECTRIC. E. STEEL CITY. 2.02 SUPPORTING DEVICES A. PROVIDE APPROPRIATE SUPPORTING DEVICES FOR OUTLET BOXES BY CADDY FASTENERS OR EQUAL AS FOLLOWS: B. RB BOX MOUNTING BRACKETS. C. SCREW GUN BOX BRACKETS. D. "H" BOX MOUNTING BRACKETS. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. LOCATE BOXES TO PREVENT MOISTURE FROM ENTERING OR ACCUMULATING WITHIN THEM. B. SUPPORT OUTLET BOXES INDEPENDENTLY OF CONDUIT, AS REQUIRED BY THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE. C. PROVIDE 4" OCTAGONAL X 1-1/2" DEEP CEILING OUTLET BOXES. FOR INCREASED CUBIC CAPACITY, PROVIDE 4" OCTAGONAL X 2-1/8", 4" SQUARE X 1-1/2" OR 4-11/16" SQUARE X 2-1/8" CEILING OUTLET BOXES. D. PROVIDE 4" SQUARE X 1-1/2" DEEP BOXES FOR SWITCH AND RECEPTACLE OUTLETS IN DRYWALL PARTITIONS. USE SQUARE CUT PLASTER RINGS INSTALLED WITHIN 1/4" OF FINISHED WALL. E. PROVIDE 4" SQUARE X 2-1/2" DEEP BOXES FOR TELEPHONE/DATA OUTLETS IN DRYWALL PARTITIONS. USE SQUARE CUT PLASTIC RINGS INSTALLED WITHIN 1/4" OF FINISHED WALL. F. WHERE REQUIRED TO HANG A SPECIFIED FIXTURE, PROVIDE A FIXTURE STUD OF THE NO -BOLT, SELF-LOCKING TYPE ON CEILING OUTLETS. G. PROVIDE 2-1/2" X 3-3/4" ONE GANG MASONRY BOXES FOR SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES INSTALLED IN CONCRETE BLOCK WALLS NOT PLASTERED. FOR INCREASED CUBIC CAPACITY, PROVIDE 3-1/2" X 3-3/4" ONE GANG MASONRY BOXES. WHERE MORE THAN TWO CONDUITS ENTER THE BOX FROM ONE DIRECTION, PROVIDE 4" SQUARE BOXES WITH SQUARE CUT DEVICE COVERS NOT LESS THAN V. DEEP SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED FOR THIS PURPOSE. USE ROUND EDGE PLASTER RINGS ONLY IF THE BLOCK WALLS ARE TO BE PLASTERED. USE SECTIONAL OR GANGABLE TYPE OUTLET BOXES ONLY IN DRYWALL CONSTRUCTION. H. PROVIDE 4-11/16" SQUARE X 2" DEEP OUTLET BOXES WITH SQUARE CUT DEVICE CORNERS FOR BLOCK WALLS OR ROUND EDGE PLASTER RINGS FOR PLASTERED WALLS FOR TELEPHONE OUTLETS, DATA OUTLETS, AND PRIVATE INTERCOM INTERPHONES. SINGLE GANG DEVICE BOXES ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE. I. PROVIDE FITTINGS WITH THREADED HUBS FOR SCREW CONNECTIONS AND WITH THE PROPER TYPE COVERS FOR SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES SERVED BY EXPOSED CONDUIT. USE PRESSED STEEL OUTLETS ONLY FOR CEILING FIXTURE OUTLETS. PROVIDE CONDULETS WITH THREADED HUBS AND COVERS AND WITH PROPER CONFIGURATIONS FOR ALL CHANGES OF DIRECTION OF EXPOSED CONDUITS. STANDARD CONDUIT ELLS MAY BE USED IF THEY DO NOT INTERFERE, DAMAGE, OR MAR THE APPEARANCE OF THE INSTALLATION. J. USE BOXES OF SUFFICIENT CUBIC CAPACITY TO ACCOMMODATE THE NUMBER OF CONDUCTORS TO BE INSTALLED IN COMPLIANCE WITH ARTICLE 314 OF THE NEC. K. EFFECTIVELY CLOSE UNUSED OPENINGS IN BOXES WITH METAL PLUGS OR PLATES. L. SET BOXES SO THAT FRONT EDGES OF DEVICE EXTENSIONS, E ONS, PLASTER RINGS, ETC ARE FLUSH WITH FINISHED SURFACES. M. CADDY "H" TYPE BOX MOUNTING BRACKETS SHALL NOT BE USED ON EXTERIOR WALLS, CHASE WALLS, OR IN ANY OTHER INSTALLATION WHERE THE BACKSIDE OF THE STUD WALL WILL NOT BE FINISHED. DO NOT USE 4" BRACKETS IN THICKER STUD WALLS WHICH WILL NOT PROVIDE ADEQUATE BRACING. N. SECURE BOXES TO SURFACES UPON WHICH THEY ARE MOUNTED OR EMBED BOXES IN CONCRETE MASONRY. SUPPORT BOXES FROM STRUCTURAL MEMBERS WITH APPROVED BRACES. 0. INSTALL BLANK DEVICE PLATES ON OUTLET BOXES LEFT FOR FUTURE USE. P. PROVIDE BUSHINGS IN HOLES THROUGH WHICH CORDS OR CONDUCTORS PASS. INSTALL BOXES SO THATTHE COVERS WIL L LL BE ACCESSIBLE AT ALL TIMES. R. ELECTRICAL OUTLET BOXES MAY BE INSTALLED IN VERTICAL FIRE RESISTIVE ASSEMBLIES CLASSIFIED AS FIRE/SMOKE AND SMOKE PARTITIONS WITHOUT AFFECTING THE FIRE CLASSIFICATION, PROVIDED SUCH OPENINGS OCCUR ON ONE SIDE ONLY IN EACH FRAMING SPACE, THAT OPENINGS DO NOT EXCEED SIXTEEN SQUARE INCHES AND THAT BOXES ON OPPOSITE FACES OF A PARTITION ARE SEPARATED HORIZONTALLY NOT LESS THAN 24 INCHES. ALL CLEARANCES BETWEEN SUCH OUTLET BOXES AND THE GYPSUM BOARD SHALL BE COMPLETELY FILLED WITH JOINT COMPOUND OR APPROVED FIRE -RESISTIVE COMPOUND. THE WALL SHALL BE BUILT AROUND OUTLET BOXES LARGER THAN SIXTEEN SQUARE INCHES SO AS NOT TO INTERFERE WITH THE WALL RATING. S. COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE USG CAVITY SHAFTWALL SYSTEMS FOLDER SA 926 (MOST CURRENT EDITION) FOR INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES IN RATED SHAFTWALL SYSTEMS. DO NOT EXCEED THE DEPTH OF THE C - H STUD WITH ANY PART OF THE INSTALLATION OF AN OUTLET BOX. PROVIDE OUTLET BOX WITH A TRIM PLATE SO THAT THE TOP LAYER OF THE TWO REQUIRED FACE LAYERS OF GYPSUM BOARD ARE OVERLAPPED WITHOUT A COMMON JOINT. DO NOT PENETRATE THE SINGLE LAYER OF 1" SHAFTWALL LINER PANEL WITH OUTLET OR SWITCH BOXES. DO NOT EXCEED 16 SQUARE INCHES OF SURFACE AREA WITH ANY INDIVIDUAL OUTLET BOX OR A TOTAL AGGREGATE SURFACE AREA OF 100 SQUARE INCHES FOR ALL BOXES IN A SHAFTWALL ON A FLOOR (PER THE U.L. FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY). T. USE INDIVIDUAL BOXES TO SEPARATE ESSENTIAL SYSTEM AND NORMAL SYSTEM LIGHT SWITCHES MOUNTED ADJACENT TO ONE ANOTHER. DO NOT S GANGABLE USE A GABLE BOXES. U. COLOR CODE BOXES AND IDENTIFY CIRCUITS IN CONDUITS ENTERING BOXES AS CALLED FOR IN SECTION 26 05 53. V. INSTALL OUTLET BOXES ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF THE SAME WALL OFFSET TO AVOID BACK TO BACK MOUNTING WHERE POSSIBLE. END OF SECTION SECTION 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01SECTION INCLUDES A. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS. B. IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS. 1.02RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. SECTION 26 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL B. SECTION 260519 - LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES: COLOR CODING FOR POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 600 V AND LESS; VINYL COLOR CODING ELECTRICAL TAPE. 1.03REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 70 - NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE; MOST RECENT EDITION ADOPTED BY AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION, INCLUDING ALL APPLICABLE AMENDMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTS. B. NFPA 70E - STANDARD FOR ELECTRICAL SAFETY IN THE WORKPLACE; 2015. 1.04ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. COORDINATION: 1. VERIFY FINAL DESIGNATIONS FOR EQUIPMENT, SYSTEMS, AND COMPONENTS TO BE IDENTIFIED PRIOR TO FABRICATION OF IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS. B. SEQUENCING: 1. DO NOT CONCEAL ITEMS TO BE IDENTIFIED, IN LOCATIONS SUCH AS ABOVE SUSPENDED CEILINGS, UNTIL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS HAVE BEEN INSTALLED. 2. DO NOT INSTALL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS UNTIL FINAL SURFACE FINISHES AND PAINTING ARE COMPLETE. 1.05FIELD CONDITIONS A. DO NOT INSTALL ADHESIVE PRODUCTS WHEN AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS LOWER THAN RECOMMENDED BY MANUFACTURER. B. COORDINATE IDENTIFICATION NAMES, ABBREVIATIONS, COLORS, AND OTHER FEATURES WITH REQUIREMENTS IN OTHER SECTIONS REQUIRING IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS, DRAWINGS, SHOP DRAWINGS, MANUFACTURER'S WIRING DIAGRAMS, AND THE OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL; AND WITH THOSE REQUIRED BY CODES, STANDARDS, AND 29 CFR 1910.145. USE CONSISTENT DESIGNATIONS THROUGHOUT PROJECT. C. COORDINATE INSTALLATION OF IDENTIFYING DEVICES WITH COMPLETION OF COVERING AND PAINTING OF SURFACES WHERE DEVICES ARE TO BE APPLIED. D. COORDINATE INSTALLATION OF IDENTIFYING DEVICES WITH LOCATION OF ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS. E. INSTALL IDENTIFYING DEVICES BEFORE INSTALLING ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS AND SIMILAR CONCEALMENT. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS A. EXISTING WORK: UNLESS SPECIFICALLY EXCLUDED, IDENTIFY EXISTING ELEMENTS TO REMAIN THAT ARE NOT ALREADY IDENTIFIED IN ACCORDANCE WITH SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS. B. IDENTIFICATION FOR EQUIPMENT: 1. USE IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATE TO IDENTIFY EACH PIECE OF ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT AND ASSOCIATED SECTIONS, COMPARTMENTS, AND COMPONENTS. A. SWITCHBOARDS: 1) NAME. 2 IDENTIFY VOLTAGE AND PHASE. 3) IDENTIFY POWER SOURCE AND CIRCUIT NUMBER. INCLUDE LOCATION WHEN NOT WITHIN SIGHT OF EQUIPMENT. 4 USE IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATE TO IDENTIFY LOADS () SERVED FOR EACH BRANCH DEVICE. DO NOT IDENTIFY SPARES AND SPACES. B. PANELBOARDS: 1) NAME. 2) IDENTIFY VOLTAGE AND PHASE. 3) IDENTIFY POWER SOURCE AND CIRCUIT NUMBER. INCLUDE LOCATION WHEN NOT WITHIN SIGHT OF EQUIPMENT. 4) USE TYPEWRITTEN CIRCUIT DIRECTORY TO IDENTIFY LOAD(S) SERVED FOR PANELBOARDS WITH A DOOR. IDENTIFY SPARES AND SPACES USING PENCIL. 5) FOR POWER PANELBOARDS WITHOUT A DOOR, USE IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATE TO IDENTIFY LOAD(S) SERVED FOR EACH BRANCH DEVICE. DO NOT IDENTIFY SPARES AND SPACES. C. ENCLOSED SWITCHES, CIRCUIT BREAKERS, AND MOTOR CONTROLLERS: 1) IDENTIFY VOLTAGE AND PHASE. 2) IDENTIFY POWER SOURCE AND CIRCUIT NUMBER. INCLUDE LOCATION WHEN NOT WITHIN SIGHT OF EQUIPMENT. 3) IDENTIFY LOAD(S) SERVED. INCLUDE LOCATION WHEN NOT WITHIN SIGHT OF EQUIPMENT. D. ENCLOSED CONTACTORS: 1) IDENTIFY VOLTAGE AND PHASE. 2) IDENTIFY LOAD(S) AND ASSOCIATED CIRCUITS CONTROLLED. INCLUDE LOCATION. E. TRANSFER SWITCHES: 1) IDENTIFY VOLTAGE AND PHASE. 2) NAME. 3) IDENTIFY POWER SOURCE AND CIRCUIT NUMBER FOR BOTH NORMAL POWER SOURCE AND STANDBY POWER SOURCE. INCLUDE LOCATION WHEN NOT WITHIN SIGHT OF EQUIPMENT. 4) IDENTIFY LOAD(S) SERVED. INCLUDE LOCATION WHEN NOT WITHIN SIGHT OF EQUIPMENT. F. ELECTRICITY METERS: 1) IDENTIFY LOAD(S) METERED. 2. SERVICE EQUIPMENT: A. USE IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATE TO IDENTIFY EACH SERVICE DISCONNECTING MEANS. B. USE IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATE TO IDENTIFY AT EACH SERVICE THE MAXIMUM AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT AND DATE THE FAULT CURRENT CALCULATION WAS PERFORMED. 3. EMERGENCY SYSTEM EQUIPMENT: A. USE IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATE OR VOLTAGE MARKER TO IDENTIFY EMERGENCY SYSTEM EQUIPMENT IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 70 . 4. USE IDENTIFICATION LABEL TO IDENTIFY OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR BRANCH CIRCUITS SERVING FIRE ALARM CIRCUITS. IDENTIFY WITH TEXT "FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT". 5. USE FIELD -PAINTED FLOOR MARKINGS, FLOOR MARKING TAPE, OR WARNING LABELS TO IDENTIFY REQUIRED EQUIPMENT WORKING CLEARANCES WHERE INDICATED OR WHERE REQUIRED BY THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. A. FIELD -PAINTED FLOOR MARKINGS: ALTERNATING BLACK AND WHITE STRIPES, 3 INCHES WIDE, PAINTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 099123 AND 099113. 6. AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT DOCUMENTATION: USE IDENTIFICATION LABEL TO IDENTIFY THE AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT AND DATE CALCULATIONS WERE PERFORMED AT LOCATIONS REQUIRING DOCUMENTATION BY NFPA 70, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE FOLLOWING. A. SERVICE EQUIPMENT. 7. ARC FLASH HAZARD WARNING LABELS: USE WARNING LABELS TO IDENTIFY ARC FLASH HAZARDS FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, SUCH AS SWITCHBOARDS, PANELBOARDS, INDUSTRIAL CONTROL PANELS, METER SOCKET ENCLOSURES, AND MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS THAT ARE LIKELY TO REQUIRE EXAMINATION, ADJUSTMENT, SERVICING, OR MAINTENANCE WHILE ENERGIZED. C. IDENTIFICATION FOR CONDUCTORS AND CABLES: 1. COLOR CODING FOR POWER CONDUCTORS 600 V AND LESS: COMPLY WITH SECTION 260519. 2. IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS CONDUCTORS AND CABLES: COMPLY WITH SECTION 271005. 3. USE IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATE OR IDENTIFICATION LABEL TO IDENTIFY COLOR CODE FOR UNGROUNDED AND GROUNDED POWER CONDUCTORS INSIDE DOOR OR ENCLOSURE AT EACH PIECE OF FEEDER OR BRANCH -CIRCUIT DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT WHEN PREMISES HAS FEEDERS OR BRANCH CIRCUITS SERVED BY MORE THAN ONE NOMINAL VOLTAGE SYSTEM. 4. THE COLOR CODE AS OUTLINED BELOW SHALL BE USED. IN ADDITION, ON EACH PANELBOARD, PULLBOX, CONTROL CABIENT, OR OTHER ELECTRICAL ENCLOSUE THAT CONTAINS CIRCUITS FROM MORE THAN ONE SYSTEM, PROVIDE AN ENGRAVED PHENOLIC PLATE AND INDENTIFY THE CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS WITH THE FOLLOWING COLOR CODE: A. 208Y/120, PHASE A, BLACK, PHASE B, RED, PHASE C, BLUE, GROUNDED CONDUCTOR, WHITE, EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR, GREEN, ISOLATED EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR, GREEN/YELLOW STRIPE. 5. USE WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS TO IDENTIFY CIRCUIT NUMBER OR OTHER DESIGNATION INDICATED FOR POWER, CONTROL, AND INSTRUMENTATION CONDUCTORS AND CABLES AT THE FOLLOWING LOCATIONS: A. AT EACH SOURCE AND LOAD CONNECTION. B. WITHIN BOXES WHEN MORE THAN ONE CIRCUIT IS PRESENT. C. WITHIN EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES WHEN CONDUCTORS AND CABLES ENTER OR LEAVE THE ENCLOSURE. D. IN CABLE TRAY, AT MAXIMUM INTERVALS OF 20 FEET. 6. USE WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS TO IDENTIFY CONNECTED GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM COMPONENTS FOR GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTORS. D. IDENTIFICATION FOR RACEWAYS: 1. USE VOLTAGE MARKERS OR COLOR -CODED BANDS TO IDENTIFY SYSTEMS OTHER THAN NORMAL POWER SYSTEM FOR ACCESSIBLE CONDUITS AT MAXIMUM INTERVALS OF 20 FEET. A. COLOR -CODED BANDS: USE FIELD -PAINTING OR VINYL COLOR CODING ELECTRICAL TAPE TO MARK BANDS 3 INCHES WIDE. 1) COLOR CODE: (A) EMERGENCY POWER SYSTEM: RED. (1) CRITICAL BRANCH: ORANGE. (2) EQUIPMENT BRANCH: GREEN. (3) GENERATOR DISTRIBUTION BETWEEN GENERATOR AND TRANSFER SWITCHES:PURPLE (B) FIRE ALARM SYSTEM: RED. 2. USE IDENTIFICATION LABELS, HANDWRITTEN TEXT USING INDELIBLE MARKER, OR PLASTIC MARKER TAGS TO IDENTIFY CIRCUITS ENCLOSED FOR ACCESSIBLE CONDUITS AT WALL PENETRATIONS, AT FLOOR PENETRATIONS, AT ROOF PENETRATIONS, AND AT EQUIPMENT TERMINATIONS WHEN SOURCE IS NOT WITHIN SIGHT. E. IDENTIFICATION FOR BOXES: 1. IDENTIFY FEEDER J-BOXES AND PULL BOXES WITH DESIGNATION OF PANELBOARD/SWITCHBOARD SOURCE AS "FROM" AND LOAD SERVED AS "TO" WITH PERMANENT LABELS. 2. IDENTIFY PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES WITH THE DESIGNATION OF PANELBOARD AND THE CIRCUIT NUMBER OF EACH CIRCUIT CONTAINED THEREIN, WITH PERMANENT MARKER. CLEARLY MARK INFORMATION ON OR IN THE BOX, NOT ON THE COVER, SO THAT THE INFORMATION IS EASILY IDENTIFIABLE. 3. USE VOLTAGE MARKERS TO IDENTIFY HIGHEST VOLTAGE PRESENT. 4. USE VOLTAGE MARKERS OR COLOR CODED BOXES TO IDENTIFY SYSTEMS OTHER THAN NORMAL POWER SYSTEM. 5. USE IDENTIFICATION LABELS OR HANDWRITTEN TEXT USING INDELIBLE MARKER TO IDENTIFY CIRCUITS ENCLOSED. A. FOR EXPOSED BOXES IN PUBLIC AREAS, USE ONLY IDENTIFICATION LABELS. F. IDENTIFICATION FOR DEVICES: 1. WIRING DEVICE AND WALLPLATE FINISHES: COMPLY WITH SECTION 262726. 2. FACTORY PRE -MARKED WALLPLATES: COMPLY WITH SECTION 262726. 3. USE IDENTIFICATION LABEL OR ENGRAVED WALLPLATE TO IDENTIFY SERVING BRANCH CIRCUIT FOR ALL RECEPTACLES. A. FOR RECEPTACLES IN PUBLIC AREAS OR IN AREAS AS DIRECTED BY ARCHITECT, PROVIDE IDENTIFICATION ON INSIDE SURFACE OF WALLPLATE. 4. USE IDENTIFICATION LABEL OR ENGRAVED WALLPLATE TO IDENTIFY LOAD CONTROLLED FOR WALL -MOUNTED CONTROL DEVICES CONTROLLING LOADS THAT ARE NOT VISIBLE FROM THE CONTROL LOCATION AND FOR MULTIPLE WALL -MOUNTED CONTROL DEVICES INSTALLED AT ONE LOCATION. 2.02 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES: 1. MATERIALS: A. INDOOR CLEAN, DRY LOCATIONS: USE PLASTIC NAMEPLATES. B. OUTDOOR LOCATIONS: USE PLASTIC, STAINLESS STEEL, OR ALUMINUM NAMEPLATES SUITABLE FOR EXTERIOR USE. 2. PLASTIC NAMEPLATES: TWO -LAYER OR THREE -LAYER LAMINATED ELECTRICALLY NON-CONDUCTIVE PHENOLIC WITH BEVELED EDGES; MINIMUM THICKNESS OF 1/16 INCH; ENGRAVED TEXT. 3. STAINLESS STEEL NAMEPLATES: MINIMUM THICKNESS OF 1/32 INCH; ENGRAVED OR LASER -ETCHED TEXT. 4. ALUMINUM NAMEPLATES: ANODIZED; MINIMUM THICKNESS OF 1/32 INCH; ENGRAVED OR LASER -ETCHED TEXT. 5. MOUNTING HOLES FOR MECHANICAL FASTENERS: TWO, CENTERED ON SIDES FOR SIZES UP TO 1 INCH HIGH; FOUR, LOCATED AT CORNERS FOR LARGER SIZES. B. FORMAT FOR EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION: 1. MINIMUM SIZE: 1 INCH BY 2.5 INCHES. 2. LEGEND: A. SYSTEM DESIGNATION WHERE APPLICABLE: 1) EMERGENCY POWER SYSTEM: IDENTIFY WITH TEXT "EMERGENCY". 2) FIRE ALARM SYSTEM: IDENTIFY WITH TEXT "FIRE ALARM". B. EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION OR OTHER APPROVED DESCRIPTION. 3. TEXT: ALL CAPITALIZED UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 4. MINIMUM TEXT HEIGHT: A. SYSTEM DESIGNATION: 1/2 INCH. B. EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION: 1/2 INCH. C. EXCEPTION: PROVIDE MINIMUM TEXT HEIGHT OF 1 INCH FOR EQUIPMENT LOCATED MORE THAN 10 FEET ABOVE FLOOR OR WORKING PLATFORM. 5. COLOR: A. NORMAL POWER SYSTEM: WHITE TEXT ON BLACK BACKGROUND. B. EMERGENCY POWER SYSTEM: WHITE TEXT ON RED BACKGROUND. 1) LIFE SAFETY BRANCH: BLACK TEXT ON YELLOW BACKGROUND. 2) CRITICAL BRANCH: BLACK TEXT ON ORANGE BACKGROUND. 3) EQUIPMENT BRANCH: WHITE TEXT ON GREEN BACKGROUND. C. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM: WHITE TEXT ON RED BACKGROUND. C. FORMAT FOR RECEPTACLE IDENTIFICATION: 1. MINIMUM SIZE: 3/8 INCH BY 1.5 INCHES. 2. LEGEND: POWER SOURCE AND CIRCUIT NUMBER OR OTHER DESIGNATION INDICATED. 3. TEXT: ALL CAPITALIZED UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 4. MINIMUM TEXT HEIGHT: 3/16 INCH. 5. COLOR: BLACK TEXT ON CLEAR BACKGROUND. 2.03 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS A. MANUFACTURERS: 1. BRADY CORPORATION; : WWW.BRADYID.COM. 2. HELLERMANNTYTON; : WWW.HELLERMANNTYTON.COM. 3. PANDUIT CORP: WWW.PANDUIT.COM. B. MARKERS FOR CONDUCTORS AND CABLES: USE WRAP -AROUND SELF-ADHESIVE VINYL CLOTH, WRAP -AROUND SELF-ADHESIVE VINYL SELF -LAMINATING, HEAT -SHRINK SLEEVE, PLASTIC SLEEVE, PLASTIC CLIP -ON, OR VINYL SPLIT SLEEVE TYPE MARKERS SUITABLE FOR THE CONDUCTOR OR CABLE TO BE IDENTIFIED. C. MARKERS FOR CONDUCTOR AND CABLE BUNDLES: USE PLASTIC MARKER TAGS SECURED BY NYLON CABLE TIES. D. LEGEND: POWER SOURCE AND CIRCUIT NUMBER OR OTHER DESIGNATION INDICATED. E. TEXT: USE FACTORY PRE-PRINTED OR MACHINE -PRINTED TEXT, ALL CAPITALIZED UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. F. MINIMUM TEXT HEIGHT: 1/8 INCH. G. COLOR: BLACK TEXT ON WHITE BACKGROUND UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 2.04 FLOOR MARKING TAPE A. FLOOR MARKING TAPE FORE EQUIPMENT WORKING CLEARANCE IDENTIFICATION: - Q DEN IFICATION: SELF-ADHESIVE VINYL OR POLYESTER TAPE WITH OVERLAMINATE, 3 INCHES WIDE, WITH ALTERNATING BLACK AND WHITE STRIPES. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. CLEAN SURFACES TO RECEIVE ADHESIVE PRODUCTS ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. INSTALL PRODUCTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. B. INSTALL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS TO BE PLAINLY VISIBLE FOR EXAMINATION, ADJUSTMENT, SERVICING, AND MAINTENANCE. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, LOCATE PRODUCTS AS FOLLOWS: 1. SURFACE -MOUNTED EQUIPMENT: ENCLOSURE FRONT. 2. FLUSH -MOUNTED EQUIPMENT: INSIDE OF EQUIPMENT DOOR. 3. FREE-STANDING EQUIPMENT: ENCLOSURE FRONT; ALSO ENCLOSURE REAR FOR EQUIPMENT WITH REAR ACCESS. 4. ELEVATED EQUIPMENT: LEGIBLE FROM THE FLOOR OR WORKING PLATFORM. 5. BRANCH DEVICES: ADJACENT TO DEVICE. 6. INTERIOR COMPONENTS: LEGIBLE FROM THE POINT OF ACCESS. 7. CONDUITS: LEGIBLE FROM THE FLOOR. 8. BOXES: OUTSIDE FACE OF COVER. 9. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES: LEGIBLE FROM THE POINT OF ACCESS. 10. DEVICES: OUTSIDE FACE OF COVER. C. INSTALL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS CENTERED, LEVEL, AND PARALLEL WITH LINES OF ITEM BEING IDENTIFIED. D. SECURE NAMEPLATES TO EXTERIOR SURFACES OF ENCLOSURES USING STAINLESS STEEL SCREWS AND TO INTERIOR SURFACES USING SELF-ADHESIVE BACKING OR EPDXY CEMENT. E. INSTALL SELF-ADHESIVE LABELS AND MARKERS TO ACHIEVE MAXIMUM ADHESION, WITH NO BUBBLES OR WRINKLES AND EDGES PROPERLY SEALED. F. MARK ALL HANDWRITTEN TEXT, WHERE PERMITTED, TO BE NEAT AND LEGIBLE. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. SEE SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS, FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. B. REPLACE SELF-ADHESIVE LABELS AND MARKERS THAT EXHIBIT BUBBLES, WRINKLES, CURLING OR OTHER SIGNS OF IMPROPER ADHESION. END OF SECTION SECTION 260560 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEM ROUGH -IN REQUIREMENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01WORK INCLUDED A. COMPLY WITH THE PROVISIONS OF SECTION 26 0500. B. PROVIDE ROUGH -IN INCLUDING BACKBOXES, BACKBOARDS, CONDUIT, CONDUITS STUBBED UP, ETC. AS REQUIRED FOR THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS BEING SUPPLIED BY THE OWNER OR OTHERS: C. TELEPHONE SYSTEM. D. INFORMATION/DATA SYSTEMS. E. MATV/CAN SYSTEM. F. INTERCOM SYSTEM. 1. INTERIOR SYSTEMS WILL BE SELECTED AND FURNISHED BY OWNER. 2. PROVIDE CONDUIT, OUTLET BOXES AND COVER PLATES, SLEEVES, CABINETS AND PLYWOOD BACKBOARDS. 3. INSTALL INTERIOR SYSTEMS RISERS AND BRANCH CIRCUIT CABLES. 1.02RELATED WORK A. SECTION 26 0526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS B. SECTION 26 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS C. SECTION 26 0533 - RACEWAYS AND CONDUIT SYSTEMS D. SECTION 26 0537 - PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES E. SECTION 26 0535 - OUTLET BOXES F. SECTION 26 2727 - WIRING DEVICE PLATES PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. INTERIOR SYSTEMS COMPONENTS PROVIDED E BY OWNER/OTHERS WILL INCLUDE SYSTEM EQUIPMENT, SPECIAL OUTLET BOX RECEPTACLES, POWER UNIT CABINETS, SPECIAL OUTLET BOXES, AND CABLE. B. PROVIDE 4 XS X3 4 PLYWOOD BACK BOARDS, PAINTED WITH TWO COATS OF FLAT BLACK FIRE RETARDANT, PAINT WHERE SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. C. INSTALL OUTLET BOXES WITH CONDUIT STUBBED UP ABOVE NEAREST ACCESSIBLE CEILING OR TO CABLE TRAY. WHERE NEAREST ACCESSIBLE CEILING DOES NOT PROVIDE DIRECT ACCESS TO CABLE TRAY OR NEAREST TELECOM CLOSET, PROVIDE ASSOCIATED QUANTITY AND SIZE OF SLEEVES IN WALLS AND CABLE SUPPORTS SUITABLE FOR CABLE AS REQUIRED TO GAIN ACCESS TO CABLE TRAY OR NEAREST TELECOM CLOSET. D. INSTALL UNDERGROUND SERVICE ENTRANCE CONDUIT FOR TELEPHONE/CAN SERVICE TO THE MAIN EQUIPMENT ROOM AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. SCHEDULE SYSTEMS DELIVERIES AND INSTALLATION WITH OWNER AND VENDOR. B. RECEIVE, INVENTORY, STORE, AND PROTECT EQUIPMENT AND CABLE FURNISHED BY OWNER. C. INSTALL SPECIAL OUTLET BOXES PROVIDED BY OWNER FOR DICTATION, COMPUTER, AND CATV SYSTEMS AS DIRECTED BY OWNER AND VENDORS. D. SCHEDULE SYSTEMS START-UP, INSPECTIONS, AND CERTIFICATIONS WITH OWNER AND VENDORS. E. PROVIDE A COMPLETE CONDUIT SYSTEM FOR CABLE INSTALLATION. F. INSTALL A SEPARATE CONDUIT STUBBED UP AND BUSHED ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILINGS, AND BUSHED INTO THE CORRIDOR CEILING SPACE OR AND BUSHED 6 INCHES ABOVE THE SYSTEMS CABLE TRAY TO SERVE EACH DEVICE OUTLET. SIZE CONDUIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE WIRING SCHEMATIC FURNISHED BY THE OWNER. INSTALL A MINIMUM SIZE OF 3/4 INCH CONDUIT, TERMINATED WITH INSULATED BUSHING. G. CABLE CONCEALED IN WALLS OR ABOVE INACCESSIBLE CEILINGS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN CONDUIT. H. WHERE OPEN CABLE IS RUN ABOVE DROPPED CEILINGS AND PENETRATES A SMOKE OR FIRE RATED WALL, FURNISH AND INSTALL AN EMPTY METAL CONDUIT SLEEVE, EXTENDING AT LEAST 6" ON BOTH SIDES OF PARTITION WITH BUSHING ON BOTH ENDS. FOR SLEEVE OR CABLE PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE OR SMOKE RATED WALLS OR PARTITIONS, PROVIDE A U.L. 1479 LISTED "THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP" SYSTEM FOR EACH SLEEVE OR CABLE PENETRATION. END OF SECTION (5 Z C I- qct Itt 0 •4)OOLn w 6 6 < Z� u .S m m u iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii Zw Ln In tj 2 fV N r- r- w O u v x co W c O LL Lu 11 H d ZZ iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii O (5 p Z° a wLu w LL Z m 2 0 J N a N 00 - cn t Q to u 0 I\ Z M M UJ M W to N O - L > Q LL u c 4- N Z 13 'O�' M = a r' 3 u (D Ln N MW ` 2 DD N_ Q .4 u x cem a W N W V) NN M O O w Z O W Z Q I= LA m M I. u (D VM cem .a c 0 a f0 'a 'i 0 Li. W � L !2 w 2 (3 Mr z Q M N George Johnson, P.E. PE 38680 ISSUE DATE: 10/19/2018 PROJECT NUMBER: 2847 REVISIONS: NO. DATE I DESCRIPTION ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS TO THE BEST OF THE ENGINEERS KNOWLEDGE, THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS COMPLY WITH THE APPLICABLE MINIMUM BUILDING CODES AND THE APPLICABLE FIRE -SAFETY STANDARDS AS DETERMINED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY IN ACCORDANCE WITH CHAPTER 553.79 AND CHAPTER 633, FLORIDA STATUTES. © 2018 APG ENGINEERING E5m3 t Y W at U CO51: F co 0 Z Y o 3Luzw 0 V a SECTION 260573 POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01SECTION INCLUDES A. SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY. B. PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY. C. CRITERIA FOR THE SELECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND ASSOCIATED PROTECTIVE DEVICES NOT SPECIFIED IN THIS SECTION, AS DETERMINED BY STUDIES TO BE PERFORMED. D. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES. E. SHORT-CIRCUIT AND PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDIES AS PREPARED BY THE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER OR A PROFESSIONAL ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING FIRM. F. THE STUDIES SHALL INCLUDE ALL NEW ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED UNDER THIS CONTRACT. 1. INCLUDE EMERGENCY POWER SYSTEM DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT. 2. INCLUDE ALL DIRECTLY AFFECTED EXISTING DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT INCLUDING EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT AT THE CUSTOMER FACILITY. 3. INCLUDE ALL EXISTING DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT INCLUDING EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT AT THE CUSTOMER FACILITY. G. THIS PROJECT IS DESIGNED AROUND EQUIPMENT FROM A SPECIFIC MANUFACTURER FOR THE SWITCHGEAR AND PANELBOARDS. THE SYSTEM HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ACHIEVE A HIGH DEGREE OF SELECTIVE COORDINATION FOR SYSTEM RELIABILITY. IF EQUIPMENT FROM A MANUFACTURER OTHER THAN THAT DESIGNED AROUND IS SUBMITTED, A POWER STUDY PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THIS SECTION SHALL BE SUBMITTED. THE STUDY SHALL BE SIGNED AND SEALED BY A REGISTERED ENGINEER IN THE STATE OF FLORIDA. THIS ENGINEER SHALL THEN BECOME A SPECIALTY ENGINEER OF RECORD FOR THE PROJECT SPECIFIC TO THE POWER STUDY. THE STUDY SHALLACHIEVE THE SAME OR BETTER SELECTIVE COORDINATION AS THE SYSTEM INITIALLY DESIGNED, AS DETERMINED BY THE PROJECT ENGINEER. H. IF EQUIPMENT FROM THE SPECIFIC MANUFACTURER (SQUARE D) THE PROJECT IS DESIGNED AROUND IS SUBMITTED, A POWER STUDY PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THIS SECTION AND PREPARED BY THE EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER SHALL NOT BE SUBMITTED. 1.02RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. SECTION 26 0500 - COMMON WORK FOR ELECTRICAL B. SECTION 261300 - MEDIUM -VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR. C. SECTION 261321- AIR INTERRUPTER SWITCHES. D. SECTION 261839 - MEDIUM -VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROLLERS. E. SECTION 261116 - SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS: OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES IN UNIT SUBSTATIONS. F. SECTION 26 2300 - LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR G. SECTION 262817 - ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS. H. SECTION 262413 - SWITCHBOARDS. I. SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS. J. SECTION 262813 - FUSES. 1.03REFERENCE STANDARDS A. IEEE 141- IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR ELECTRICAL POWER DISTRIBUTION FOR INDUSTRIAL PLANTS; 1993 (REAFF 1999). B. IEEE 141-IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR ELECTRIC POWER DISTRIBUTION AND COORDINATION OF INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL POWER SYSTEMS C. IEEE 241- RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEMS IN COMMERCIAL BUILDINGS. D. IEEE 242 - IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR PROTECTION AND COORDINATION OF INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL POWER SYSTEMS; 2001. E. IEEE 399 - IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL POWER SYSTEMS ANALYSIS; 1997. F. IEEE 551- IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR CALCULATING SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENTS IN INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL POWER SYSTEMS; 2006. G. NEMA MG 1- MOTORS AND GENERATORS; 2014. H. NETA ATS - ACCEPTANCE TESTING SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL POWER EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS; 2013. 1. IEEE 1015 - RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR APPLYING LOW -VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS USED IN INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL POWER SYSTEMS J. IEEE 1584 - GUIDE FOR PERFORMING ARC -FLASH HAZARD CALCULATIONS K. ANSI C57.12.00 - STANDARD GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIQUID -IMMERSED DISTRIBUTION, POWER, AND REGULATING TRANSFORMERS L. ANSI C37.13 - STANDARD FOR LOW VOLTAGE AC POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS USED IN ENCLOSURES. M. ANSI C37.010 - STANDARD APPLICATION GUIDE FOR AC HIGH VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS RATED ON A SYMMETRICAL CURRENT BASIS N. ANSI C 37.41- STANDARD DESIGN TESTS FOR HIGH VOLTAGE FUSES, DISTRIBUTION ENCLOSED SINGLE -POLE AIR SWITCHES, FUSE DISCONNECTING SWITCHES AND ACCESSORIES 0. NFPA 70 - NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE; MOST RECENT EDITION ADOPTED BY AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION, INCLUDING ALL APPLICABLE AMENDMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTS. P. NFPA 70E - STANDARD FOR ELECTRICAL SAFETY IN THE WORKPLACE. 1.04ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. COORDINATION: 1. COORDINATE THE WORK TO PROVIDE EQUIPMENT AND ASSOCIATED PROTECTIVE DEVICES COMPLYING WITH CRITERIA FOR SELECTION AND ADJUSTMENT, AS DETERMINED BY STUDIES TO BE PERFORMED. 2. NOTIFY ENGINEER OF ANY CONFLICTS WITH OR DEVIATIONS FROM THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. OBTAIN DIRECTION BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH WORK. B. SEQUENCING: 1. SUBMIT STUDY REPORTS PRIOR TO OR CONCURRENT WITH PRODUCT SUBMITTALS. 2. DO NOT ORDER EQUIPMENT UNTIL MATCHING STUDY REPORTS AND PRODUCT SUBMITTALS HAVE BOTH BEEN EVALUATED BY ENGINEER. 1.05SUBMITTALS A. SEE SECTION 013000 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS, FOR SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. B. STUDY PREPARER'S QUALIFICATIONS. C. STUDY REPORTS, STAMPED OR SEALED AND SIGNED BY STUDY PREPARER. D. STUDY REPORT: SUBMIT PROTECTIVE IV DEVICE STUDIES AS SPECIFIED PRIOR TO SUBMISSION OF PRODUCT DATA SUBMITTALS OR ORDERING OR FABRICATION OF PROTECTIVE DEVICES. 1. EVALUATION OF PRODUCT DATA SUBMITTALS BY ENGINEER WILL NOT COMMENCE UNTIL ACCEPTABLE PRELIMINARY STUDIES INSUFFICIENT DETAIL TO ENSURE THAT DEVICE SELECTION WILL BE ADEQUATE HAVE BEEN SUBMITTED. 2. INCLUDE STAMP OR SEAL AND SIGNATURE OF PREPARING ENGINEER. E. PRODUCT DATA: IN ADDITION TO SUBMITTALS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE, SUBMIT MANUFACTURER'S TIME -CURRENT CURVES FOR ALL PROTECTIVE DEVICES. F. FIELD ENGINEER QUALIFICATIONS. G. CERTIFICATION THAT FIELD ADJUSTABLE PROTECTIVE DEVICES HAVE BEEN SET IN ACCORDANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS OF STUDIES. H. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS: REVISE STUDIES AS REQUIRED TO REFLECT AS -BUILT CONDITIONS. 1. SUBMIT NOT LESS THAN 60 DAYS PRIOR TO FINAL INSPECTION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. 2. INCLUDE HARD COPIES WITH OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SUBMITTALS. 3. INCLUDE COMPUTER SOFTWARE FILES USED TO PREPARE STUDIES WITH FILE NAME(S) CROSS-REFERENCED TO SPECIFIC PIECES OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS. 4. SUBMIT THE ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS, IF REQUIRED, AT THE END OF THE CONSTRUCTION CYCLE WHEN ALL CIRCUITS ARE INSTALLED AND ALL EQUIPMENT IS ON SITE AND/OR INSTALLED SUCH THAT COMPLETE AND ACCURATE DATA MAY BE OBTAINED. 1. IF THE POWER SYSTEMS STUDY SUBMITTAL IS NOT APPROVED FOLLOWING THE SECOND SUBMITTAL, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PAY THE PROJECT ENGINEER $200.00 PER HOUR TO REVIEW ADDITIONAL SUBMITTALS UNTIL THE STUDY IS APPROVED. 1.06POWER SYSTEM STUDIES A. SCOPE OF STUDIES: 1. PERFORM ANALYSIS OF NEW ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. 2. EXCEPT WHERE STUDY DESCRIPTIONS BELOW INDICATE EXCLUSIONS, ANALYZE SYSTEM AT EACH BUS FROM PRIMARY PROTECTIVE DEVICES OF UTILITY SOURCE DOWN TO EACH PIECE OF EQUIPMENT INVOLVED, INCLUDING PARTS OF SYSTEM AFFECTING CALCULATIONS BEING PERFORMED (E.G. FAULT CURRENT CONTRIBUTION FROM MOTORS). 3. INCLUDE IN ANALYSIS ALTERNATE SOURCES AND OPERATING MODES (INCLUDING KNOWN FUTURE CONFIGURATIONS) TO DETERMINE WORST CASE CONDITIONS. A. KNOWN OPERATING MODES: 1) UTILITY AS SOURCE. 2) GENERATOR AS SOURCE. B. GENERAL STUDY REQUIREMENTS: 1. COMPLY WITH NFPA 70 . 2. PERFORM STUDIES UTILIZING COMPUTER SOFTWARE COMPLYING WITH SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS; MANUAL CALCULATIONS ARE NOT PERMITTED. C. DATA COLLECTION: 1. COMPILE INFORMATION ON PROJECT -SPECIFIC CHARACTERISTICS OF ACTUAL INSTALLED EQUIPMENT, PROTECTIVE DEVICES, FEEDERS, ETC. AS NECESSARY TO DEVELOP SINGLE -LINE DIAGRAM OF ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM AND ASSOCIATED INPUT DATA FOR USE IN SYSTEM MODELING. A. UTILITY SOURCE DATA: INCLUDE PRIMARY VOLTAGE, MAXIMUM AND MINIMUM THREE-PHASE AND LINE -TO -GROUND FAULT CURRENTS, IMPEDANCE, X/R RATIO, AND PRIMARY PROTECTIVE DEVICE INFORMATION. 1) OBTAIN UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION FROM UTILITY COMPANY. B. GENERATORS: INCLUDE MANUFACTURER/MODEL, KW AND VOLTAGE RATINGS, AND IMPEDANCE. C. MOTORS: INCLUDE MANUFACTURER/MODEL, TYPE (E.G. INDUCTION, SYNCHRONOUS), HORSEPOWER RATING, VOLTAGE RATING, FULL LOAD AMPS, AND LOCKED ROTOR CURRENT OR NEMA MG 1 CODE LETTER DESIGNATION. D. TRANSFORMERS: INCLUDE PRIMARY AND SECONDARY VOLTAGE RATINGS, KVA RATING, WINDING CONFIGURATION, PERCENT IMPEDANCE, AND X/R RATIO. E. PROTECTIVE DEVICES: 1) CIRCUIT BREAKERS: INCLUDE MANUFACTURER/MODEL, TYPE (E.G. THERMAL MAGNETIC, ELECTRONIC TRIP), FRAME SIZE, TRIP RATING, VOLTAGE RATING, INTERRUPTING RATING, AVAILABLE FIELD -ADJUSTABLE TRIP RESPONSE SETTINGS, AND FEATURES (E.G. ZONE SELECTIVE INTERLOCKING). 2) FUSES: INCLUDE MANUFACTURER/MODEL, TYPE/CLASS (E.G. CLASS J), SIZE/RATING, AND SPEED (E.G. TIME DELAY, FAST ACTING). F. PROTECTIVE RELAYS: INCLUDE MANUFACTURER/MODEL, TYPE, SETTINGS, CURRENT/POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER RATIO, AND ASSOCIATED PROTECTIVE DEVICE. G. CONDUCTORS: INCLUDE FEEDER SIZE, MATERIAL (E.G. COPPER, ALUMINUM), INSULATION TYPE, VOLTAGE RATING, NUMBER PER PHASE, RACEWAY TYPE, AND ACTUAL LENGTH. D. SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY: 1. COMPLY WITH IEEE 551 AND APPLICABLE PORTIONS OF IEEE 141, IEEE 242, AND IEEE 399 . 2. FOR PURPOSES OF DETERMINING EQUIPMENT SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT RATINGS, CONSIDER CONDITIONS THAT MAY RESULT IN MAXIMUM AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO: A. MAXIMUM UTILITY FAULT CURRENTS. B. MAXIMUM MOTOR CONTRIBUTION. C. KNOWN OPERATING MODES (E.G. UTILITY AS SOURCE, GENERATOR AS SOURCE, UTILITY/GENERATOR IN PARALLEL, BUS TIE BREAKER OPEN/CLOSE POSITIONS). 3. FOR EACH BUS LOCATION, CALCULATE THE MAXIMUM AVAILABLE THREE-PHASE BOLTED SYMMETRICAL AND ASYMMETRICAL FAULT CURRENTS. FOR GROUNDED SYSTEMS, ALSO CALCULATE THE MAXIMUM AVAILABLE LINE -TO -GROUND BOLTED FAULT CURRENTS. E. PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY: 1. COMPLY WITH APPLICABLE PORTIONS OF IEEE 242 AND IEEE 399 . 2. ANALYZE ALTERNATE SCENARIOS CONSIDERING KNOWN OPERATING MODES (E.G. UTILITY AS SOURCE, GENERATOR AS SOURCE, UTILITY/GENERATOR IN PARALLEL, BUS TIE BREAKER OPEN/CLOSE POSITIONS). 3. ANALYZE PROTECTIVE DEVICES AND ASSOCIATED SETTINGS FOR SUITABLE MARGINS BETWEEN TIME -CURRENT CURVES TO ACHIEVE FULL SELECTIVE COORDINATION WHILE PROVIDING ADEQUATE PROTECTION FOR EQUIPMENT AND CONDUCTORS. F. STUDY REPORTS: 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. IDENTIFY DATE OF STUDY AND STUDY PREPARER. B. IDENTIFY STUDY METHODOLOGY AND SOFTWARE PRODUCT(S) USED. C. IDENTIFY SCOPE OF STUDIES, ASSUMPTIONS MADE, IMPLICATIONS OF POSSIBLE ALTERNATE SCENARIOS, AND ANY EXCLUSIONS FROM STUDIES. D. IDENTIFY BASE USED FOR PER UNIT VALUES. E. INCLUDE SINGLE -LINE DIAGRAM AND ASSOCIATED INPUT DATA USED FOR STUDIES; IDENTIFY BUSES ON SINGLE -LINE DIAGRAM AS REFERENCED IN REPORTS, AND INDICATE BUS VOLTAGE. F. INCLUDE CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS. 2. SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY: A. FOR EACH SCENARIO IDENTIFY AT EACH BUS LOCATION: 1) CALCULATED MAXIMUM AVAILABLE SYMMETRICAL AND ASYMMETRICAL FAULT CURRENTS (BOTH THREE-PHASE AND LINE -TO -GROUND WHERE APPLICABLE). 2 FAULT POINT X/R RATIO. 3 ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT RATINGS. B. IDENTIFY LOCATIONS WHERE THE AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT EXCEEDS THE EQUIPMENT SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT RATING, ALONG WITH RECOMMENDATIONS. 3. PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY: A. FOR EACH SCENARIO, INCLUDE TIME -CURRENT COORDINATION CURVES PLOTTED ON LOG -LOG SCALE GRAPHS. B. FOR EACH GRAPH INCLUDE (WHERE APPLICABLE): 1) PARTIAL SINGLE -LINE DIAGRAM IDENTIFYING THE PORTION OF THE SYSTEM ILLUSTRATED. 2) PROTECTIVE DEVICES: TIME -CURRENT CURVES WITH APPLICABLE TOLERANCE BANDS FOR EACH PROTECTIVE DEVICE IN SERIES BACK TO THE SOURCE, PLOTTED UP TO THE MAXIMUM AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT AT THE ASSOCIATED BUS. 3) CONDUCTORS: DAMAGE CURVES. 4) TRANSFORMERS: INRUSH POINTS AND DAMAGE CURVES. 5) GENERATORS: FULL LOAD CURRENT, OVERLOAD CURVES, DECREMENT CURVES, AND SHORT CIRCUIT WITHSTAND POINTS. 6) MOTORS: FULL LOAD CURRENT, STARTING CURVES, AND DAMAGE CURVES. C. FOR EACH PROTECTIVE DEVICE, IDENTIFY FIXED AND ADJUSTABLE CHARACTERISTICS WITH AVAILABLE RANGES AND RECOMMENDED SETTINGS. 1) CIRCUIT BREAKERS: INCLUDE LONGTIME PICKUP AND DELAY, SHORT TIME PICKUP AND DELAY, AND INSTANTANEOUS PICKUP. 2) INCLUDE GROUND FAULT PICKUP AND DELAY. 3) INCLUDE FUSE RATINGS. 4) PROTECTIVE RELAYS: INCLUDE CURRENT/POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER RATIOS, TAP, TIME DIAL, AND INSTANTANEOUS PICKUP. D. IDENTIFY CASES WHERE EITHER FULL SELECTIVE COORDINATION OR ADEQUATE PROTECTION IS NOT ACHIEVED, ALONG WITH RECOMMENDATIONS. 1.07PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDY A. ANALYZE THE SPECIFIC ELECTRICAL AND UTILIZATION EQUIPMENT (ACCORDING TO NEC DEFINITION), THE ACTUAL PROTECTIVE DEVICES TO BE USED, AND THE ACTUAL FEEDER LENGTHS TO BE INSTALLED. 1. STUDY METHODOLOGY: COMPLY WITH REQUIREMENTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS OF NFPA 70, IEEE 399, AND IEEE 242. 2. REPORT: STATE THE METHODOLOGY AND RATIONALE EMPLOYED IN MAKING EACH TYPE OF CALCULATION; IDEN TIFY COMPUTER SOFTWARE PACKAGES USED. B. ONE -LINE DIAGRAMS: PREPARE SCHEMATIC DRAWING OF ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, WITH ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND WIRING TO BE PROTECTED BY THE PROTECTIVE DEVICES; IDENTIFY NODES ON THE DIAGRAMS FOR REFERENCE ON REPORT THAT INCLUDES: 1. CALCULATED FAULT IMPEDANCE, X/R RATIOS, UTILITY CONTRIBUTION, AND SHORT CIRCUIT VALUES (ASYMMETRIC AND SYMMETRIC) AT THE MAIN SWITCHBOARD BUS AND ALL DOWNSTREAM DEVICES CONTAINING PROTECTIVE DEVICES. 2. BREAKER AND FUSE RATINGS. 3. GENERATOR KW AND VOLTAGE RATINGS, PERCENT IMPEDANCE, X/R RATIOS, AND WIRING CONNECTIONS. 4. TRANSFORMER KVA AND VOLTAGE RATINGS, PERCENT IMPEDANCE, X/R RATIOS, AND WIRING CONNECTIONS. 5. IDENTIFICATION OF EACH BUS, WITH VOLTAGE. 6. CONDUIT MATERIALS, FEEDER SIZES, ACTUAL LENGTHS, AND X/R RATIOS. C. SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY: CALCULATE THE FAULT IMPEDANCE TO DETERMINE AVAILABLE 3-PHASE SHORT CIRCUIT AND GROUND FAULT CURRENTS AT EACH BUS AND PIECE OF EQUIPMENT DURING NORMAL CONDITIONS, ALTERNATE OPERATIONS, EMERGENCY POWER CONDITIONS, AND OTHER OPERATIONS THAT COULD RESULT IN MAXIMUM FAULT CONDITIONS. 1. SHOW FAULT CURRENTS AVAILABLE AT KEY POINTS IN THE SYSTEM DOWN TO A FAULT CURRENT OF 7,000 A AT 480 V AND 208 V. 2. INCLUDE MOTOR CONTRIBUTIONS IN DETERMINING THE MOMENTARY AND INTERRUPTING RATINGS OF THE PROTECTIVE DEVICES. 3. REPORT: INCLUDE ALL PERTINENT DATA USED IN CALCULATIONS AND FOR EACH DEVICE INCLUDE: A. DEVICE IDENTIFICATION. B. PROTECTIVE DEVICE. C. DEVICE RATING. D. CALCULATED SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT, ASYMMETRICAL AND SYMMETRICAL, AND GROUND FAULT CURRENT. D. COORDINATION STUDY: PERFORM AN ORGANIZED TIME -CURRENT ANALYSIS OF EACH PROTECTIVE DEVICE IN SERIES FROM THE INDIVIDUAL DEVICE BACK TO THE PRIMARY SOURCE, UNDER NORMAL CONDITIONS, ALTERNATE OPERATIONS, AND EMERGENCY POWER CONDITIONS. 1. GRAPHICALLY ILLUSTRATE THAT ADEQUATE TIME SEPARATION EXISTS BETWEEN SERIES DEVICES, INCLUDING UPSTREAM PRIMARY DEVICE. 2. PLOT THE SPECIFIC TIME -CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS OF EACH PROTECTIVE DEVICE ON LOG -LOG PAPER. 3. ORGANIZE PLOTS SO THAT ALL UPSTREAM DEVICES ARE CLEARLY DEPICTED ON ONE SHEET. 4. ALSO SHOW THE FOLLOWING ON CURVE PLOT SHEETS: A. DEVICE IDENTIFICATION. B. VOLTAGE AND CURRENT TRANSFORMER RATIOS FOR CURVES. C. 3-PHASE AND 1-PHASE ANSI DAMAGE CURVES FOR EACH TRANSFORMER. D. NO -DAMAGE, MELTING, AND CLEARING CURVES FOR FUSES. E. CABLE DAMAGE CURVES. F. TRANSFORMER INRUSH POINTS. G. MAXIMUM SHORT CIRCUIT CUTOFF POINT. H. SIMPLE ONE -LINE DIAGRAM FOR THE PORTION OF THE SYSTEM THAT EACH CURVE PLOT ILLUSTRATES. 1. SOFTWARE REPORT FOR EACH CURVE PLOT, LABELED FOR IDENTIFICATION. E. ANALYSIS: DETERMINE RATINGS AND SETTINGS OF PROTECTIVE DEVICES TO MINIMIZE DAMAGE CAUSED BY A FAULT AND SO THAT THE PROTECTIVE DEVICE CLOSESTTO THE FAULT WILL OPEN FIRST. 1. REQUIRED RATINGS AND SETTINGS: DERIVE REQUIRED RATINGS AND SETTINGS OF PROTECTIVE DEVICES IN CONSIDERATION OF UPSTREAM PROTECTIVE DEVICE SETTINGS AND OPTIMIZE SYSTEM TO ENSURE SELECTIVE COORDINATION. 2. IDENTIFY ANY EQUIPMENT THAT IS UNDERRATED AS SPECIFIED. 3. IDENTIFY SPECIFIED PROTECTIVE DEVICES THAT WILL NOT ACHIEVE REQUIRED PROTECTION OR COORDINATION AND CANNOT BE FIELD ADJUSTED TO DO SO, AND FOR WHICH ADEQUATE DEVICES WOULD INVOLVE A CHANGE TO THE CONTRACT SUM. 4. IN ALL CASES WHERE ADEQUATE PROTECTION OR COORDINATION CANNOT BE ACHIEVED AT NO EXTRA COST TO OWNER, PROVIDE A DISCUSSION OF ALTERNATIVES AND LOGICAL COMPROMISES FOR BEST ACHIEVABLE COORDINATION. F. PROTECTIVE DEVICE RATING AND SETTING CHART: SUMMARIZE IN TABULAR FORMAT THE REQUIRED CHARACTERISTICS FOR EACH PROTECTIVE DEVICE BASED ON THE ANALYSIS; INCLUDE: 1. DEVICE IDENTIFICATION. 2. RELAY CT RATIOS, TAP, TIME DIAL, AND INSTANTANEOUS PICKUP. 3. CIRCUIT BREAKER SENSOR RATING, LONG-TIME, SHORT -TIME, AND INSTANTANEOUS SETTINGS, AND TIME BANDS. 4. FUSE RATING AND TYPE. 5. GROUND FAULT PICKUP AND TIME DELAY. 6. INPUT LEVEL AND EXPECTED RESPONSE TIME AT TWO TEST POINTS THAT ARE COMPATIBLE WITH COMMONLY AVAILABLE TEST EQUIPMENT AND THE RATINGS OF THE PROTECTIVE DEVICE. 7. HIGHLIGHT ALL DEVICES THAT AS FURNISHED BY CONTRACTOR WILL NOT ACHIEVE REQUIRED PROTECTION. 1.08QUALITY ASSURANCE A. STUDY PREPARER QUALIFICATIONS: PROFESSIONAL ELECTRICAL ENGINEER LICENSED IN FLORIDA AND WITH MINIMUM FIVE YEARS EXPERIENCE IN THE PREPARATION OF STUDIES OF SIMILAR TYPE AND COMPLEXITY USING SPECIFIED COMPUTER SOFTWARE. B. STUDY PREPARER QUALIFICATIONS: QUALIFIED ENGINEER OF SWITCHGEAR MANUFACTURER OR APPROVED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER. C. COMPUTER SOFTWARE FOR STUDY PREPARATION: USE THE LATEST EDITION OF COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE SOFTWARE UTILIZING SPECIFIED METHODOLOGIES. 1. ACCEPTABLE SOFTWARE PRODUCTS: A. SKM SYSTEMS ANALYSIS, INC: WWW.SKM.COM. D. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY: PROVIDE ALL PROJECT -RELATED DATA NEEDED BY STUDY PREPARER, INCLUDING EQUIPMENT, WIRE SIZES, INSULATION TYPES, CONDUIT TYPES, AND ACTUAL CIRCUIT LENGTHS. E. OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITY: PROVIDE DATA ON RELEVANT OWNER POWER DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. PROVIDE PROTECTIVE DEVICES OF RATINGS AND SETTINGS AS REQUIRED SO THATTHE PROTECTIVE DEVICE CLOSEST TO THE FAULT WILL OPEN FIRST. B. REPLACE EXISTING PROTECTIVE DEVICES TO ACHIEVE SPECIFIED PERFORMANCE. C. FURNISH AN ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS STUDY PER NFPA 70E - STANDARD FOR ELECTRICAL SAFETY IN THE WORKPLACE. D. THE SPECIFIED EQUIPMENT HAS BEEN DESIGNED AND SELECTED TO ACHIEVE THE SPECIFIED PERFORMANCE; ENSURE THAT EQUIPMENT ACTUALLY INSTALLED PROVIDES THAT PERFORMANCE. E. IN ADDITION TO REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE, PROVIDE OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES HAVING RATINGS AND SETTINGS IN ACCORDANCE WITH RESULTS OF THIS ANALYSIS. 2.02 DATA COLLECTION A. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH ALL DATA AS REQUIRED BY THE POWER SYSTEM STUDIES. THE ENGINEER PERFORMING THE SHORT-CIRCUIT, PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION, AND ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS STUDIES (IF REQUIRED) SHALL FURNISH THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WITH A LIST OF REQUIRED DATA IMMEDIATELY AFTER AWARD OF THE CONTRACT. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL EXPEDITE COLLECTION OF THE DATA TO ENSURE COMPLETION OF THE STUDIES AS REQUIRED. B. THE ENGINEER PERFORMING THE STUDY SHALL MAKE AT LEAST ONE JOB SITE VISIT BEFORE COMPLETION OF THE FINAL STUDY TO FAMILIARIZE HIMSELF/HERSELF WITH THE PROJECT TO ENSURE THAT THE PROVIDED DATA IS ACCURATE. C. SOURCE CONTRIBUTION SHALL INCLUDE PRESENT AND FUTURE MOTORS AND GENERATORS. D. LOAD DATA UTILIZED SHALL INCLUDE EXISTING AND PROPOSED LOADS OBTAINED FROM CONTRACT DOCUMENTS PROVIDED BY OWNER, OR CONTRACTOR. E. STUDY ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM FROM NORMAL AND ALTERNATE POWER SOURCES THROUGHOUT ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM FOR PROJECT. INCLUDE STUDIES OF SYSTEM -SWITCHING CONFIGURATIONS AND ALTERNATE OPERATIONS THAT COULD RESULT IN MAXIMUM FAULT CONDITIONS. F. IF APPLICABLE INCLUDE FAULT CONTRIBUTION OF EXISTING MOTOR S IN THE STUDY. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN REQUIRED EXISTING EQUIPMENT DATA, IF NECESSARY, TO SATISFY THE STUDY REQUIREMENTS. 2.03 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY A. USE ACTUAL CONDUCTOR IMPEDANCES IF KNOWN. IF UNKNOWN, USE TYPICAL CONDUCTOR IMPEDANCES BASED ON IEEE STANDARD 141. B. ESTIMATED CONDUCTOR LENGTHS, TYPICAL GENERATOR, TRANSFORMER, MOTOR, AND UTILITY DATA MAY BE USED FOR THE PRELIMINARY STUDY. C. ACTUAL INSTALLED CONDUCTOR LENGTHS, TEST AND/OR NAMEPLATE DATA FOR ALL GENERATORS, TRANSFORMERS, MOTORS 50 HP AND LARGER, CAPACITORS, REACTORS, OR OTHER EQUIPMENT THAT MAY AFFECT THE STUDY MUST BE USED FOR THE FINAL STUDY. D. CONDUCTOR PROTECTION: PROTECT CABLES AGAINST DAMAGE FROM FAULT CURRENTS ACCORDING TO ICEA P-32-382, ICEA P-45-482, AND CONDUCTOR MELTING CURVES IN IEEE 242. DEMONSTRATE THAT EQUIPMENT WITHSTANDS THE MAXIMUM SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENT FOR A TIME EQUIVALENT TO THE TRIPPING TIME OF THE PRIMARY RELAY PROTECTION OR TOTAL CLEARING TIME OF THE FUSE. TO DETERMINE TEMPERATURES THAT DAMAGE INSULATION, USE CURVES FROM CABLE MANUFACTURERS OR FROM LISTED STANDARDS INDICATING CONDUCTOR SIZE AND SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENT. E. ACTUAL UTILITY FAULT CURRENT AND X/R RATIO SHALL BE USED. INFINITE BUS CALCULATION IS NOT ACCEPTABLE. F. THE PRE -FAULT BUS VOLTAGE SHALL BE THE HIGHEST REPORTED BY THE UTILITY FOR PAST 5 YEARS. IF UNAVAILABLE, 1.05 PER UNIT SHALL BE USED. G. PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING: 1. CALCULATION METHODS AND ASSUMPTIONS. 2. SELECTED BASE PER UNIT QUANTITIES. 3. ONE LINE DIAGRAM OF THE SYSTEM BEING EVALUATED. 4. UTILITY IMPEDANCE DATA, INCLUDING THE MAXIMUM AND MINIMUM 3 PHASE AND LINE -TO -GROUND FAULT CURRENT AVAILABLE, NOMINAL, MAXIMUM, AND MINIMUM VOLTAGE, 3 PHASE X/R RATIO, AND LINE -TO -GROUND X/R RATIO. 5. UTILITY PROTECTIVE DEVICE SETTINGS INCLUDING RECLOSER IF USED. 6. MOTOR FAULT CONTRIBUTION CHARACTERISTICS. 7. GENERATOR FAULT CONTRIBUTION CHARACTERISTICS. 8. TABULATIONS OF CALCULATED QUANTITIES. 9. RESULTS, CONCLUSIONS, AND RECOMMENDATIONS. H. CALCULATE SHORT-CIRCUIT MOMENTARY AND INTERRUPTING DUTIES FOR A THREE-PHASE BOLTED FAULT AT EACH: 1. ELECTRIC UTILITY'S SUPPLY TERMINATION POINT 2. INCOMING SWITCHGEAR 3. UNIT SUBSTATION PRIMARY AND SECONDARY TERMINALS 4. LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR. 5. MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS. 6. STANDBY GENERATORS AND AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES. 7. BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS. 8. OTHER SIGNIFICANT LOCATIONS THROUGHOUT THE SYSTEM. I. FOR GROUNDED SYSTEMS, PROVIDE A BOLTED LINE -TO -GROUND FAULT CURRENT STUDY FOR AREAS AS DEFINED FOR THE THREE-PHASE BOLTED FAULT SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY. J. PROTECTIVE DEVICE EVALUATION: 1. EVALUATE EQUIPMENT AND PROTECTIVE DEVIC ES AND COMPARE TO SHORT CIRCUIT RATINGS. 2. ADEQUACY OF SWITCHGEAR SWITCHBOARDS DISCONNECTS, Q , D NNECTS, TRANSFER SWITCHES, MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS, AND PANELBOARD BUS BARS TO WITHSTAND SHORT-CIRCUIT STRESSES. 3. NOTIFY OWNER, IN WRITING, OF ANY EXISTING CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES IMPROPERLY RATED FOR THE CALCULATED AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT. 2.04 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY A. PROPOSED PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION TIME -CURRENT CURVES (TCC) SHALL BE DISPLAYED ON LOG -LOG SCALE GRAPHS. NO MORE THAN 5 DEVICES SHALL BE SHOWN ON ANY PLOT. B. INCLUDE ON EACH TCC GRAPH, A COMPLETE TITLE, APPLICABLE NOTES, AND ONE -LINE DIAGRAM WITH LEGEND IDENTIFYING THE SPECIFIC PORTION OF THE SYSTEM COVERED. C. TERMINATE DEVICE CHARACTERISTIC CURVES AT A POINT REFLECTING MAXIMUM SYMMETRICAL OR ASYMMETRICAL FAULT CURRENT TO WHICH THE DEVICE IS EXPOSED. D. IDENTIFY THE DEVICE ASSOCIATED WITH EACH CURVE BY MANUFACTURER TYPE, FUNCTION, AND, IF APPLICABLE, TAP, TIME DELAY, AND INSTANTANEOUS SETTINGS RECOMMENDED. E. PLOT THE FOLLOWING CHARACTERISTICS ON THE TCC GRAPHS, WHERE APPLICABLE: 1. DEVICE TAG. 2. ELECTRIC UTILITY'S OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE. 3. MEDIUM VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT OVERCURRENT RELAYS. 4. MEDIUM AND LOW VOLTAGE FUSES INCLUDING MANUFACTURER'S MINIMUM MELT, TOTAL CLEARING, TOLERANCE, AND DAMAGE BANDS. S. LOW VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIP DEVICES, INCLUDING MANUFACTURER'S TOLERANCE BANDS. 6. TRANSFORMER FULL -LOAD CURRENT, MAGNETIZING INRUSH CURRENT, AND ANSI THROUGH -FAULT PROTECTION CURVES. THE FREQUENT FAULT PORTION OF THE DAMAGE CURVE SHOULD NOT BE SHOWN UNLESS THE TRANSFORMER FEEDS OVERHEAD LINES. THE SHIFTED CURVE FOR LINE -TO -GROUND FAULTS ON THE SECONDARY SIDE SHALL BE SHOWN ON THE GROUND FAULT PLOT. 7. CONDUCTOR DAMAGE CURVES. 8. GROUND FAULT PROTECTIVE DEVICES SHALL BE SHOWN ON SEPARATE TCC PLOTS. THE FIRST PHASE OVERCURRENT RELAY AND ANY NEGATIVE SEQUENCE RELAYS ON THE PRIMARY SIDE OF A DELTA-WYE TRANSFORMER SHALL BE SHOWN. 9. PERTINENT MOTOR STARTING CHARACTERISTICS, MOTOR DAMAGE POINTS, AND OVERLOAD RELAY. MOTORS LARGER THAN 500 HP SHALL HAVE A THERMAL DAMAGE CURVE. 10. PERTINENT GENERATOR SHORT-CIRCUIT DECREMENT CURVE AND GENERATOR DAMAGE POINT. GENERATORS LARGER THAN 1250 KW SHALL HAVE A THERMAL DAMAGE CURVE. 11. THE LARGEST FEEDER CIRCUIT BREAKER IN EACH MOTOR CONTROL CENTER AND APPLICABLE PAN ELBOARD. F. PROVIDE ADEQUATE TIME MARGINS BETWEEN DEVICE CHARACTERISTICS SUCH THAT SELECTIVE OPERATION IS PROVIDED, WHILE PROVIDING PROPER PROTECTION. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. SEE SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS, FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. B. INSPECT AND TEST IN ACCORDANCE WITH NETA ATS, EXCEPT SECTION 4. C. ADJUST EQUIPMENT AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR COMPLIANCE WITH STUDIES AND RECOMMENDED SETTINGS. D. NOTIFY ENGINEER OF ANY CONFLICTS WITH OR DEVIATIONS FROM STUDIES. OBTAIN DIRECTION BEFORE PROCEEDING. E. PROVIDE THE SERVICES OF A QUALIFIED FIELD ENGINEER AND NECESSARY TOOLS AND EQUIPMENTTO TEST, CALIBRATE, AND ADJUST THE INSTALLED PROTECTIVE DEVICES TO CONFORM TO REQUIREMENTS DETERMINED BY THE COORDINATION ANALYSIS. F. ADJUST INSTALLED PROTECTIVE DEVICES HAVING ADJUSTABLE SETTINGS TO CONFORM TO REQUIREMENTS DETERMINED BY THE COORDINATION ANALYSIS. G. ADJUST SOLID-STATE PROTECTIVE MODULES FOR MOTORS PRIOR TO APPLYING LOAD TO MOTOR. H. SUBMIT REPORT SHOWING FINAL ADJUSTED SETTINGS OF ALL PROTECTIVE DEVICES. 3.02 FIELD ADJUSTMENT A. ADJUST RELAY AND PROTECTIVE DEVICE SETTINGS ACCORDING TO THE RECOMMENDED SETTINGS TABLE PROVIDED BY THE COORDINATION STUDY. FIELD ADJUSTMENTS TO BE COMPLETED BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IN CONJUNCTION WITH POWER SYSTEMS ANALYSIS ENGINEER. B. MAKE MINOR MODIFICATIONS TO EQUIPMENT AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE FOR CONFORMANCE WITH SHORT CIRCUIT AND PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDIES. C. NOTIFY OWNER IN WRITING OF ANY REQUIRED MAJOR EQUIPMENT MODIFICATIONS. END OF SECTION SECTION 263213 ENGINE GENERATORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01SECTION INCLUDES A. THIS SECTION DEFINES REQUIREMENTS FOR AN EMERGENCY ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM. PROVIDE SYSTEM COMPLETE FOR AUTOMATIC, UNATTENDED OPERATION FOR THE DURATION OF ANY LOSS OF NORMAL UTILITY POWER AS DEFINED HEREIN. INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING FEATURES AND ACCESSORIES WITH THE SYSTEM: 1. ENGINE AND ENGINE ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT. 2. ALTERNATOR (GENERATOR). 3. GENERATOR SET CONTROL SYSTEM. 4. GENERATOR SET ENCLOSURE. 5. BATTERY CHARGER. 6. REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR. 7. BASE MOUNTED FUEL TANK. 8. SILENCER. 1.02RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS OF THE CONTRACT, INCLUDING GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 01 SPECIFICATION SECTIONS, APPLY TO THIS SECTION. B. SECTION 033000 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE: CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PADS. C. SECTION 26 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULT FOR ELECTRICAL. D. SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. E. SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. F. SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS AND REQUIREMENTS. G. SECTION 263600 - TRANSFER SWITCHES. 1.03REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 STANDARD FOR GOOD WORKMANSHIP IN ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION; 2010. B. NECA/EGSA 404 - STANDARD FOR INSTALLING GENERATOR SETS; 2014. C. NEMA MG 1- MOTORS AND GENERATORS; 2014. D. NFPA 30 - FLAMMABLE AND COMBUSTIBLE LIQUIDS CODE; 2015. E. NFPA 37 - STANDARD FOR THE INSTALLATION AND USE OF STATIONARY COMBUSTION ENGINES AND GAS TURBINES; 2015. F. NFPA 70 - NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE; MOST RECENT EDITION ADOPTED BY AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION, INCLUDING ALL APPLICABLE AMENDMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTS. G. NFPA 99 - HEALTH CARE FACILITIES CODE; 2015. H. NFPA 110 - STANDARD FOR EMERGENCY AND STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS; 2013. I. UL 1236 - BATTERY CHARGERS FOR CHARGING ENGINE -STARTER BATTERIES; CURRENT EDITION, INCLUDING ALL REVISIONS. J. UL 2200 - STATIONARY ENGINE GENERATOR ASSEMBLIES; CURRENT EDITION, INCLUDING ALL REVISIONS. 1.04ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. COORDINATION: 1. COORDINATE COMPATIBILITY OF GENERATOR SET TO BE INSTALLED WITH WORK PROVIDED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS OR BY OTHERS. A. TRANSFER SWITCHES: SEE SECTION 263600. 2. COORDINATE THE WORK WITH OTHER TRADES TO AVOID PLACEMENT OF DUCTWORK, PIPING, EQUIPMENT OR OTHER POTENTIAL OBSTRUCTIONS WITHIN THE SPACES DEDICATED FOR ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM. 3. COORDINATE ARRANGEMENT OF EQUIPMENT WITH THE DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THE ACTUAL EQUIPMENT TO BE INSTALLED. 4. COORDINATE THE WORK TO PROVIDE ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS SUITABLE FOR THE POWER REQUIREMENTS OF THE ACTUAL AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES TO BE INSTALLED. 5. NOTIFY ENGINEER OF ANY CONFLICTS WITH OR DEVIATIONS FROM THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. OBTAIN DIRECTION BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH WORK. B. PREINSTALLATION MEETING: CONVENE ONE WEEK BEFORE STARTING WORK OF THIS SECTION; REQUIRE ATTENDANCE OF ALL AFFECTED INSTALLERS. 1.05SUBMITTALS A. PRODUCT DATA: PROVIDE MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD CATALOG PAGES AND DATA SHEETS FOR EACH PRODUCT, INCLUDING RATINGS, CONFIGURATIONS, DIMENSIONS, FINISHES, WEIGHTS, SERVICE CONDITION REQUIREMENTS, AND INSTALLED FEATURES. INCLUDE ALTERNATOR STARTING CAPABILITIES, ENGINE FUEL CONSUMPTION RATES, AND COOLING, COMBUSTION AIR, AND EXHAUST REQUIREMENTS. 1. INCLUDE GENERATOR SET SOUND LEVEL TEST DATA. 2. INCLUDE CHARACTERISTIC TRIP CURVES FOR OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES. 3. INCLUDE ALTERNATOR THERMAL DAMAGE CURVE. 4. SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENT CAPACITY AND SUBTRANSIENT REACTANCE. 5. TIME -CURRENT CHARACTERISTIC CURVES FOR GENERATOR PROTECTIVE DEVICE 6. THERMAL DAMAGE & DECREMENT CURVES, POSITIVE, NEGATIVE, & ZERO SEQUENCE IMPEDANCES, SUB -TRANSIENT & TRANSIENT REACTANCE X/R RATIO AND TIME CONSTRAIN TS NTS B. WIRING DIAGRAMS OF ALL POWER, SIGNAL AND CONTROL WIRING INDICATING FACTORY AND FIELD WIRING. C. SHOP DRAWINGS: INCLUDE DIMENSIONED PLAN VIEWS AND SECTIONS INDICATING LOCATIONS OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS, REQUIRED CLEARANCES, AND FIELD CONNECTION LOCATIONS. INCLUDE SYSTEM INTERCONNECTION SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS SHOWING ALL FACTORY AND FIELD CONNECTIONS. D. DERATING CALCULATIONS: INDICATE RATINGS ADJUSTED FOR APPLICABLE SERVICE CONDITIONS. E. SPECIMEN WARRANTY: SUBMIT SAMPLE OF MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY. F. EVIDENCE OF QUALIFICATIONS FOR INSTALLER. G. EVIDENCE OF QUALIFICATIONS FOR MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR (IF DIFFERENT ENTITY FROM INSTALLER). H. MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS: INDICATE APPLICATION CONDITIONS AND LIMITATIONS OF USE STIPULATED BY PRODUCT TESTING AGENCY. INCLUDE INSTRUCTIONS FOR STORAGE, HANDLING, PROTECTION, EXAMINATION, PREPARATION, INSTALLATION, AND OPERATION OF PRODUCT. 1. MANUFACTURER'S FACTORY EMISSIONS CERTIFICATION. J. MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION THAT PRODUCT E S MEET EXCEED SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS. K. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL TEST REPORTS. L. PROVIDE NFPA 110 REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION FROM MANUFACTURER WHERE REQUESTED BY AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO: 1. CERTIFIED PROTOTYPE TESTS. 2. TORSIONAL VIBRATION COMPATIBILITY CERTIFICATION. 3. NFPA 110 COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATION. 4. CERTIFIED RATED LOAD TEST AT RATED POWER FACTOR. M. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL TEST REPORTS. N. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA: INCLUDE DETAILED INFORMATION ON SYSTEM OPERATION, EQUIPMENT PROGRAMMING AND SETUP, REPLACEMENT PARTS, AND RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES AND INTERVALS. 1. INCLUDE CONTACT INFORMATION FOR ENTITY THAT WILL BE PROVIDING CONTRACT MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLE CALL-BACK SERVICE. O. EXECUTED WARRANTY: SUBMIT DOCUMENTATION OF FINAL EXECUTED WARRANTY COMPLETED IN OWNER'S NAME AND REGISTERED WITH MANUFACTURER. P. MAINTENANCE CONTRACTS. Q. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS: RECORD ACTUAL LOCATIONS OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS, INSTALLED CIRCUITING ARRANGEMENTS AND ROUTING, AND FINAL EQUIPMENT SETTINGS. R. MAINTENANCE MATERIALS: FURNISH THE FOLLOWING FOR OWNER'S USE IN MAINTENANCE OF PROJECT. 1. EXTRA FUSES: ONE OF EACH TYPE AND SIZE. 2. EXTRA FILTER ELEMENTS: ONE OF EACH TYPE, INCLUDING FUEL, OIL AND AIR. 1.06QUALITY ASSURANCE A. COMPLY WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1. NFPA 70 (NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE). 2. NFPA 110 (STANDARD FOR EMERGENCY AND STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS); MEET REQUIREMENTS FOR LEVEL 1 SYSTEM. 3. NFPA 99 (HEALTH CARE FACILITIES CODE). 4. NFPA 37 (STANDARD FOR THE INSTALLATION AND USE OF STATIONARY COMBUSTION ENGINES AND GAS TURBINES). 5. NFPA 30 (FLAMMABLE AND COMBUSTIBLE LIQUIDS CODE). B. MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS: COMPANY SPECIALIZING IN MANUFACTURING THE PRODUCTS SPECIFIED IN THIS SECTION WITH MINIMUM 10 YEARS DOCUMENTED EXPERIENCE. 1. AUTHORIZED SERVICE FACILITIES LOCATED WITHIN 200 MILES OF PROJECT SITE. C. ENGINE -GENERATORS SHALL BE COMPLETELY FACTORY ASSEMBLED AND TESTED. THE ENGINE -GENERATOR SET SHALL BE THE PRODUCT OF A SINGLE MANUFACTURER. D. MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE OF ISO 9002 COMPLIANCE E. INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS: COMPANY SPECIALIZING IN PERFORMING THE WORK OF THIS SECTION WITH MINIMUM THREE YEARS DOCUMENTED EXPERIENCE WITH ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEMS OF SIMILAR SIZE, TYPE, AND COMPLEXITY; MANUFACTURER'S AUTHORIZED INSTALLER. F. MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS: SAME ENTITY AS INSTALLER OR DIFFERENT ENTITY WITH SPECIFIED QUALIFICATIONS. 1. CONTRACT MAINTENANCE OFFICE LOCATED WITHIN 200 MILES OF PROJECT SITE. G. PRODUCTS: LISTED, CLASSIFIED, AND LABELED BY UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES INC. (UL) OR TESTING FIRM ACCEPTABLE TO AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION AS SUITABLE FOR THE PURPOSE INDICATED. 1.07DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. RECEIVE, INSPECT, HANDLE, AND STORE GENERATOR SETS IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS AND NECA/EGSA 404 . B. DELIVER TO THE DESIGNATED JOB SITE AND UNLOAD ON THE DESIGNATED CONCRETE PAD. C. STORE IN A CLEAN, DRY SPACE. MAINTAIN FACTORY WRAPPING OR PROVIDE AN ADDITIONAL HEAVY CANVAS OR HEAVY PLASTIC COVER TO PROTECT UNITS FROM DIRT, WATER, CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS, AND TRAFFIC. D. HANDLE CAREFULLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS TO AVOID DAMAGE TO GENERATOR SET COMPONENTS, ENCLOSURE, AND FINISH. E. PROVIDE PROPER AND ADEQUATE PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION TO PROTECT ALL COMPONENTS FROM DUST, MOISTURE, AND PHYSICAL DAMAGE. 1.08REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. IN ACCORDANCE WITH INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE, MANUFACTURER SHALL TEST OR ANALYZE THE ENGINE -GENERATOR COMPONENTS AND ITS MOUNTING SYSTEM OR ANCHORAGE AND SUBMIT A CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE FOR REVIEW AND ACCEPTANCE BY ENGINEER AND BY THE BUILDING OFFICIAL. QUALIFICATION SHALL BE BY AN ACTUAL TEST ON A SHAKE TABLE, BY THREE-DIMENSIONAL SHOCK TESTS, BY AN ANALYTICAL METHOD USING DYNAMIC CHARACTERISTICS AND FORCES, BY THE USE OF EXPERIENCE DATA OR BY A MORE RIGOROUS ANALYSIS PROVIDING FOR EQUIVALENT SAFETY. REFER THE IBC AND ASCE 7-05 FOR COMPLETE REQUIREMENTS. B. LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND EQUIPMENT SHALL BE LISTED BY UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES IN ACCORDANCE WITH STANDARDS LISTED IN ARTICLE 1.04 OF THIS SPECIFICATION AND SHALL BEAR THE UL LABEL. 1.09FIELD CONDITIONS A. MAINTAIN FIELD CONDITIONS WITHIN MANUFACTURER'S REQUIRED SERVICE CONDITIONS DURING AND AFTER INSTALLATION. B. JOB CONDITIONS SHALL CONFORM TO THE ARRANGEMENTS AND DETAILS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. THE DIMENSIONS, ENCLOSURES, AND ARRANGEMENTS OF THE ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM SHALL PERMIT THE OPERATING PERSONNELTO SAFELY AND CONVENIENTLY OPERATE AND MAINTAIN THE SYSTEM IN THE SPACE DESIGNATED FOR INSTALLATION. C. INTERRUPTION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL SERVICE: DO NOT INTERRUPT ELECTRICAL SERVICE TO FACILITIES OCCUPIED BY OWNER OR OTHERS UNLESS PERMITTED UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS AND THEN ONLY AFTER ARRANGING TO PROVIDE TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SERVICE ACCORDING TO REQUIREMENTS INDICATED: 1. NOTIFY CONSTRUCTION MANAGER NO FEWER THAN TWO DAYS IN ADVANCE OF PROPOSED INTERRUPTION OF ELECTRICAL SERVICE. 2. DO NOT PROCEED WITH INTERRUPTION OF ELECTRICAL SERVICE WITHOUT ARCHITECT'S WRITTEN PERMISSION. D. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: ENGINE -GENERATOR SYSTEM SHALL WITHSTAND THE FOLLOWING ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS WITHOUT MECHANICAL OR ELECTRICAL DAMAGE OR DEGRADATION OF PERFORMANCE CAPABILITY: 1. AMBIENT TEMPERATURE: 5 TO 40 DEG C. 2. RELATIVE HUMIDITY: 0 TO 95 PERCENT. 3. ALTITUDE: SEA LEVEL TO 1000 FEET. 1.1000ORDINATION A. COORDINATE SIZE AND LOCATION OF CONCRETE BASES. CAST ANCHOR -BOLT INSERTS INTO BASES. CONCRETE REINF ORCEMENT, AND FORMWORK REQUIREMENTS ARE SPECIFIED IN DIVISION N 03. 1.11WARRANTY A. GENERAL WARRANTY 1. PROVIDE WRITTEN WARRANTY EXECUTED BY MANUFACTURER, AGREEING TO REPAIR OR REPLACE THE ENGINE, GENERATOR, AND ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS THAT FAIL IN MATERIALS OR WORKMANSHIP FOR A PERIOD OF ONE YEAR FROM DATE OF OWNER'S ACCEPTANCE OF EQUIPMENT. B. SPECIAL WARRANTY 1. PROVIDE WRITTEN WARRANTY EXECUTED BY MANUFACTURER, AGREEING TO REPAIR OR REPLACE THE ENGINE, GENERATOR, AND ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS THAT FAIL IN MATERIALS OR WORKMANSHIP FOR A PERIOD OF FIVE (5) YEARS C. PROVIDE MINIMUM ONE YEAR MANUFACTURER WARRANTY COVERING REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT DUE TO DEFECTIVE MATERIALS OR WORKMANSHIP. 1.12MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. AFTER ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER, BEGIN A 12 MONTH FULL SERVICE MAINTENANCE CONTRACT. PROVIDE A MINIMUM OF QUARTERLY EXERCISING TO CHECK FOR PROPER STARTING, LOAD PICK UP, LOAD SHEDDING, RUNNING UNDER LOAD. PERFORM ROUTINE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE AS RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER AND ADJUSTING AS REQUIRED FOR PROPER OPERATION. PROVIDE ALL PARTS AND SUPPLIES AS REQUIRED. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SET - BASIS OF DESIGN: KOHLER CO.. B. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SET- OTHER ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: 1. CATERPILLAR INC: WWW.CAT.COM/POWER-GENERATION. 2. CUMMINS POWER GENERATION INC: WWW.CUMMINSPOWER.COM. 3. GENERAC POWER SYSTEMS: WWW.GENERAC.COM/INDUSTRIAL. 4. KOHLER CO: WWW.KOHLERPOWER.COM. 5. POWERSECURE. WWW.POWERSECURE.COM. C. PRODUCTS OTHER THAN BASIS OF DESIGN ARE SUBJECT TO COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS AND PRIOR APPROVAL OF ENGINEER. BY USING PRODUCTS OTHER THAN BASIS OF DESIGN, CONTRACTOR ACCEPTS RESPONSIBILITY FOR COSTS ASSOCIATED WITH ANY NECESSARY MODIFICATIONS TO RELATED WORK, INCLUDING ANY DESIGN FEES. D. SOURCE LIMITATIONS: FURNISH ENGINE GENERATOR SETS AND ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES PRODUCED BY A SINGLE MANUFACTURER AND OBTAINED FROM A SINGLE SUPPLIER. 2.02 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM A. PROVIDE NEW ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM CONSISTING OF ALL REQUIRED EQUIPMENT, SENSORS, CONDUIT, BOXES, WIRING, PIPING, SUPPORTS, ACCESSORIES, SYSTEM PROGRAMMING, ETC. AS NECESSARY FOR A COMPLETE OPERATING SYSTEM THAT PROVIDES THE FUNCTIONAL INTENT INDICATED. B. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: 1. APPLICATION: EMERGENCY. 2. CLASSIFICATION: SUITABLE FOR USE ON A LEVEL 2, TYPE 60, CLASS 96 EPSS. 3. CONFIGURATION: SINGLE PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SET OPERATED INDEPENDENTLY (NOT IN PARALLEL). 4. TOTAL SYSTEM POWER RATING: 350 KW, EMERGENCY. C. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SET: 1. TYPE: NATURAL GAS. 2. VOLTAGE: 208Y/120 V, 3 PHASE, 60 HZ. 3. MAIN LINE CIRCUIT BREAKER: A. TYPE: ELECTRONIC TRIP WITH LONGTIME AND SHORT TIME DELAY AND INSTANTANEOUS PICKUP. B. TRIP RATING: AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. C. FEATURES: 1) SHUNTTRIP. 2) AUXILIARY CONTACTS. D. GENERATOR SET GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 1. PROTOTYPE TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 110 FOR LEVEL 2 SYSTEMS. 2. FACTORY -ASSEMBLED, WITH COMPONENTS MOUNTED ON SUITABLE BASE. 3. LIST AND LABEL ENGINE GENERATOR ASSEMBLY AS COMPLYING WITH UL 2200 . 4. POWER FACTOR: UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, SPECIFIED POWER RATINGS ARE AT 0.8 POWER FACTOR FOR THREE PHASE VOLTAGES AND 1.0 POWER FACTOR FOR SINGLE PHASE VOLTAGES. S. PROVIDE SUITABLE GUARDS TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM ACCIDENTAL CONTACT WITH ROTATING PARTS, HOT PIPING, AND OTHER POTENTIAL SOURCES OF INJURY. 6. MAIN LINE CIRCUIT BREAKERS: PROVIDE FACTORY -INSTALLED LINE SIDE CONNECTIONS WITH SUITABLE LUGS FOR LOAD SIDE CONNECTIONS. E. SERVICE CONDITIONS: PR OVIDE ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM AND ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS SUITABLE FOR OPERATION UNDER THE SERVICE CONDITIONS AT THE INSTALLED LOCATION. F. STARTING AND LOAD ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS: 1. CRANKING METHOD: CYCLE CRANKING COMPLYING WITH NFPA 110 (15 SECOND CRANK PERIOD, FOLLOWED BY 15 SECOND REST PERIOD, WITH CRANKING LIMITER TIME-OUT AFTER 3 CYCLES), UNLESS OTHERWISE REQUIRED. 2. CRANKING LIMITER TIME-OUT: IF GENERATOR SET FAILS TO START AFTER SPECIFIED CRANKING PERIOD, INDICATE OVERCRANK ALARM CONDITION AND LOCK -OUT GENERATOR SET FROM FURTHER CRANKING UNTIL MANUALLY RESET. 3. START TIME: CAPABLE OF STARTING AND ACHIEVING CONDITIONS NECESSARY FOR LOAD ACCEPTANCE WITHIN 60 SECONDS. 4. MAXIMUM LOAD STEP: SUPPORTS 100 PERCENT OF RATED LOAD IN ONE STEP. 5. MOTOR STARTING CAPABILITY: SUPPORTS STARTING OF MOTOR LOAD INDICATED WITH A MAXIMUM VOLTAGE DIP OF 10 PERCENT. G. EXHAUST EMISSIONS REQUIREMENTS: 1. COMPLY WITH FEDERAL (EPA), STATE, AND LOCAL REGULATIONS APPLICABLE AT THE TIME OF COMMISSIONING; INCLUDE FACTORY EMISSIONS CERTIFICATION WITH SUBMITTALS. 2. COMPLY WITH EPA "NEW SOURCE PERFORMANCE STANDARD" (NSPS) FOR STATIONARY RECIPROCATING COMPRESSION IGNITION ENGINES AS APPLIED BY STATE AND LOCAL AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION (AHJ). PROVIDE ENGINES WITH THE FOLLOWING LEVELS OF CERTIFICATION AS DEFINED BY NSPS UNLESS OTHERWISE REQUIRED BY AHJ: A. 350 KW GENERATOR SET 3. DO NOT MAKE MODIFICATIONS AFFECTING GENERATOR SET FACTORY EMISSIONS CERTIFICATION WITHOUT APPROVAL OF MANUFACTURER AND ENGINEER. WHERE SUCH MODIFICATIONS ARE MADE, PROVIDE FIELD EMISSIONS TESTING AS NECESSARY FOR CERTIFICATION. H. SOUND LEVEL REQUIREMENTS: 1. DO NOT EXCEED 78 DBA WHEN MEASURED AT 23 FEET FROM GENERATOR SET IN FREE FIELD (NO SOUND BARRIERS) WHILE OPERATING AT FULL LOAD; INCLUDE MANUFACTURER'S SOUND DATA WITH SUBMITTALS. 2. COMPLY WITH APPLICABLE NOISE LEVEL REGULATIONS. 2.03 ENGINE AND ENGINE ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT A. PROVIDE ENGINE WITH ADEQUATE HORSEPOWER TO ACHIEVE SPECIFIED POWER OUTPUT AT RATED SPEED, ACCOUNTING FOR ALTERNATOR EFFICIENCY AND PARASITIC LOADS. B. RATED ENGINE SPEED: 1800 RPM C. FOUR CYCLE ENGINE WITH MAXIMUM PISTON SPEED OF 2250 FPM D. ENGINE FUEL SYSTEM - NATURAL GAS: 0 O L O O 01 W O O Ln Zu= encnu Ln Ln m 2 Q N N 2 0 n r- -" W c O LL WW, r H a. z _z iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiIiI O (5 p z1% IL Lu W W. LL 0 Z m 2 0 i N a N 00 - M J t N n u o Z M M W M W t C a - > _O J 0) a LL N t i -o.- Z � qt M = C r' 3 Ln W C7 N N 2 d 00 - a� U iiiiiiiiiiiiiij iiiiiiiiiiiiiij 1111111111111111111 x >1111111 a W N W wN n O O ` 1 w Z O W aRe IMZ = M L1 V c1/ ca a ;W 00 LA. W 0 An W2 L a � L a z Q M N George Johnson, P.E. PE38680 ISSUE DATE: 10/19/2018 PROJECT NUMBER: 2847 REVISIONS: NO. DATE I DESCRIPTION ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS TO THE BEST OF THE ENGINEERS KNOWLEDGE, THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS COMPLY WITH THE APPLICABLE MINIMUM BUILDING CODES AND THE APPLICABLE FIRE -SAFETY STANDARDS AS DETERMINED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY IN ACCORDANCE WITH CHAPTER 553.79 AND CHAPTER 633, FLORIDA STATUTES. © 2018APG ENGINEERING E504 L! I H- 1 __ I I 1--- I - L -- - � � L Y 7 d au ..} > CO � co a Lu zo ]C u z w x z Dud E. ENGINE STARTING SYSTEM: 1. SYSTEM TYPE: ELECTRIC, WITH DC SOLENOID -ACTIVATED STARTING MOTOR(S). 2. STARTER MOTORS: DUAL HEAVY DUTY STARTER MOTORS CONNECTED IN PARALLEL, EACH CAPABLE OF CRANKING THE ENGINE FOR 45 SECONDS CONTINUOUS AND FOR 3 CYCLES FOR 75 SECONDS, (15 SECONDS CRANKING, 15 SECONDS AT REST.), WITH THE OTHER STARTER OUT OF SERVICE 3. BATTERY(S): A. BATTERY TYPE: LEAD -ACID. B. BATTERY CAPACITY: SIZE ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS FOR ACHIEVING STARTING AND LOAD ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS UNDER WORST CASE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE; CAPABLE OF PROVIDING CRANKING THROUGH TWO COMPLETE PERIODS OF CRANKING LIMITER TIME-OUTS WITHOUT RECHARGING. C. STARTING BATTERIES: PROVIDE BATTERIES CAPABLE OF STARTING UNIT IN TIME SPECIFIED UNDER INSTALLED CONDITIONS AND CAPABLE OF 45 SECONDS OF CONTINUOUS ENGINE CRANKING AND 3 SECONDS CRANKING, 15 SECONDS AT REST. INSTALL CRANKING CYCLES FOR 75 SECONDS 15 SE KING N V HEAVY-DUTY BATTERIES IN STEEL, INSULATED RACK(S). PROVIDE HEAVY DU LONG LIFE LEAD -ACID HIGH DISCHARGE RATE TYPE BATTERIES WITH PLASTIC CASE. ENGINE MANUFACTURER TO SIZE AND FURNISH BATTERY CABLES. D. EACH BATTERY CELL SHALL HAVE MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM ELECTROLYTE LEVEL INDICATORS AND A FLIP -TOP FLAME ARRESTOR VENT CAP. E. BATTERIES SHALL HAVE CONNECTOR COVERS FOR PROTECTION AGAINST EXTERNAL SHORT CIRCUITS. F. WITH THE CHARGER DISCONNECTED, THE BATTERIES SHALL HAVE SUFFICIENT CAPACITY SO THAT THE TOTAL SYSTEM VOLTAGE DOES NOT FALL BELOW 85% OF THE NOMINAL SYSTEM VOLTAGE WITH THE FOLLOWING DEMANDS: 1) FIVE CONSECUTIVE STARTING ATTEMPTS OF 10 SECONDS CRANKING AT 10 SECOND INTERVALS FOR A TOTAL OF 50 SECONDS OF ACTUAL CRANKING (THE FIFTH STARTING ATTEMPT WILL BE MANUALLY INITIATED UPON FAILURE OF A COMPLETE ENGINE CRANKING CYCLE). G. PROVIDE BATTERY RACK, CABLES, AND CONNECTORS SUITABLE FOR THE SUPPLIED BATTERY(S); SIZE BATTERY CABLES ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS FOR CABLE LENGTH TO BE INSTALLED. 4. BATTERY -CHARGING ALTERNATOR: ENGINE -DRIVEN, FACTORY MOUNTED ON ENGINE WITH SOLID-STATE VOLTAGE REGULATION AND 35-A MINIMUM CONTINUOUS RATING. 5. BATTERY CHARGER: CHARGER WITH AUTOMATIC FLOAT AND A. PROVIDE DUAL RATE BATTERY CHEQUALIZE CHARGING MODES AND E MINIMUM RATING OF 10 AMPS; SUITABLE FOR MAINTAINING THE SUPPLIED BATTER Y(S) S AT FULL CHARGE WITHOUT MANUAL INTERVENTION. B. CAPABLE OF RETURNING SUPPLIED BATTERY(S) FROM FULLY DISCHARGED TO FULLY CHARGED CONDITION WITHIN 24 HOURS, AS REQUIRED BY NFPA 110 FOR LEVEL 1 APPLICATIONS WHILE CARRYING NORMAL LOADS. C. AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION: ADJUST FLOAT AND EQUALIZE VOLTAGES FOR VARIATIONS IN AMBIENT TEMPERATURE FROM MINUS 40 DEG CTO PLUS 60 DEG CTO PREVENT OVERCHARGING AT HIGH TEMPERATURES AND UNDERCHARGING AT LOW TEMPERATURES. D. AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATION: MAINTAIN CONSTANT OUTPUT VO LTAGE REGARDLESS OF INPUT VOLTAGE VARIATIONS UP TO PLUS OR MINUS 10 PERCENT. E. RECOGNIZED AS COMPLYING WITH UL 1236 . F. FURNISHED WITH INTEGRAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION; CURRENT LIMITED TO PROTECT CHARGER DURING ENGINE CRANKING; REVERSE POLARITY PROTECTION. G. PROVIDE INTEGRAL DC OUTPUT AMMETER AND VOLTMETER WITH FIVE PERCENT ACCURACY. H. SAFETY FUNCTIONS: SENSE ABNORMALLY LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE AND CLOSE CONTACTS PROVIDING LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE INDICATION ON CONTROL AND MONITORING PANEL. SENSE HIGH BATTERY VOLTAGE AND LOSS OF AC INPUT OR DC OUTPUT OF BATTERY CHARGER. EITHER CONDITION SHALL CLOSE CONTACTS THAT PROVIDE A BATTERY -CHARGER MALFUNCTION INDICATION AT SYSTEM CONTROL AND MONITORING PANEL. 1. ENCLOSURE AND MOUNTING: NEMA 250, TYPE 1, WALL -MOUNTED CABINET. 6. BATTERY HEATER: PROVIDE THERMOSTATICALLY CONTROLLED BATTERY HEATER TO IMPROVE STARTING UNDER COLD AMBIENT CONDITIONS. F. ENGINE SPEED CONTROL SYSTEM (GOVERNOR): 1. SINGLE ENGINE GENERATOR SETS (NOT OPERATED IN PARALLEL): PROVIDE ELECTRONIC ISOCHRONOUS GOVERNOR FOR CONTROLLING ENGINE SPEED/ALTERNATOR FREQUENCY. 2. FREQUENCY REGULATION, ELECTRONIC ISOCHRONOUS GOVERNORS: NO CHANGE IN FREQUENCY FROM NO LOAD TO FULL LOAD; PLUS/MINUS 0.25 PERCENT AT STEADY STATE. G.' ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM: 1. SYSTEM TYPE: FULL PRESSURE, WITH ENGINE -DRIVEN, POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT LUBRICATION OIL PUMP, REPLACEABLE FULL -FLOW OIL FILTER(S), AND DIP -STICK FOR OIL LEVEL INDICATION. PROVIDE OIL COOLER WHERE RECOMMENDED BY MANUFACTURER. 2. FILTER & STRAINER: RATED TO REMOVE 90% OF PARTICLES, 5 MICROMETERS AND SMALLER WHILE PASSING FULL FUEL FLOW 3. THERMOSTATIC CONTROL VALVE: CONTROLS FLOW IN SYSTEM TO MAINTAIN OPTIMUM OIL TEMPERATURE. PROVIDE UNIT CAPABLE OF FULL FLOW, DESIGNED TO BE FAIL-SAFE 4. CRANKCASE DRAIN: ARRANGED FOR COMPLETE GRAVITY DRAINAGE TO AN EASY REMOVABLE CONTAINER WITHOUT ANY DISASSEMBLY AND WITHOUT USE OF PUMPS OR SIPHONS OR SPECIAL TOOLS H. ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM: 1. SYSTEM TYPE: CLOSED -LOOP, LIQUID -COOLED, WITH UNIT -MOUNTED RADIATOR/FAN AND ENGINE -DRIVEN COOLANT PUMP; SUITABLE FOR PROVIDING ADEQUATE COOLING WHILE OPERATING AT FULL LOAD UNDER WORST CASE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE. 2. FAN GUARD: PROVIDE SUITABLE GUARD TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM ACCIDENTAL CONTACT WITH FAN. 3. COOLANT HEATER: PROVIDE THERMOSTATICALLY CONTROLLED COOLANT HEATER TO IMPROVE STARTING UNDER COLD AMBIENT CONDITIONS; SIZE ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS FOR ACHIEVING STARTING AND LOAD ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS UNDER WORST CASE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE. 4. COOLANT: ANTI -FREEZE COOLANT, 50% ETHYLENE -GLYCOL AND 50% WATER MIXTURE, WITH ANTICORROSION ADDITIVES AS RECOMMENDED BY ENGINE MANUFACTURER, SUPPLIED BY THE CONTRACTOR AT START-UP. 5. EXPANSION TANK: CONSTRUCTED OF WELDED STEEL PLATE AND RATED TO WITHSTAND MAXIMUM E CLOSED LOOP COOLANT SYSTEM PRESSURE FOR ENGINE USED. QUIP WITH GAUGE GLASS AND PETCOCK. 6. FUEL OIL COOLER: EQUIP RADIATOR WITH A FACTORY INSTALLED, RADIATOR MOUNTED FUEL OIL COOLER SIZED PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATION. I. ENGINE AIR INTAKE AND EXHAUST SYSTEM: - ABLE DRY ELEMENT FILTER 1. AIR INTAKE FILTRATION: PROVIDE ENGINE MOUNTED, REPLACE , PRE -FILTER, AND A "BLOCKED FILTER INDICATOR.. 2. ENGINE EXHAUST CONNECTION: PROVIDE SUITABLE, APPROVED FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR FOR COUPLING ENGINE TO EXHAUST SYSTEM. 3. EXHAUST SILENCER: PROVIDE CRITICAL GRADE OR BETTER EXHAUST SILENCER WITH SOUND ATTENUATION NOT LESS THAN BASIS OF DESIGN; SELECT ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS TO MEET SOUND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS, WHERE SPECIFIED. 4. VERTICAL EXHAUST PIPING SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A HINGED, GRAVITY -OPERATED, SELF -CLOSING RAIN COVER. 5. SILENCER MOUNTING: EQUIP SILENCER WITH MOUNTING BRACKETS FOR HORIZONTAL MOUNTING FROM THE STRUCTURE ABOVE. 6. CONDENSATE DRAIN: INSTALL CONDENSATE TRAP AND PETCOCK DRAIN IN SILENCER AND CONNECT WITH SCHEDULE 40, BLACK STEEL PIPE. EXTEND DRAIN AND DRAIN PLUG BEYOND INSULATION TO FACILITATE DRAINING. 7. CONNECTION FROM ENGINE TO EXHAUST SYSTEM: INSTALL A STAINLESS STEEL, BELLOWS TYPE, FLEXIBLE SECTION OF A MINIMUM 36 INCHES BETWEEN THE EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THE EXHAUST SILENCER. 8. SYSTEM INSULATION: FULLY INSULATE EXHAUST SYSTEMS (UNDER DIVISION 23) THAT ARE INSTALLED INSIDE STRUCTURES. INSTALL SLEEVES FOR LINES PASSING THROUGH WALLS TO PASS THROUGH. 9. THE INSTALLED INSULATION SHALL BE COVERED WITH ALUMINUM JACKET 0.016 INCH THICK. THE JACKET IS TO BE HELD IN PLACE BY BANDS OF 0.015 INCH THICK BY 0.5 INCH WIDE ALUMINUM. 2.04 ALTERNATOR (GENERATOR) A. ALTERNATOR: 4-POLE, 1800 RPM (60 HZ OUTPUT) REVOLVING FIELD, SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR COMPLYING WITH NEMA MG 1; CONNECTED TO ENGINE WITH FLEXIBLE COUPLING; VOLTAGE OUTPUT CONFIGURATION AS INDICATED, WITH RECONNECTABLE LEADS FOR 3 PHASE ALTERNATORS. B. 3/4 TO 5/6 PITCH, FORM WOUND, SINGLE BEARING, BRUSHLESS TYPE, WITH SIX LEADS. TWO OR MORE GENERATORS THAT WILL BE PARALLELED SHALL HAVE IDENTICAL PITCH, IMPEDANCES, AND 3RD HARMONIC VOLTAGES. WHERE ONE OR MORE GENERATORS WILL BE PARALLELED WITH AN EXISTING GENERATOR(S), THE THE PITCH, IMPEDANCES, AND 3RD HARMONIC VOLTAGES WILL BE OPTIMIZED FOR BEST POSSIBLE PERFORMANCE. C. CONSTRUCTION SHALL PREVENT MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, AND THERMAL DAMAGE DUE TO VIBRATION, OVERSPEED UP TO 125 PERCENT OF RATING, AND HEAT DURING OPERATION AT 110 PERCENT OF RATED CAPACITY. D. EXCITER: 1. EXCITER TYPE: BRUSHLESS; PROVIDE PERMANENT MAGNET GENERATOR (PMG) EXCITATION SYSTEM; SELF-EXCITED (SHUNT) SYSTEMS ARE NOT PERMITTED. 2. PMG EXCITATION SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENT SUPPORT: CAPABLE OF SUSTAINING 300 PERCENT OF RATED OUTPUT CURRENT FOR 10 SECONDS. 3. VOLTAGE REGULATION (WITH PMG EXCITATION): PLUS/MINUS 0.5 PERCENT FOR ANY CONSTANT LOAD FROM NO LOAD TO FULL LOAD. 4. ROTATING RECTIFIER SHALL EMPLOY THREE PHASE SENSING. 5. VOLTAGE REGULATOR: STATIC TYPE WITH A VOLTAGE ADJUSTING RHEOSTAT FURNISHED IN THE CONTROL PANEL SHALL PROVIDE PLUS OR MINUS 5 PERCENT ADJUSTMENT OF OUTPUT -VOLTAGE OPERATING BAND. E. TEMPERATURE RISE: COMPLY WITH UL 2200. F. INSULATION SYSTEM: NEMA MG 1, CLASS F OR CLASS H; SUITABLE FOR ALTERNATOR TEMPERATURE RISE. G. ENCLOSURE: NEMA MG 1, DRIP -PROOF. H. TOTAL HARMONIC DISTORTION: NOT GREATER THAN FIVE PERCENT. I. ALTERNATOR HEATER: PROVIDE STRIP HEATER TO PREVENT MOISTURE CONDENSATION ON ALTERNATOR WINDINGS. J. STEADY-STATE VOLTAGE REGULATION: PLUS OR MINUS 1% FROM NO LOAD TO FULL LOAD WITH STEADY STATE MODULATION OF Yz%. K. TRANSIENT VOLTAGE REGULATION: NOT MORE THAN 25% VARIATION UPON APPLICATION OF FULL LOAD WITH RECOVERY TO STEADY SATE CONDITIONS WITHIN 3 SECONDS. L. STEADY-STATE FREQUENCY REGULATION: PLUS OR MINUS 1/2%. M. STEADY-STATE FREQUENCY CY STABILITY: WHEN SYSTEM IS OPERATING AT ANY CONSTANT LOAD WITHIN THE RATED LOAD, THERE SHALL BE NO RANDOM SPEED VARIATIONS OUTSIDE THE STEADY-STATE OPERATIONAL BAND AND NO HUNTING OR SURGING OF SPEED. N. TRANSIENT FREQUENCY REGULATION: NOT MORE THAN 2% VARIATION UPON APPLICATION OF FULL LOAD. O. OUTPUT WAVEFORM: AT NO LAD, O HARMONIC CONTENT MEASURED LINE TO NEUTRAL SHALL NOT EXCEED 2 PERCENT TOTAL WITH NO SLOT RIPPLE. TELEPHONE INFLUENCE FACTOR, DETERMINED ACCORDING TO NEMA MG 1, SHALL NOT EXCEED 50 PERCENT. P. SUSTAINED SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT: CAPABLE OF SUPPLYING A MINIMUM OF 300% OF RATED FULL LOAD CURRENT FOR A MINIMUM 10 SECONDS FOR A THREE-PHASE BOLTED SHORT CIRCUIT WITH AUTOMATIC CLEARING OF THE FAULT WITHOUT DAMAGE TO WINDING INSULATION OR OTHER GENERATOR SYSTEM COMPONENTS. Q. STARTTIME: CAPABLE OF REACHING OPERATING VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY WITHIN THE SHORTEST TIME PRACTICABLE AND WITHIN EIGHT (8) SECONDS. R. OVERSIZING GENERATOR COMPARED WITH THE RATED OUTPUT OF THE ENGINE IS PERMISSIBLE TO MEET SPECIFIED PERFORMANCE. SHOW RATINGS REQUIRED ON THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS RATHER THAN THE RATINGS THAT WOULD NORMALLY BE APPLIED TO THE GENERATOR SIZE ON THE NAMEPLATE DATA. 2.05 GENERATOR SET CONTROL SYSTEM A. PROVIDE MICROPROCESSOR -BASED CONTROL SYSTEM FOR AUTOMATIC CONTROL, MONITORING, AND PROTECTION OF GENERATOR SET. INCLUDE SENSORS, WIRING, AND CONNECTIONS NECESSARY FOR FUNCTIONS/INDICATIONS SPECIFIED. B. CONTROL PANEL: 1. CONTROL PANEL MOUNTING: UNIT -MOUNTED UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED; VIBRATION ISOLATED. 2. GENERATOR SET CONTROL FUNCTIONS: UPON RECEIVING CORRESPONDING TIC MODE: INITIATES GENERATOR SET START/SHUTDOWN A. AUTOMATIC SIGNAL FROM REMOTE DEVICE (E.G. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH). B. MANUAL MODE: INITIATES GENERATOR SET START SHUTDOWN UPON DI RECTION FROM OPERATOR. C. RESET MODE: CLEARS ALL FAULTS, ALLOWING GENERATOR SET RESTART AFTER A SHUTDOWN. D. EMERGENCY STOP: IMMEDIATELY SHUTS DOWN GENERATOR SET (WITHOUT TIME DELAY) AND PREVENTS AUTOMATIC RESTARTING UNTIL MANUALLY RESET. E. CYCLE CRANKING: PROGRAMMABLE CRANK TIME, REST TIME, AND NUMBER OF CYCLES. F. TIME DELAY: PROGRAMMABLE FOR SHUTDOWN (ENGINE COOLDOWN) AND START (ENGINE WARMUP). G. VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT: ADJUSTABLE THROUGH RANGE OF PLUS/MINUS 5 PERCENT. 3. GENERATOR SET STATUS INDICATIONS: A. VOLTAGE (VOLTS AQ LINE -TO -LINE, LINE -TO -NEUTRAL FOR EACH PHASE. B. CURRENT (AMPS): FOR EACH PHASE. C. FREQUENCY (HZ). D. REAL POWER (W/KW). E. REACTIVE POWER (VAR/KVAR). F. APPARENT POWER (VA/KVA). G. POWER FACTOR. H. DUTY LEVEL: ACTUAL LOAD AS PERCENTAGE OF RATED POWER. I. ENGINE SPEED (RPM). J. BATTERY VOLTAGE (VOLTS DC). K. ENGINE OIL PRESSURE. L. ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE. M. ENGINE RUN TIME. N. GENERATOR POWERING LOAD (POSITION SIGNAL FROM TRANSFER SWITCH). 4. GENERATOR SET PROTECTION AND WARNING/SHUTDOWN INDICATIONS: A. COMPLY WITH NFPA 110; CONFIGURABLE FOR NFPA 110 LEVEL 1, OR NFPA 99 SYSTEMS INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE FOLLOWING PROTECTIONS/INDICATIONS: 1) OVERCRANK (SHUTDOWN). 2) LOW COOLANT TEMPERATURE (WARNING). 3) HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE (WARNING). 4) HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE (SHUTDOWN). 5) LOW OIL PRESSURE (WARNING). 6) LOW OIL PRESSURE (SHUTDOWN). 7) OVERSPEED (SHUTDOWN). 8) LOW FUEL LEVEL (WARNING). 9) LOW COOLANT LEVEL (WARNING/SHUTDOWN). 10) GENERATOR CONTROL NOT IN AUTOMATIC MODE (WARNING). 11) HIGH BATTERY VOLTAGE (WARNING). 12) LOW CRANKING VOLTAGE (WARNING). 13) LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE (WARNING). 14) BATTERY CHARGER FAILURE (WARNING). 15) COMMON ALARM 16) SILENCE SWITCH B. IN ADDITION TO NFPA 110 REQUIREMENTS, PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING PROTECTIONS/INDICATIONS: 1) HIGH AC VOLTAGE (SHUTDOWN). 2) LOW AC VOLTAGE (SHUTDOWN). 3) HIGH FREQUENCY (SHUTDOWN). 4) LOW FREQUENCY (SHUTDOWN). 5) OVERCURRENT (SHUTDOWN). 6) FUEL TANK LEAK (WARNING), WHERE APPLICABLE. C. PROVIDE CONTACTS FOR LOCAL AND REMOTE COMMON ALARM. D. PROVIDE LAMP TEST FUNCTION THAT ILLUMINATES ALL INDICATOR LAMPS. S. OTHER CONTROL PANEL FEATURES: A. EVENT LOG. B. SILENCE SWITCH. C. REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR: 1. REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR MOUNTING: WALL -MOUNTED; PROVIDE FLUSH -MOUNTED OR SURFACE -MOUNTED ANNUNCIATOR AS INDICATED. 2. INCLUDE CONTROL WIRING BETWEEN THE REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL AND THE ENGINE GENERATOR. WIRING SHALL BE AS REQUIRED BY THE MANUFACTURER. 3. GENERA TOR SET STATUS INDICATIONS: A. GENERATOR POWERING LOAD (VIA POSITION SIGNAL FROM TRANSFER SWITCH). B. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONAL. 4. GENERATOR SET WARNING/SHUTDOWN INDICATIONS: A. COMPLY WITH NFPA 110 FOR LEVEL 1 SYSTEMS INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE FOLLOWING INDICATIONS: 1) OVERCRANK (SHUTDOWN). 2) LOW COOLANT TEMPERATURE (WARNING). 3) HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE (WARNING). 4) HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE (SHUTDOWN). 5) LOW OIL PRESSURE (WARNING). 6) LOW OIL PRESSURE (SHUTDOWN). 7) OVERSPEED (SHUTDOWN). 8) LOW FUEL LEVEL (WARNING). 9) LOW COOLANT LEVEL (WARNING/SHUTDOWN). 10) HIGH BATTERY VOLTAGE (WARNING). 11) LOW CRANKING VOLTAGE (WARNING). 12) LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE (WARNING). 13) BATTERY CHARGER FAILURE (WARNING). 14) COMMON ALARM. 15) PROVIDE AUDIBLE ALARM WITH SILENCE FUNCTION. 16) PROVIDE LAMP TEST FUNCTION THAT ILLUMINATES ALL INDICATOR LAMPS. D. REMOTE EMERGENCY STOP: PROVIDE APPROVED RED, MUSHROOM STYLE REMOTE EMERGENCY STOP BUTTON WITH A BREAKABLE GLASS ENCLOSURE WHERE INDICATED OR REQUIRED BY AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION. 2.06 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION A. GENERATOR CIRCUIT BREAKER: MOLDED -CASE, ELECTRONIC -TRIP TYPE; 100 PERCENT RATED; COMPLYING WITH UL489. 1. TRIPPING CHARACTERISTICS: ADJUSTABLE LONG-TIME AND SHORT -TIME DELAY AND INSTANTANEOUS. 2. TRIP SETTINGS: SELECTED TO COORDINATE WITH GENERATOR THERMAL DAMAGE CURVE. 3. SHUNT TRIP: CONNECTED TO TRIP BREAKER WHEN GENERATOR SET IS SHUT DOWN BY OTHER PROTECTIVE DEVICES. 4. MOUNTING: ADJACENT TO OR INTEGRATED WITH CONTROL AND MONITORING PANEL. B. GENERATOR PROTECTOR: MICROPROCESSOR -BASED UNIT SHALL CONTINUOUSLY MONITOR CURRENT LEVEL IN EACH PHASE OF GENERATOR OUTPUT, INTEGRATE GENERATOR HEATING EFFECT OVER TIME, AND PREDICT WHEN THERMAL DAMAGE OF ALTERNATOR WILL OCCUR. WHEN SIGNALED BY GENERATOR PROTECTOR OR OTHER GENERATOR -SET PROTECTIVE DEVICES, A SHUNT -TRIP DEVICE IN THE GENERATOR DISCONNECT SWITCH SHALL OPEN THE SWITCH TO DISCONNECT THE GENERATOR FROM LOAD CIRCUITS. PROTECTOR SHALL PERFORM THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS: 1. INITIATES A GENERATOR OVERLOAD ALARM WHEN GENERATOR HAS OPERATED AT AN OVERLOAD EQUIVALENT TO 110 PERCENT OF FULL -RATED LOAD FOR 60 SECONDS. INDICATION FOR THIS ALARM IS INTEGRATED WITH OTHER GENERATOR -SET MALFUNCTION ALARMS. 2. UNDER SINGLE OR THREE-PHASE FAULT CONDITIONS, REGULATES GENERATOR TO 300 PERCENT OF RATED FULL -LOAD CURRENT FOR UP TO 10 SECONDS. T APPROACHES THE THERMAL DAMAGE 3. AS OVERCURRENT HEATING EFFECT ON THE GENERATOR POINT OF THE UNIT, PROTECTOR SWITCHES THE EXCITATION SYSTEM OFF, OPENS THE GENERATOR DISCONNECT DEVICE, AND SHUTS DOWN THE GENERATOR SET. 4. SENSES CLEARING OF A FAULT BY OTHER OVERCURRENT DEVICES AND CONTROLS RECOVERY OF RATED VOLTAGE TO AVOID OVERSHOOT. 2.07 GENERATOR SET ENCLOSURE A. ENCLOSURE TYPE: LEVEL 2, SOUND ATTENUATING, WEATHER PROTECTIVE. B. ENCLOSURE MATERIAL: ALUMINUM. C. HARDWARE MATERIAL: STAINLESS STEEL. D. COLOR: MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD. E. ACCESS DOORS: LOCKABLE, WITH ALL LOCKS KEYED ALIKE. F. OPENINGS: DESIGNED TO PREVENT BIRD/RODENT ENTRY. G. EXTERNAL DRAINS: EXTEND OIL AND COOLANT DRAIN LINES TO EXTERIOR OF ENCLOSURE FOR MAINTENANCE SERVICE. H. ENCLOSURE SHALL BE SUITABLE FOR WINDS UP TO 150 MILES PER HOUR ROOF LOAD SHALL BE EQUAL TO OR GREATER THAN 40 POUNDS PER SQUARE FOOT NON -DISTRIBUTED LOADING AS REQUIRED. 1. SOUND ATTENUATING ENCLOSURES: LINE ENCLOSURE WITH NON-HYDROSCOPIC, SELF -EXTINGUISHING SOUND -ATTENUATING MATERIAL. MAXIMUM 85 DBA AT 5 FEET FROM ANY SIDE, TOP AND BOTTOM TO NO MORE THAN 78 DBA WHEN MEASURED AT 23 FEET HORIZONTALLY FROM ANY PART OF THE ENCLOSURE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON PLANS. SOUND RATINGS SHALL BE BASED ON FULL LOAD CONDITION OF ENGINE GENERATOR IN A SINGLE UNIT OPERATION CONDITION. J. THE ENCLOSURE SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A FACTORY -INSTALLED AND FACTORY -WIRED PANELBOARD OR EQUIVALENT, 20A 120V RECEPTACLES FOR MAINTENANCE, AND COMPACT FLUORESCENT VAPORPROOF-TYPE FIXTURES WITH GUARDS AND SWITCHES. PROVIDE LIGHTING FIXTURES FOR TASK ILLUMINATION, BATTERY -POWERED LIGHTING UNITS (MINIMUM 2). K. UTILIZE AN UPWARD DISCHARGING RADIATOR HOOD. L. EXHAUST SILENCERS: WHERE EXHAUST SILENCERS ARE MOUNTED WITHIN ENCLOSURE IN MAIN ENGINE COMPARTMENT, INSULATE SILENCER TO MINIMIZE HEAT DISSIPATION AS NECESSARY FOR OPERATION AT RATED LOAD UNDER WORST CASE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE. 2.08 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES A. ELASTOMERIC ISOLATOR PADS: OIL- AND WATER-RESISTANT ELASTOMER OR NATURAL RUBBER, ARRANGED IN SINGLE OR MULTIPLE LAYERS, MOLDED WITH A NONSLIP PATTERN AND GALVANIZED -STEEL BASEPLATES OF SUFFICIENT STIFFNESS FOR UNIFORM LOADING OVER PAD AREA, AND FACTORY CUT TO SIZES THAT MATCH REQUIREMENTS OF SUPPORTED EQUIPMENT. 1. MATERIAL: STANDARD NEOPRENE. 2. DUROMETER RATING: 30. 3. NUMBER OF LAYERS: ONE. B. RESTRAINED SPRING ISOLATORS: FREESTANDING STEEL OPEN -SPRING ISOLATORS WITH SEISMIC RESTRAINT. 1. HOUSING: STEEL WITH RESILIENT VERTICAL -LIMIT STOPS TO PREVENT SPRING EXTENSION DUE TO WIND LOADS OR IF WEIGHT IS REMOVED; FACTORY -DRILLED BASEPLATE BONDED TO 1/4-INCH THICK, ELASTOMERIC ISOLATOR PAD ATTACHED TO BASEPLATE UNDERSIDE; AND ADJUSTABLE EQUIPMENT MOUNTING AND LEVELING BOLT THAT ACTS AS BLOCKING DURING INSTALLATION. 2. OUTSIDE SPRING DIAMETER: NOT LESS THAN 80 PERCENT OF COMPRESSED HEIGHT OF THE SPRING AT RATED LOAD. 3. MINIMUM ADDITIONAL TRAVEL: 50 PERCENT OF REQUIRED DEFLECTION AT RATED LOAD. 4. LATERAL STIFFNESS: MORE THAN 80 PERCENT OF RATED VERTICAL STIFFNESS. S. OVERLOAD CAPACITY: SUPPORT 200 PERCENT OF RATED LOAD, FULLY COMPRESSED, WITHOUT DEFORMATION OR FAILURE. 2.09 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. SEE SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS, FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. B. PERFORM PRODUCTION TESTS ON GENERATOR SETS AT FACTORY TO VERIFY OPERATION AND PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS PRIOR TO SHIPMENT. INCLUDE CERTIFIED TEST REPORT WITH SUBMITTALS. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. VERIFY THAT FIELD MEASUREMENTS ARE AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. B. VERIFY THAT THE RATINGS AND CONFIGURATIONS OF GENERATOR SETS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT ARE CONSISTENT WITH THE INDICATED REQUIREMENTS. C. VERIFY THAT ROUGH -INS FOR FIELD CONNECTIONS ARE IN THE PROPER LOCATIONS. D. VERIFY THAT MOUNTING SURFACES ARE READY TO RECEIVE EQUIPMENT. E. VERIFY THAT CONDITIONS ARE SATISFACTORY FOR INSTALLATION PRIOR TO STARTING WORK. F. PROCEED WITH INSTALLATION ONLY AFTER UNSATISFACTORY CONDITIONS HAVE BEEN CORRECTED. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. PERFORM WORK IN A NEAT AND WORKMANLIKE MANNER IN ACCORDANCE WITH NECA 1 . B. INSTALL PRODUCTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. C. INSTALL GENERATOR SETS AND ASSOCIATED ACCESSORIES IN ACCORDANCE WITH NECA/EGSA 404 D. ARRANGE EQUIPMENT TO PROVIDE MINIMUM CLEARANCES AND REQUIRED MAINTENANCE ACCESS. E. INSTALL PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR TO PROVIDE ACCESS WITHOUT REMOVING CONNECTIONS OR ACCESSORIES FOR PERIODIC MAINTENANCE. F. ALL CONNECTIONS BETWEEN THE ENGINE GENERATOR AND EXTERIOR SYSTEMS, SUCH AS FUEL LINES, ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS, AND ENGINE EXHAUST SYSTEM AND AIR EXHAUST SHROUD, SHALL BE FLEXIBLE. G. PROVIDE REQUIRED SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 260529. H. USE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED OIL AND COOLANT, SUITABLE FOR THE WORST CASE AMBIENT TEMPERATURES. I. PROVIDE ENGINE EXHAUST PIPING IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 235100 WHERE NOT FACTORY INSTALLED. 1. INCLUDE PIPING EXPANSION JOINTS, PIPING INSULATION, THIMBLE, CONDENSATION TRAP/DRAIN, RAIN CAP HANGERS SUPPORTS ETC. AS INDICATED OR AS REQUIRED. / Q 2. DO NOT EXCEED MANUFACTURER'S MAXIMUM BACK PRESSURE REQUIREMENTS. J. INSTALL EXHAUST SILENCER IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 235100, WHERE NOT FACTORY INSTALLED. K. ELECTRICAL WIRING: INSTALL ELECTRICAL DEVICES FURNISHED BY EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS BUT NOT SPECIFIED TO BE FACTORY MOUNTED. L. PROVIDE GROUNDING AND BONDING IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 260526. 1. GROUND THE ENGINE GENERATOR FRAME AND ENCLOSURE USING AN EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR SIZED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NEC. 2. NEUTRAL CONNECTION: SOLIDLY GROUNDED SYSTEM NEUTRAL. THE LOCATION OF THE NEUTRAL CONNECTION SHALL BE AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS M ENGAGE THE SERVICES OF A FACTORY TRAINED ENGINEER FOR PERIODIC JOBSITE VISITS DURING E INSTALLATION TO ENSURE THAT THE SYSTEM IS BEING INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. HAVE FACTORY ENGINEER COORDINATE WITH THE SWITCHGEAR FIELD ENGINEER TO ENSURE PROPER APPLICATION OF THE LOAD SHEDDING AND LOAD ADDING PROGRAM. N. IDENTIFY SYSTEM WIRING AND COMPONENTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 260553. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. ENGAGE A FACTORY -AUTHORIZED SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE TO PERFORM A COMPLETE OPERATIONAL SEQUENCE TEST AS DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER OR AS INCLUDED IN THE COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTS. COORDINATE THIS PERFORMANCE TEST WITH TESTING OF AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES. B. NOTIFY OWNER AND ENGINEER AT LEAST TWO WEEKS PRIOR TO SCHEDULED INSPECTIONS AND TESTS. C. NOTIFY AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION AND COMPLY WITH THEIR REQUIREMENTS FOR SCHEDULING INSPECTIONS AND TESTS AND FOR OBSERVATION BY THEIR PERSONNEL. D. PROVIDE ALL EQUIPMENT, TOOLS, AND SUPPLIES REQUIRED TO ACCOMPLISH INSPECTION AND TESTING, INCLUDING LOAD BANK AND FUEL. E. PRELIMINARY INSPECTION AND TESTING TO INCLUDE, AT A MINIMUM: 1. INSPECT EACH SYSTEM COMPONENT FOR DAMAGE AND DEFECTS. 2. VERIFY TIGHTNESS OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ARE ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED TORQUE SETTINGS. 3. CHECK FOR PROPER OIL AND COOLANT LEVELS. F. PREPARE AND START SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. G. FURNISH A RESISTANCE -TYPE LOAD FOR THE TESTING OF THE ENGINE GENERATOR. TEST LOADS SHALL ALWAYS INCLUDE ADEQUATE RESISTANCE TO ASSURE STABILITY OF THE LOADS AND EQUIPMENT DURING ALL OF THE TESTING OPERATIONS. THE TEST LOAD KW RATING SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 100% OF THE SPECIFIED KW RATING OF THE ENGINE GENERATOR. H. INSPECTION AND TESTING TO INCLUDE, AT A MINIMUM: 1. NFPA 110 ACCEPTANCE TESTS: PERFORM TESTS REQUIRED BY NFPA 110 THAT ARE ADDITIONAL TO THOSE SPECIFIED HERE INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO SINGLE-STEP 100% FULL -LOAD PICKUP TEST. 2. VERIFY COMPLIANCE WITH STARTING AND LOAD ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS. 3. VERIFY VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY; MAKE REQUIRED ADJUSTMENTS AS NECESSARY. 4. VERIFY PHASE SEQUENCE. 5. VERIFY CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION, INCLUDING SAFETY SHUTDOWNS. 6. VERIFY OPERATION OF AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES (E.G. BATTERY CHARGER, HEATERS, ETC.). 7. STARTING SYSTEM TEST: A. DEMONSTRATE THAT THE BATTERIES AND CRANKING MOTOR ARE CAPABLE OF FIVE STARTING ATTEMPTS OF 15 SECONDS CRANKING EACH AT 15-SECOND INTERVALS WITH THE BATTERY CHARGER TURNED OFF. 8. BATTERY TESTS: EQUALIZE CHARGING OF BATTERY CELLS ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS. RECORD INDIVIDUAL CELL VOLTAGES. A. MEASURE CHARGING VOLTAGE AND VOLTAGES BETWEEN AVAILABLE BATTERY TERMINALS FOR FULL -CHARGING AND FLOAT -CHARGING CONDITIONS. CHECK ELECTROLYTE LEVEL AND SPECIFIC GRAVITY UNDER BOTH CONDITIONS. B. TEST FOR CONTACT INTEGRITY OF ALL CONNECTORS. PERFORM AN INTEGRITY LOAD TEST AND A CAPACITY LOAD TEST FOR THE BATTERY. C. VERIFY ACCEPTANCE OF CHARGE FOR EACH ELEMENT OF THE BATTERY AFTER DISCHARGE. D. VERIFY THAT MEASUREMENTS ARE WITHIN MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS. 9. BATTERY -CHARGER TESTS: VERIFY SPECIFIED RATES OF CHARGE FOR BOTH EQUALIZING AND FLOAT -CHARGING CONDITIONS. 10. REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL TESTS: A. SIMULATE CONDITIONS TO VERIFY PROPER OPERATION OF EACH VISUAL OR AUDIBLE INDICATION, INTERCONNECTING HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE, AND RESET BUTTON. 11. VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY TRANSIENT STABILITY TESTS: USE RECORDING OSCILLOSCOPE TO MEASURE VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY TRANSIENTS FOR 50 AND 100 PERCENT STEP -LOAD INCREASES AND DECREASES, AND VERIFY THAT PERFORMANCE IS AS SPECIFIED. 12. HARMONIC -CONTENT TESTS: MEASURE HARMONIC CONTENT OF OUTPUT VOLTAGE UNDER 25 PERCENT AND AT 100 PERCENT OF RATED LINEAR LOAD. VERIFY THAT HARMONIC CONTENT IS WITHIN SPECIFIED LIMITS. 13. EXHAUST EMISSIONS TEST: COMPLY WITH APPLICABLE GOVERNMENT TEST CRITERIA. 14. NOISE LEVEL TESTS: MEASURE A -WEIGHTED LEVEL OF NOISE EMANATING FROM GENERATOR -SET INSTALLATION, INCLUDING ENGINE EXHAUST AND COOLING -AIR INTAKE AND DISCHARGE, AT FOUR DESIGNATED LOCATIONS, ON THE PROPERTY LINE, AND COMPARE MEASURED LEVELS WITH REQUIRED VALUES. 15. LEAK TEST: AFTER INSTALLATION, CHARGE SYSTEM AND TEST FOR LEAKS. REPAIR LEAKS AND RETEST UNTIL NO LEAKS EXIST. C AS BEEN ENERGIZED START UNITS TO CONFIRM 16. OPERATIONAL TEST: AFTER ELECTRICAL CIRCUITRY H PROPER MOTOR ROTATION AND UNIT OPERATION. 17. RETEST: CORRECT DEFICIENCIES IDENTIFIED BY TESTS AND OBSERVATIONS AND RETEST UNTIL SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS ARE MET. 18. PERFORM LOAD TESTS USING LOAD BANK AT 100 PERCENT FULL LOAD FOR MINIMUM OF 2. BUILDING LOAD MAY BE USED IF AVAILABLE AND APPROVED BY OWNER. 19. COORDINATE THIS PERFORMANCE TEST WITH TESTING OF PARALLELING SWITCHGEAR AND AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES. 20. DEMONSTRATE THAT THE ENGINE GENERATOR WILL ATTAIN PROPER VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY WITHIN THE SPECIFIED TIME LIMIT FROM A COLD START AFTER THE CLOSING OF A SINGLE CONTACT. 21. AUTOMATIC OPERATION TESTS: A. TEST THE ENGINE GENERATOR AND ASSOCIATED AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES TO DEMONSTRATE AUTOMATIC STARTING, LOADING AND UNLOADING. THE LOAD FOR THIS TEST SHALL BE THE ACTUAL CONNECTED LOADS. INITIATE LOSS OF NORMAL SOURCE AND VERIFY THE SPECIFIED SEQUENCE OF OPERATION. RESTORE THE NORMAL POWER SOURCE AND VERIFY THE SPECIFIED SEQUENCE OF OPERATION. VERIFY RESETTING OF CONTROLS TO NORMAL. I. FURNISH CERTIFICATIONS REQUIRED BY NFPA 110, PARAGRAPH 7.13.11. J. PROVIDE FIELD EMISSIONS TESTING WHERE NECESSARY FOR CERTIFICATION. K. SOUND LEVEL TESTS: MEASURE SOUND LEVELS FOR COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS. IDENTIFY AND REPORT AMBIENT NOISE CONDITIONS. L. CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK, ADJUST FOR PROPER OPERATION, AND RETEST UNTIL ENTIRE SYSTEM COMPLIES WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. M. SUBMIT DETAILED REPORTS INDICATING INSPECTION AND TESTING RESULTS AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS TAKEN. 1. RECORD THE FOLLOWING TEST DATA AT 30-MINUTE INTERVALS: A. TIME OF DAY, AS WELL AS READING OF RUNNING TIME INDICATOR. B. KW. C. VOLTAGE ON EACH PHASE. D. AMPERES ON EACH PHASE. E. ENGINE RPM. F. FREQUENCY. G. COOLANT WATER TEMPERATURE. H. FUEL PRESSURE. 1. OIL PRESSURE. J. OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE. K. AVERAGE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IN THE VICINITY OF THE ENGINE GENERATOR. N. INFRARED SCANNING: AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, BUT NOT MORE THAN 60 DAYS AFTER FINAL ACCEPTANCE, PERFORM AN INFRARED SCAN OF EACH POWER WIRING TERMINATION AND EACH BUS CONNECTION. REMOVE ALL ACCESS PANELS SO TERMINATIONS AND CONNECTIONS ARE ACCESSIBLE TO PORTABLE SCANNER. 1. FOLLOW-UP INFRARED SCANNING: PERFORM AN ADDITIONAL FOLLOW-UP INFRARED SCAN 11 MONTHS AFTER DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. 2. INSTRUMENT: USE AN INFRARED SCANNING DEVICE DESIGNED TO MEASURE TEMPERATURE OR TO DETECT SIGNIFICANT DEVIATIONS FROM NORMAL VALUES. PROVIDE CALIBRATION RECORD FOR DEVICE. 3. RECORD OF INFRARED SCANNING: PREPARE A CERTIFIED REPORT THAT IDENTIFIES TERMINATIONS AND CONNECTIONS CHECKED AND THAT DESCRIBES SCANNING RESULTS. INCLUDE NOTATION OF DEFICIENCIES DETECTED, REMEDIAL ACTION TAKEN, AND OBSERVATIONS AFTER REMEDIAL ACTION. 3.04 CLEANING A. CLEAN EXPOSED SURFACES TO REMOVE DIRT, PAINT, OR OTHER FOREIGN MATERIAL AND RESTORE TO MATCH ORIGINAL FACTORY FINISH. 3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. DEMONSTRATION: DEMONSTRATE PROPER OPERATION OF SYSTEM TO OWNER, AND CORRECT DEFICIENCIES OR MAKE ADJUSTMENTS AS DIRECTED. B. PROVIDE FIELD ENGINEER FOR 1 DAYS OF OWNER TRAINING ON THE SYSTEM OPERATION. SCHEDULE THE TRAINING ONE MONTH IN ADVANCE WITH OWNER. PREPARE AN AGENDA COMBINING CLASS TIME WITH HANDS ON DEMONSTRATIONS AND EXPERIENCE. SEND THE AGENDA TO THE OWNER PRIOR TO TRAINING FOR REVIEW. C. TRAINING: TRAIN OWNER'S PERSONNEL ON OPERATION, ADJUSTMENT, AND MAINTENANCE OF SYSTEM. 1. USE OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL AS TRAINING REFERENCE, SUPPLEMENTED WITH ADDITIONAL TRAINING MATERIALS AS REQUIRED. 2. INSTRUCTOR: MANUFACTURER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE. 3. LOCATION: AT PROJECT SITE. D. AFTER SUCCESSFUL ACCEPTANCE TEST AND JUST PRIOR TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, REPLACE AIR, OIL, AND FUEL FILTERS. 3.06 PROTECTION A. PROTECT INSTALLED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM FROM SUBSEQUENT CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS. 3.07 MAINTENANCE A. PROVIDE TO OWNER A PROPOSAL AS AN ALTERNATE TO THE BASE BID, A SEPARATE MAINTENANCE CONTRACT FOR THE SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE OF ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM FOR TWO YEARS FROM DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION; INCLUDE A COMPLETE DESCRIPTION OF PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE, SYSTEMATIC EXAMINATION, ADJUSTMENT, INSPECTION, AND TESTING, WITH A DETAILED SCHEDULE. B. PROVIDE TROUBLE CALL-BACK SERVICE UPON NOTIFICATION BY OWNER: 1. PROVIDE ON -SITE RESPONSE WITHIN 4 HOURS OF NOTIFICATION. 2. INCLUDE ALLOWANCE FOR CALL-BACK SERVICE DURING NORMAL WORKING HOURS AT NO EXTRA COST TO OWNER. 3. OWNER WILL PAY FOR CALL-BACK SERVICE OUTSIDE OF NORMAL WORKING HOURS ON AN HOURLY BASIS, BASED ON ACTUAL TIME SPENT AT SITE AND NOT INCLUDING TRAVEL TIME; INCLUDE HOURLY RATE AND DEFINITION OF NORMAL WORKING HOURS IN MAINTENANCE CONTRACT. C. MAINTAIN AN ON -SITE LOG LISTING THE DATE AND TIME OF EACH INSPECTION AND CALL-BACK VISIT, THE CONDITION OF THE SYSTEM, NATURE OF THE TROUBLE, CORRECTION PERFORMED, AND PARTS REPLACED. END OF SECTIONSECTION 263600 TRANSFER SWITCHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01SECTION INCLUDES A. TRANSFER SWITCHES FOR LOW -VOLTAGE (600 V AND LESS) APPLICATIONS AND ASSOCIATED ACCESSORIES: 1. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES. 2. INCLUDES SERVICE ENTRANCE RATED TRANSFER SWITCHES. B. THIS SECTION INCLUDES TRANSFER SWITCHES RATED 600 V AND LESS. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR QUANTITY, RATING AND CONFIGURATION OF TRANSFER SWITCHES. CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING: 1. AUTOMATIC AND NONAUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES. 2. 3-POLE AND 4-POLE TRANSFER SWITCHES. 3. CLOSED OR OPEN TRANSITION SWITCHES. C. THIS SECTION INCLUDES A REMOTE ANNUNCIATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM FOR MONITORING AND CONTROL OF SWITCHES. D. PROVIDE TRANSFER SWITCHES, GENERATORS AND PARALLELING SWITCHGEAR TOGETHER AS A COMPLETE FUNCTIONING SYSTEM THROUGH A SINGLE VENDOR. E. PROVIDE TRANSFER SWITCHES AND GENERATOR AS A COMPLETE FUNCTIONING EMERGENCY POWER SYSTEM THROUGH A SINGLE VENDOR. 1.02RELATED SECTIONS A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS OF THE CONTRACT, INCLUDING GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 01 SPECIFICATION SECTIONS, APPLY TO THIS SECTION. B. SECTION 033000 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE: CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PADS. C. SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. D. SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. E. SECTION 26 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL. F. SECTION 26 0519 - LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES. G. SECTION 26 0526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. H. SECTION 26 0533 - RACEWAYS AND CONDUIT SYSTEMS. I. SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS AND REQUIREMENTS. J. SECTION 263213 - ENGINE GENERATORS: FOR INTERFACE WITH TRANSFER SWITCHES. 1. INCLUDES CODE REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO WORK OF THIS SECTION. 2. INCLUDES ADDITIONAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS. K. SECTION 263213 - ENGINE GENERATORS: TESTING REQUIREMENTS. 1.03REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1- STANDARD FOR GOOD WORKMANSHIP IN ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION; 2010. B. NEMA 250 - ENCLOSURES FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (1000 VOLTS MAXIMUM); 2014. C. UL 1008: UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES STANDARD FOR AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES. D. NETA ATS - ACCEPTANCE TESTING SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL POWER EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS; 2013. E. NFPA 70 - NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE; MOST RECENT EDITION ADOPTED BY AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION, INCLUDING ALL APPLICABLE AMENDMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTS. F. UL 869A - REFERENCE STANDARD FOR SERVICE EQUIPMENT; CURRENT EDITION, INCLUDING ALL REVISIONS. G. UL 1008 - TRANSFER SWITCH EQUIPMENT; CURRENT EDITION, INCLUDING ALL REVISIONS. H. NFPA 99: ESSENTIAL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS FOR HEALTH CARE FACILITIES I. NFPA 101: LIFE SAFETY CODE J. NFPA 110: STANDARD FOR EMERGENCY AND STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS K. IEEE 241: I.E.E.E. RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS IN COMMERCIAL BUILDINGS. L. IEEE 446: I.E.E.E. RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR EMERGENCY AND STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS. 1.04ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. COORDINATION: 1. COORDINATE COMPATIBILITY OF TRANSFER SWITCHES TO BE INSTALLED WITH WORK PROVIDED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS OR BY OTHERS. 2. COORDINATE THE WORK WITH OTHER TRADES TO AVOID PLACEMENT OF DUCTWORK, PIPING, EQUIPMENT, OR OTHER POTENTIAL OBSTRUCTIONS WITHIN THE DEDICATED EQUIPMENT SPACES AND Q Q WORKING CLEARANCES REQUIRED BY NFPA 70 3. COORDINATE ARRANGEMENT OF EQUIPMENT WITH THE DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THE ACTUAL EQUIPMENT TO BE INSTALLED. 4. COORDINATE THE WORK WITH PLACEMENT OF SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, ETC. REQUIRED FOR MOUNTING. 5. NOTIFY ENGINEER OF ANY CONFLICTS WITH OR DEVIATIONS FROM THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. OBTAIN DIRECTION BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH WORK. 1.05SUBMITTALS A. MANUFACTURER'S DETAILED FIELD TESTING PROCEDURES. B. PRODUCT DATA: PROVIDE CATALOG SHEETS SHOWING VOLTAGE, SWITCH SIZE, RATINGS AND SIZE OF SWITCHING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES, OPERATING LOGIC, SHORT CIRCUIT RATINGS, DIMENSIONS, AND ENCLOSURE DETAILS. C. SHOP DRAWINGS: DIMENSIONED PLANS, ELEVATIONS, SECTIONS, AND DETAILS SHOWING MINIMUM CLEARANCES, CONDUCTOR ENTRY PROVISIONS, GUTTER SPACE, INSTALLED FEATURES AND DEVICES, AND MATERIAL LISTS FOR EACH SWITCH SPECIFIED. D. SINGLE -LINE DIAGRAM: SHOW CONNECTIONS BETWEEN TRANSFER SWITCH, BYPASS/ISOLATION SWITCH, POWER SOURCES AND LOAD SHOWING INTERLOCKING PROVISIONS FOR EACH COMBINED TRANSFER SWITCH AND BYPASS/ISOLATION SWITCH. E. MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS: INDICATE APPLICATION CONDITIONS AND LIMITATIONS OF USE STIPULATED BY PRODUCTTESTING AGENCY. INCLUDE INSTRUCTIONS FOR STORAGE, HANDLING, PROTECTION, EXAMINATION, PREPARATION, AND INSTALLATION OF PRODUCT. F. OPERATION DATA: INSTRUCTIONS FOR OPERATING EQUIPMENT UNDER EMERGENCY CONDITIONS WHEN ENGINE GENERATOR IS RUNNING. G. MAINTENANCE DATA: ROUTINE PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION SCHEDULE. LIST SPECIAL TOOLS, MAINTENANCE MATERIALS, AND REPLACEMENT PARTS. H. FIELD QUALITY -CONTROL TEST REPORTS 1.06000RDINATION A. COORDINATE SIZE AND LOCATION OF CONCRETE BASES. CASTANCHOR-BOLT INSERTS INTO BASES. CONCRETE, REINFORCEMENT, AND FORMWORK REQUIREMENTS ARE SPECIFIED IN DIVISION 03. 1.07QUALITY ASSURANCE A. COMPLY WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1. NFPA 70 (NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE). 2. NFPA 110 (STANDARD FOR EMERGENCY AND STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS); MEET REQUIREMENTS FOR SYSTEM LEVEL SPECIFIED IN SECTION 263213. 3. NFPA 99 (HEALTHCARE FACILITIES CODE). B. PRODUCT LISTING ORGANIZATION QUALIFICATIONS: AN ORGANIZATION RECOGNIZED BY OSHA AS A NATIONALLY RECOGNIZED TESTING LABORATORY (NRTL) AND ACCEPTABLE TO AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION. C. CONFORM TO REQUIREMENTS OF NFPA 70. D. MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS: COMPANY SPECIALIZING IN MANUFACTURING THE PRODUCTS SPECIFIED IN THIS SECTION WITH MINIMUM THREE YEARS DOCUMENTED EXPERIENCE AND WITH SERVICE FACILITIES WITHIN 100 MILES OF PROJECT. E. SUPPLIER QUALIFICATIONS: AUTHORIZED DISTRIBUTOR OF SPECIFIED MANUFACTURER WITH MINIMUM THREE YEARS DOCUMENTED EXPERIENCE. F. SOURCE LIMITATIONS: OBTAIN TRANSFER SWITCHES, ANNUNCIATORS AND OTHER EQUIPMENT DEFINED IN THIS SECTION THROUGH ONE SOURCE FROM A SINGLE MANUFACTURER. G. ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS, DEVICES, AND ACCESSORIES: LISTED AND LABELED AS DEFINED IN NFPA 70, ARTICLE 100, BY A TESTING AGENCY ACCEPTABLE TO AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION, AND MARKED FOR INTENDED USE. H. PRODUCTS: LISTED AND CLASSIFIED BY UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC. AS SUITABLE FOR THE PURPOSE SPECIFIED AND INDICATED. 1.08DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. RECEIVE, INSPECT, HANDLE, AND STORE TRANSFER SWITCHES IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. B. STORE IN A CLEAN, DRY SPACE. MAINTAIN FACTORY WRAPPING OR PROVIDE AN ADDITIONAL HEAVY CANVAS OR HEAVY PLASTIC COVER TO PROTECT UNITS FROM DIRT, WATER, CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS, AND TRAFFIC. C. HANDLE CAREFULLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS TO AVOID DAMAGE TO TRANSFER SWITCH COMPONENTS, ENCLOSURE, AND FINISH. 1.09FIELD CONDITIONS A. MAINTAIN FIELD CONDITIONS WITHIN MANUFACTURER'S REQUIRED SERVICE CONDITIONS DURING AND AFTER INSTALLATION. 1.10WARRANTY A. SEE SECTION 017800 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS, FOR ADDITIONAL WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS. B. PROVIDE MINIMUM ONE YEAR MANUFACTURER WARRANTY COVERING REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT DUE TO DEFECTIVE MATERIALS OR WORKMANSHIP. 1.11REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. IN ACCORDANCE WITH INTERNATIONAL A IONAL BUILDING CODE, MANUFACTURER SHALL TEST OR ANALYZE THE TRANSFER SWITCH COMPONENTS AND ITS MOUNTING SYSTEM OR ANCHORAGE AND SUBMIT A CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE FOR REVIEW AND ACCEPTANCE T E BY ENGINEER AND BY THE BUILDING OFFICIAL. QUALIFICATION SHALL BE BY AN ACTUAL TEST ON A SHAKE TABLE, BY THREE-DIMENSIONAL SHOCK TESTS, BY AN ANALYTICAL METHOD USING DYNAMIC CHARACTERISTICS AND FORCES, BY THE USE OF EXPERIENCE DATA OR BY A MORE RIGOROUS ANALYSIS PROVIDING FOR EQUIVALENT SAFETY. REFER THE IBC AND ASCE 7-05 FOR COMPLETE REQUIREMENTS. 1.12DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. TRANSFER SWITCHES SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH ADEQUATE LIFTING MEANS AND SHALL BE ABLE TO BE Q ROLLED OR MOVED INTO INSTALLATION POSITION AND BOLTED OL ED DIRECTLY TO FLOOR WITHOUT USING FLOOR SILLS. B. DELIVER, STORE, PROTECT, AND HANDLE PRODUCTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH RECOMMENDED PRACTICES LISTED IN MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATIONI AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS. C. INSPECT AND REPORT CONCEALED DAMAGE TO CARRIER WITHIN SPECIFIED TIME. D. STORE IN A CLEAN, DRY SPACE. MAINTAIN FACTORY PROTECTION OR COVER WITH HEAVY-DUTY PLASTIC, MINIMUM 6 MIL, TO KEEP OUT DIRT, WATER, CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS, AND TRAFFIC. HEAT ENCLOSURES TO PREVENT CONDENSATION. E. HANDLE TRANSFER SWITCHES IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS TO AVOID DAMAGING EQUIPMENT, INSTALLED DEVICES, AND FINISH. LIFT ONLY BY INSTALLED LIFTING PROVISIONS. 1.13PROJECT CONDITIONS (SITE ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS) A. FOLLOW APPLICABLE NEMA ANSI AND NECA STANDARD PRACTICES BEFORE DURING D AN AFTER INSTALLATION. B. TRANSFER SWITCHES SHALL BE LOCATED IN WELL -VENTILATED AREAS, FREE FROM EXCESS HUMIDITY, DUST, AND DIRT AND AWAY FROM HAZARDOUS MATERIALS. AMBIENT TEMPERATURE OF AREA WILL BE BETWEEN MINUS 30 AND PLUS 40 DEGREES C. INDOOR LOCATIONS SHALL BE PROTECTED TO PREVENT MOISTURE FROM ENTERING ENCLOSURE. C. INTERRUPTION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL SERVICE: DO NOT INTERRUPT ELECTRICAL SERVICE TO FACILITIES OCCUPIED BY OWNER OR OTHERS UNLESS PERMITTED UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS AND THEN ONLY AFTER ARRANGING TO PROVIDE TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SERVICE: 1. NOTIFY CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AND OWNER NO FEWER THAN FIVE DAYS IN ADVANCE OF PROPOSED INTERRUPTION OF ELECTRICAL SERVICE. 2. DO NOT PROCEED WITH INTERRUPTION OF ELECTRICAL SERVICE WITHOUT CONSTRUCTION MANAGER'S OR OWNER'S WRITTEN PERMISSION. 1.14WARRANTY A. MANUFACTURER WARRANTS EQUIPMENTTO BE FREE FROM DEFECTS IN MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP FOR 1 YEAR FROM DATE OF INSTALLATION OR 18 MONTHS FROM DATE OF DELIVERY, WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST. 1.15EXTRA MATERIALS A. PROVIDE SPARE PARTS AS RECOMMENDED BY MANUFACTURER AND AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. B. PROVIDE A COMPLETE SET OF SPARE FUSES OF ALL SIZES AND RATINGS USED IN THE SWITCHES. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. BASIS -OF -DESIGN PRODUCT: SUBJECT TO COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS, PROVIDE PRODUCTS BY ONE OF THE FOLLOWING: 1. ASCO POWER TECHNOLOGIES, LP: WWW.ASCO.COM. 2. EATON CORPORATION; CUTLER -HAMMER PRODUCTS; MODEL : WWW.EATON.COM. 3. GE ZENITH CONTROLS. 4. KOHLER POWER SYSTEMS. GENERATOR DIVISION. S. ONAN/CUMMINS POWER GENERATION; INDUSTRIAL BUSINESS GROUP. 6. GENERAC POWER SYSTEMS, INC. 7. SPECTRUM DETROIT DIESEL. B. SUBSTITUTIONS: SEE SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS. C. PRODUCTS OTHER THAN BASIS OF DESIGN ARE SUBJECTTO COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS AND PRIOR APPROVAL OF ENGINEER. BY USING PRODUCTS OTHER THAN BASIS OF DESIGN, CONTRACTOR ACCEPTS RESPONSIBILITY FOR COSTS ASSOCIATED WITH ANY NECESSARY MODIFICATIONS TO RELATED WORK, INCLUDING ANY DESIGN FEES. 0 g 'L, O O 01 0) � O O O an Q Z Q v C m C5 m U iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiQJ Z Ln Ln N N r- r- W0 (0 N x Uj J LL � 3 CL Z _Z t! O (5 p 0: a w W 0C - LL l7 Z m 2 O J r4 a N 00 - m -+ .c (V r- u o cc Z m m u v M '.r W Ob O C j O - a) a LL a L L o Z to d M Iu ,I 3 i (D N CU Lu 0-u a 00 - a ..4 U _ _ a W N W .. w D o O = cc Z O W a -p InIn M z W V oc -a M m 0 R a a A L. o � W 4 �^ W L a O M = L A s Z Q 00 M CL 4) N \\���G"CEWIS JD /iy'v�/ CEN's�\ SI F0C, _ :, 1No 38680 )� , 1 = �, , - 1 "' •, w - r.I ii ` % N �� Q '• \`I STATE OF" ' , i�� p�ORIDP' •... A .,,/,IN llli%%%\\� George Johnson, P.E. PE38680 ISSUE DATE: 10/19/2018 PROJECT NUMBER: 2847 REVISIONS: NO. DATE I DESCRIPTION ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS E5m5 TO THE BEST OF THE ENGINEERS KNOWLEDGE, THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS COMPLY WITH THE APPLICABLE MINIMUM BUILDING CODES AND THE APPLICABLE FIRE -SAFETY STANDARDS AS DETERMINED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY IN ACCORDANCE WITH CHAPTER 553.79 AND CHAPTER 633, FLORIDA STATUTES. © 2018 APG ENGINEERING t Y `+ u W au r m F Z Y 0 3 U Z 0 u a 2.02 TRANSFER SWITCHES A. PROVIDE COMPLETE POWER TRANSFER SYSTEM CONSISTING OF ALL REQUIRED EQUIPMENT, CONDUIT, BOXES, WIRING, SUPPORTS, ACCESSORIES, SYSTEM PROGRAMMING, ETC. AS NECESSARY FOR A COMPLETE OPERATING SYSTEM THAT PROVIDES THE FUNCTIONAL INTENT INDICATED. B. PROVIDE PRODUCTS LISTED, CLASSIFIED, AND LABELED AS SUITABLE FOR THE PURPOSE INTENDED. C. APPLICATIONS: 1. UTILIZE OPEN TRANSITION TRANSFER UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED OR REQUIRED. 2. NEUTRAL SWITCHING (SINGLE PHASE, THREE WIRE AND THREE PHASE, FOUR WIRE SYSTEMS): A. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED OR REQUIRED, PROVIDE SOLID (UNSWITCHED) NEUTRAL. ACT CHES SE VING ELEVATORS. 3. PROVIDE SIGNAL BEFORE TRANSFER CONT S FOR TRANSFER SWIT R B. CONSTRUCTION TYPE: EITHER "CONTACTOR TYPE" (OPEN CONTACT) OR "BREAKER TYPE" (ENCLOSED CONTACT TRANSFER SWITCHES COMPLYING WITH SPECIFIED RE UIREMENTS ARE ACCEPTABLE. Q C. COMPLY WITH NEMA ICS 10 PART 1, AND LIST AND LABEL AS COMPLYING WITH UL 1008 FOR THE CLASSIFICATION OF THE INTENDED APPLICATION (E.G. EMERGENCY, OPTIONAL STANDBY). D. D NO USE DOU L THROW SAFE S ITCHES OR HER UIPMENT NOT SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED 0 T B E TY W OT EQ FOR POWER TRANSFER APPLICATIONS AND LISTED AS TRANSFER SWITCH EQUIPMENT. E. LOAD CLASSIFICATION: CLASSIFIED FOR TOTAL SYSTEM LOAD (ANY COMBINATION OF MOTOR, ELECTRIC DISCHARGE LAMP, RESISTIVE, AND TUNGSTEN LAMP LOADS WITH TUNGSTEN LAMP LOADS NOT EXCEEDING 30 PERCENT OF THE CONTINUOUS CURRENT RATING) UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED OR REQUIRED. F. SWITCHING METHODS: 1. OPEN TRANSITION: A. PROVIDE BREAK -BEFORE -MAKE TRANSFER WITHOUT A NEUTRAL POSITION THAT IS NOT CONNECTED TO EITHER SOURCE, AND WITH INTERLOCKS TO PREVENT SIMULTANEOUS CONNECTION OF THE LOAD TO BOTH SOURCES. I. SERVICE CONDITIONS: PROVIDE TRANSFER SWITCHES SUITABLE FOR CONTINUOUS OPERATION AT INDICATED RATINGS UNDER THE SERVICE CONDITIONS AT THE INSTALLED LOCATION. J. ENCLOSURES: 1. ENVIRONMENT TYPE PER NEMA 250: UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, AS SPECIFIED FOR THE FOLLOWING INSTALLATION LOCATIONS: A. OUTDOOR LOCATIONS: TYPE 3R OR TYPE 4. 2. FINISH: MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. K. SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT RATING: 1. WITHSTAND AND CLOSING RATING: PROVIDE TRANSFER SWITCHES, WHEN PROTECTED BY THE SUPPLY SIDE OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES TO BE INSTALLED, WITH LISTED WITHSTAND AND CLOSING RATING NOT LESS THAN THE AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT AT THE INSTALLED LOCATION AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. L. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES: 1. DESCRIPTION: TRANSFER SWITCHES WITH AUTOMATICALLY INITIATED TRANSFER BETWEEN SOURCES; ELECTRICALLY OPERATED AND MECHANICALLY HELD. 2. CONTROL FUNCTIONS: A. AUTOMATIC MODE. B. TEST MODE: SIMULATES FAILURE OF PRIMARY/NORMAL SOURCE. C. VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY SENSING: 1) UNDERVOLTAGE SENSING FOR EACH PHASE OF PRIMARY/NORMAL SOURCE; ADJUSTABLE DROPOUT/PICKUP SETTINGS. 2) UNDERVOLTAGE SENSING FOR ALTERNATE/EMERGENCY SOURCE; ADJUSTABLE DROPOUT/PICKUP SETTINGS. 3) UNDERFREQUENCY SENSING FOR ALTERNATE/EMERGENCY SOURCE; ADJUSTABLE DROPOUT/PICKUP SETTINGS. D. OUTPUTS: 1) CONTACTS FOR ENGINE START/SHUTDOWN (EXCEPT WHERE DIRECT GENERATOR COMMUNICATION INTERFACE IS PROVIDED). 2) AUXILIARY CONTACTS; ONE SETS) FOR EACH SWITCH POSITION. E. ADJUSTABLE TIME DELAYS: 1) ENGINE GENERATOR START TIME DELAY; DELAYS ENGINE START SIGNAL TO OVERRIDE MOMENTARY PRIMARY/NORMAL SOURCE FAILURES. 2) TRANSFER TO ALTERNATE/EMERGENCY SOURCE TIME DELAY. 3) RETRANSFER TO PRIMARY/NORMAL SOURCE TIME DELAY. 4) SIGNAL BEFORE TRANSFER (LOAD DISCONNECT) CONTACT TIME DELAY. 5) ENGINE GENERATOR COOLDOWN TIME DELAY; DELAYS ENGINE SHUTDOWN FOLLOWING RETRANSFER TO PRIMARY/NORMAL SOURCE TO PERMIT GENERATOR TO RUN UNLOADED FOR COOLDOWN PERIOD. F. IN -PHASE MONITOR (OPEN TRANSITION TRANSFER SWITCHES): MONITORS PHASE ANGLE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN SOURCES FOR INITIATING IN -PHASE TRANSFER. G. ENGINE EXERCISER: PROVIDES PROGRAMMABLE SCHEDULED EXERCISING OF ENGINE GENERATOR SELECTABLE WITH OR WITHOUT TRANSFER TO LOAD; PROVIDES MEMORY RETENTION DURING POWER OUTAGE. 3. STATUS INDICATIONS: A. CONNECTED TO ALTERNATE/EMERGENCY SOURCE. B. CONNECTED TO PRIMARY/NORMAL SOURCE. C. ALTERNATE/EMERGENCY SOURCE AVAILABLE. 4. AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS: A. UPON FAILURE OF PRIMARY/NORMAL SOURCE FOR A PROGRAMMABLE TIME PERIOD (ENGINE GENERATOR START TIME DELAY), INITIATE STARTING OF ENGINE GENERATOR WHERE APPLICABLE. B. WHERE APPLICABLE, INITIATE SIGNAL BEFORE TRANSFER (LOAD DISCONNECT) CONTACTS AT PROGRAMMABLE TIME BEFORE TRANSFER. C. WHEN ALTERNATE/EMERGENCY SOURCE IS AVAILABLE, TRANSFER LOAD TO ALTERNATE/EMERGENCY SOURCE AFTER PROGRAMMABLE TIME DELAY. D. WHEN PRIMARY/NORMAL SOURCE HAS BEEN RESTORED, RETRANSFER TO PRIMARY/NORMAL SOURCE AFTER A PROGRAMMABLE TIME DELAY. BYPASS TIME DELAY IF ALTERNATE/EMERGENCY SOURCE FAILS AND PRIMARY NORMAL SOURCE IS AVAILABLE. E. WHERE APPLICABLE, INITIATE SHUTDOWN OF ENGINE GENERATOR AFTER PROGRAMMABLE ENGINE COOLDOWN TIME DELAY. M. SERVICE ENTRANCE RATED TRANSFER SWITCHES: 1. FURNISHED WITH INTEGRAL DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ON THE PRIMARY/NORMAL SOURCE AND WITH GROUND -FAULT PROTECTION WHERE INDICATED. I CCORDING TO UL 869A . 2. LISTED AND LABELED AS SUITABLE FOR USE AS SERV CE EQUIPMENT A 2.03 GENERAL TRANSFER -SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. SWITCH RATINGS: REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR TRANSFER SWITCH TYPES, VOLTAGE RATING AND CURRENT RATING. B. INDICATED CURRENT RATINGS: APPLY AS DEFINED IN UL 1008 FOR CONTINUOUS LOADING AND TOTAL SYSTEM TRANSFER, INCLUDING TUNGSTEN FILAMENT LAMP LOADS NOT EXCEEDING 30 PERCENT OF SWITCH AMPERE RATING, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. C. TESTED FAULT -CURRENT CLOSING AND WITHSTAND RATINGS: ADEQUATE FOR DUTY IMPOSED BY PROTECTIVE DEVICES AT INSTALLATION LOCATIONS IN PROJECT UNDER THE FAULT CONDITIONS INDICATED, BASED ON TESTING ACCORDING TO UL 1008. 1. WHERE TRANSFER SWITCH INCLUDES INTERNAL FAULT -CURRENT PROTECTION, RATING OF SWITCH AND TRIP UNIT COMBINATION SHALL EXCEED INDICATED FAULT -CURRENT VALUE AT INSTALLATION LOCATION. D. SOLID-STATE CONTROLS: REPETITIVE ACCURACY OF ALL SETTINGS SHALL BE PLUS OR MINUS 2 PERCENT OR BETTER OVER AN OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE OF MINUS 20 TO PLUS 70 DEG C. E. RESISTANCE TO DAMAGE BY VOLTAGE TRANSIENTS: COMPONENTS SHALL MEET OR EXCEED VOLTAGE -SURGE WITHSTAND CAPABILITY REQUIREMENTS WHEN TESTED ACCORDING TO IEEE C62.41. COMPONENTS SHALL MEET OR EXCEED VOLTAGE -IMPULSE WITHSTAND TEST OF NEMA ICS 1. F. SWITCH CHARACTERISTICS: DESIGNED FOR CONTINUOUS DUTY REPETITIVE TRANSFER OF FULL RATED CURRENT BETWEEN ACTIVE POWER SOURCES. 1. SWITCH ACTION: DOUBLE ACTION; MECHANICALLY HELD IN BOTH DIRECTIONS. 2. CONTACTS: SILVER COMPOSITION OR SILVER ALLOY FOR LOAD -CURRENT SWITCHING. CONVENTIONAL AUTOMATIC TRANSFER -SWITCH UNITS, RATED 225A AND HIGHER, SHALL HAVE SEPARATE ARCING CONTACTS. G. NEUTRAL TERMINAL: WHERE THREE POLE SWITCHES ARE INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS, PROVIDE A SOLID AND FULLY RATED NEUTRAL, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. H. MOTOR LOADS: FOR SWITCHES THAT SERVE MOTOR LOADS, FURNISH ONE THE FOLLOWING (REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR PREFERRED SWITCH TYPE): 1. OPEN TRANSITION TRANSFER SWITCH WITH IN -PHASE MONITOR I. INDICATING LIGHTS: ALL INDICATING LIGHTS ON FRONT OF TRANSFER SWITCH TO BE LED TYPE. J. ANNUNCIATION, CONTROL, AND PROGRAMMING INTERFACE COMPONENTS: DEVICES AT TRANSFER SWITCHES FOR COMMUNICATING WITH REMOTE PROGRAMMING DEVICES, ANNUNCIATORS, OR ANNUNCIATOR AND CONTROL PANELS SHALL HAVE COMMUNICATION CAPABILITY MATCHED WITH REMOTE DEVICE. K. FACTORY WIRING: TRAIN AND BUNDLE FACTORY WIRING AND LABEL CONSISTENT WITH SHOP DRAWINGS, EITHER BY COLOR -CODE OR BY NUMBERED OR LETTERED WIRE AND CABLE TAPE MARKERS AT TERMINATIONS. COLOR -CODING AND WIRE AND CABLE TAPE MARKERS ARE SPECIFIED IN DIVISION 26 0553 SECTION "IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS." 1. DESIGNATED TERMINALS: PRESSURE TYPE, SUITABLE FOR TYPES AND SIZES OF FIELD WIRING INDICATED. 2. POWER -TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT AND FIELD -WIRING SPACE: SUITABLE FOR TOP, SIDE, OR BOTTOM ENTRANCE OF FEEDER CONDUCTORS AS INDICATED. 3. CONTROL WIRING: EQUIPPED WITH LUGS SUITABLE FOR CONNECTION TO TERMINAL STRIPS. L. ENCLOSURES: GENERAL-PURPOSE NEMA 1 COMPLYING WITH NEMA ICS 6, UL 508,OR IN A SWITCHBOARD ASSEMBLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH UL 891 UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 1. ENCLOSURE SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED SO THAT PERSONNEL ARE PROTECTED FROM ENERGIZED BYPASS -ISOLATION COMPONENTS DURING AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH MAINTENANCE. 2. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH COMPONENTS SHALL BE REMOVABLE WITHOUT DISCONNECTING EXTERNAL SOURCE OR LOAD POWER CONDUCTORS. 3. FINISH: CABINETS SHALL BE GIVEN A PHOSPHATE TREATMENT, PAINTED WITH RUST -INHIBITING PRIMER, AND FINISH -PAINTED WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD ENAMEL OR LACQUER FINISH. M. SENSING: 1. UNDERVOLTAGE SENSING FOR EACH PHASE OF NORMAL SOURCE: SENSE LOW PHASE -TO -GROUND VOLTAGE ON EACH PHASE. PICKUP VOLTAGE SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE FROM 85 TO 100% OF NOMINAL, AND DROPOUT VOLTAGE IS ADJUSTABLE FROM 75 TO 98% OF PICKUP VALUE. FACTORY SET FOR PICKUP AT 90% AND DROPOUT AT 85%. 2. ADJUSTABLE TIME DELAY: FOR OVERRIDE OF NORMAL -SOURCE VOLTAGE SENSING TO DELAY TRANSFER AND ENGINE START SIGNALS. ADJUSTABLE FROM ZERO TO SIX SECONDS, AND FACTORY SET FOR ONE SECOND. 3. VOLTAGE/FREQUENCY LOCKOUT RELAY: PREVENT PREMATURE TRANSFER TO THE - TOR. PICKUP VOLTAGE SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE FROM 85 TO 100% OF NOMINAL. ENGINE GENERA FACTORY SET FOR PICKUP AT 90%. PICKUP FREQUENCY SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE FROM 90 TO 100% OF NO MINAL. FACTORY SET FOR PICKUP AT 95%. 4. TIME DELAY FOR RETRANSFER TO NORMAL SOURCE: ADJUSTABLE FROM 0 TO 30 MINUTES, AND FACTORY SET FOR 10 MINUTES TO AUTOMATICALLY DEFEAT DELAY ON LOSS OF VOLTAGE OR SUSTAINED UNDERVOLTAGE OF EMERGENCY SOURCE, PROVIDED NORMAL SUPPLY HAS BEEN RESTORED. 5. TE ST SWITCH: SIMULATE NORMAL -SOURCE FAILURE. 6. SWITCH -POSITION INDICATION: INDICATE SOURCE TO WHICH LOAD IS CONNECTED. 7. SOURCE -AVAILABLE INDICATION: SUPERVISE SOURCES VIA TRANSFER SWITCH NORMAL- AND EMERGENCY -SOURCE SENSING CIRCUITS. 8. NORMAL POWER INDICATION: INDICATE "NORMAL SOURCE AVAILABLE." 9. EMERGENCY POWER INDICATION: INDICATE "EMERGENCY SOURCE AVAILABLE." 10. TRANSFER OVERRIDE CONTROL: OVERRIDES AUTOMATIC RETRANSFER CONTROL SO THAT AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH SHALL REMAIN CONNECTED TO EMERGENCY POWER SOURCE R GARDLESS OF CONDITION OF NORMAL SOURCE. CONTROL PANEL SHALL INDICATE OVERRIDE E STATUS. 11. ENGINE STARTING CONTACTS: ONE ISOLATED AND NORMALLY CLOSED AND ONE ISOLATED AND NORMALLY OPEN; RATED 5 A AT 30 V DC MINIMUM. 12. ENGINE SHUTDOWN CONTACTS: TIME DELAY ADJUSTABLE FROM ZERO TO 15 MINUTES, AND FACTORY SET FOR 5 MINUTES. CONTACTS SHALL INITIATE SHUTDOWN AT REMOTE ENGINE -GENERATOR CONTROLS AFTER RETRANSFER OF LOAD TO NORMAL SOURCE. 13. ENGINE -GENERATOR EXERCISER: PROGRAMMABLE EXERCISER STARTS ENGINE -GENERATORS) AND TRANSFERS LOAD TO THEM FROM NORMAL SOURCE FOR A PRESET TIME, THEN RETRANSFER AND SHUTS DOWN ENGINE -GENERATORS) AFTER A PRESET COOL -DOWN PERIOD. INITIATES EXERCISE CYCLE AT PRESET INTERVALS ADJUSTABLE FROM 7 TO 30 DAYS. RUNNING PERIODS ARE ADJUSTABLE FROM 10 TO 30 MINUTES. FACTORY SETTINGS SHALL BE FOR 7-DAY EXERCISE CYCLE, 20-MINUTE RUNNING PERIOD, AND 5-MINUTE COOL -DOWN PERIOD. 2.04 MICROPROCESSOR CONTROLLER A. FURNISH A BUILT-IN MICROPROCESSOR TO PROVIDE SENSING AND LOGIC FOR CONTROL OF THE SWITCH WITH THE ABILITY TO COMMUNICATE SERIALLY THROUGH A SERIAL COMMUNICATION MODULE OR ETHERNET CONNECTIVITY MODULE. B. PROVIDE CONTROLLER WITH 12 SELECTABLE NOMINAL VOLTAGES FOR MAXIMUM APPLICATION FLEXIBILITY AND MINIMAL SPARE PART REQUIREMENTS. PROVIDE TRUE RMS VOLTAGE SENSING, ACCURATE TO +1% OF NOMINAL VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY SENSING ACCURATE TO + 0.2%. PROVIDE CONTROLLER CAPABLE OF OPERATING OVER A TEMPERATURE RANGE OF -20 TO +60 DEGREES C. AND STORAGE FROM -55 TO +85 DEGREES C. C. STORE DEFAULT SETUP INFORMATION AND CALIBRATION DATA ON NONVOLATILE EPROM. D. CONTROLLER DISPLAY AND KEYPAD: PROVIDE A FOUR -LINE, 20 CHARACTER LCD DISPLAY AND 5 X 5, TACTILE KEYPAD AS AN INTEGRAL PART OF THE CONTROLLER FOR VIEWING ALL AVAILABLE DATA AND SETTING DESIRED OPERATIONAL PARAMETERS. 2.05 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION D VO TAGE DECREASE IN ONE OR MORE PHASES OF THE NORMAL POWER SOURCE SHALL A. THE SPECIFIE L E UENCE. THE AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH SHALL START THE INITIATE THE TRANSFERS Q ENGINE -GENERATORS) AFTER A SPECIFIED TIME DELAY TO PERMIT OVERRIDE OF MOMENTARY DIPS IN THE NORMAL POWER SOURCE. B. THE AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH SHALL TRANSFER THE LOAD FROM NORMAL TO EMERGENCY SOURCE WHEN THE FREQUENCY AND VOLTAGE OF THE ENGINE -GENERATORS) HAVE ATTAINED THE SPECIFIED PERCENT OF RATED VALUE. C. ENGINE START: A VOLTAGE DECREASE, AT ANY AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH, IN ONE OR MORE PHASES OF THE NORMAL POWER SOURCE TO LESS THAN THE SPECIFIED VALUE OF NORMAL SHALL START THE ENGINE -GENERATORS) AFTER A SPECIFIED TIME DELAY. D. TRANSFER TO EMERGENCY SYSTEM LOADS: AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES FOR EMERGENCY SYSTEM LOADS SHALL TRANSFER THEIR LOADS FROM NORMAL TO EMERGENCY SOURCE WHEN FREQUENCY AND VOLTAGE OF THE ENGINE-GENERATOR(S) HAVE ATTAINED THE SPECIFIED PERCENT OF RATED VALUE. ONLY THOSE SWITCHES WITH DEFICIENT NORMAL SOURCE VOLTAGE SHALLTRANSFER. E. TRANSFER TO EQUIPMENT BRANCH LOADS: AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES FOR EQUIPMENT BRANCH LOADS SHALL TRANSFER THEIR LOADS TO THE ENGINE -GENERATOR ON A TIME -DELAYED, STAGGERED BASIS, AFTER THE EMERGENCY SYSTEM SWITCHES HAVE TRANSFERRED. ONLY THOSE SWITCHES WITH DEFICIENT NORMAL SOURCE VOLTAGE SHALL TRANSFER. F. RETRANSFER TO NORMAL (ALL LOADS): AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES SHALL RETRANSFER THE LOAD FROM EMERGENCY TO NORMAL SOURCE UPON RESTORATION OF NORMAL SUPPLY IN ALL PHASES TO THE SPECIFIED PERCENT OR MORE OF NORMAL VOLTAGE, AND AFTER A SPECIFIED TIME DELAY. SHOULD THE EMERGENCY SOURCE FAIL DURING THIS TIME, THE AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES SHALL IMMEDIATELY TRANSFER TO THE NORMAL SOURCE WHENEVER IT BECOMES AVAILABLE. AFTER RESTORING TO NORMAL SOURCE, THE ENGINE -GENERATORS) SHALL CONTINUE TO RUN UNLOADED FOR A SPECIFIED INTERVAL BEFORE SHUT -DOWN. 2.06 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH A. DESCRIPTION: NEMA ICS 10, AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH SUITABLE FOR USE AS SERVICE EQUIPMENT. B. CONFIGURATION: ELECTRICALLY OPERATED, MECHANICALLY HELD TRANSFER SWITCH. C. COMPLY WITH LEVEL 2 EQUIPMENT ACCORDING TO NFPA 110. D. SWITCHING ARRANGEMENT: DOUBLE -THROW TYPE, INCAPABLE OF PAUSES OR INTERMEDIATE POSITION STOPS DURING NORMAL FUNCTIONING, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. E. MANUAL SWITCH OPERATION: 1. UNDER LOAD, WITH DOOR CLOSED AND WITH EITHER OR BOTH SOURCES ENERGIZED. TRANSFER TIME IS SAME AS FOR ELECTRICAL OPERATION. CONTROL CIRCUIT AUTOMATICALLY DISCONNECTS FROM ELECTRICAL OPERATOR DURING MANUAL OPERATION. 2. UNLOADED. CONTROL CIRCUIT AUTOMATICALLY DISCONNECTS FROM ELECTRICAL OPERATOR DURING MANUAL OPERATION. F. AUTOMATIC CLOSED -TRANSITION TRANSFER SWITCHES: INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS AND CHARACTERISTICS: 1. FULLY AUTOMATIC MAKE -BEFORE -BREAK OPERATION. 2. LOAD TRANSFER WITHOUT INTERRUPTION, THROUGH MOMENTARY INTERCONNECTION OF BOTH POWER S OURCES NOT EXCEEDING 100 MS. 3. INITIATION OF NO -INTERRUPTION TRANSFER: CONTROLLED BY IN -PHASE MONITOR AND SENSORS CONFIRMING BOTH SOURCES ARE PRESENT AND ACCEPTABLE. A. INITIATION OCCURS WITHOUT ACTIVE CONTROL OF GENERATOR. B. CONTROLS ENSURE THAT CLOSED -TRANSITION LOAD TRANSFER CLOSURE OCCURS ONLY WHEN THE 2 SOURCES ARE WITHIN PLUS OR MINUS 5 ELECTRICAL DEGREES MAXIMUM, AND PLUS OR MINUS 5 PERCENT MAXIMUM VOLTAGE DIFFERENCE. 4. FAILURE OF POWER SOURCE SERVING LOAD INITIATES AUTOMATIC BREAK -BEFORE -MAKE TRANSFER. G. DELAYED TRANSITION SWITCH: SWITCH OPERATOR HAS A PROGRAMMED NEUTRAL POSITION ARRANGED TO PROVIDE A MIDPOINT BETWEE N THE TWO WORKING SWITCH POSITIONS WITH AN INTENTIONAL TIME -CONTROLLED PAUSE AT MIDPOINT DURING TRANSFER. PAUSE IS ADJUSTABLE FROM 0.5 TO 30 SECONDS MINIMUM AND FACTORY SET FOR 0.5 SECOND, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. TIME DELAY OCCURS FOR BOTH TRANSFER DIRECTIONS. PAUSE IS DISABLED UNLESS BOTH SOURCES ARE LIVE. 2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. FACTORY TEST AND INSPECT COMPONENTS, ASSEMBLED SWITCHES, AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT. ENSURE PROPER OPERATION. CHECK TRANSFER TIME AND VOLTAGE, FREQUENCY, AND TIME -DELAY SETTINGS FOR COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS. PERFORM DIELECTRIC STRENGTH TEST COMPLYING WITH NEMA ICS 1. 2.08 SERVICE CONDITIONS A. SERVICE CONDITIONS: NEMA ICS 10. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. VERIFY THAT FIELD MEASUREMENTS ARE AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. B. VERIFY THAT THE RATINGS AND CONFIGURATIONS OF TRANSFER SWITCHES ARE CONSISTENT WITH THE INDICATED REQUIREMENTS. C. VERIFY THAT ROUGH -INS FOR FIELD CONNECTIONS ARE IN THE PROPER LOCATIONS. D. VERIFY THAT MOUNTING SURFACES ARE READY TO RECEIVE TRANSFER SWITCHES. E. VERIFY THAT CONDITIONS ARE SATISFACTORY FOR INSTALLATION PRIOR TO STARTING WORK. 3.02 PREPARATION A. PROVIDE HOUSEKEEPING PADS UNDER THE PROVISIONS OF SECTION 033000. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. PERFORM WORK IN A NEAT AND WORKMANLIKE MANNER IN ACCORDANCE WITH NECA 1 . B. INSTALL TRANSFER SWITCHES IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. C. ARRANGE EQUIPMENT TO PROVIDE MINIMUM CLEARANCES AND REQUIRED MAINTENANCE ACCESS. D. PROVIDE REQUIRED SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 260529. E. INSTALL TRANSFER SWITCHES PLUMB AND LEVEL. F. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, MOUNT FLOOR -MOUNTED TRANSFER SWITCHES ON PROPERLY SIZED 3 INCH HIGH CONCRETE PAD CONSTRUCTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 033000. G. PROVIDE GROUNDING AND BONDING IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 260526. H. IDENTIFY TRANSFER SWITCHES AND ASSOCIATED SYSTEM WIRING IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 260553. I. MOUNT AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES ON CONCRETE SLAB. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, THE SLAB SHALL BE AT LEAST 4 INCHES THICK. THE TOP OF THE CONCRETE SLAB SHALL BE APPROXIMATELY 4 INCHES ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR. EDGES ABOVE FLOOR SHALL HAVE 1/2 INCH CHAMFER. THE SLAB SHALL BE OF ADEQUATE SIZE TO PROJECT AT LEAST 8 INCHES BEYOND THE EQUIPMENT. PROVIDE CONDUIT TURN -UPS AND CABLE ENTRANCE SPACE REQUIRED BY THE EQUIPMENT TO BE MOUNTED. SEAL VOIDS AROUND CONDUIT OPENINGS IN SLAB WITH WATER- AND OIL -RESISTANT CAULKING OR SEALANT. CUT OFF AND BUSH CONDUITS 3 INCHES ABOVE SLAB SURFACE. J. ANNUNCIATOR AND CONTROL PANEL MOUNTING: FLUSH IN WALL, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. K. SET FIELD -ADJUSTABLE INTERVALS AND DELAYS, RELAYS, AND ENGINE EXERCISER CLOCK. L. FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL NECESSARY INTERCONNECTING CONTROL AND MONITORING WIRING BETWEEN SWITCHES, GENERATORS, ANNUNCIATORS AND ELEVATOR CONTROLLERS AS REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE OPERATING SYSTEM. 3.04 CONNECTIONS A. WIRING TO REMOTE COMPONENTS: MATCH TYPE AND NUMBER OF CABLES AND CONDUCTORS TO CONTROL AND COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS OF TRANSFER SWITCHES AS RECOMMENDED BY MANUFACTURER. INCREASE RACEWAY SIZES AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO OWNER IF NECESSARY TO ACCOMMODATE REQUIRED WIRING. B. GROUND EQUIPMENT ACCORDING TO SECTION 260526 "GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS." C. CONNECT WIRING ACCORDING TO SECTION 260519 "LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES." 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. PROVIDE SERVICES OF A MANUFACTURER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE TO OBSERVE INSTALLATION AND ASSIST IN INSPECTION AND TESTING. INCLUDE MANUFACTURER'S DETAILED TESTING PROCEDURES AND FIELD REPORTS WITH SUBMITTALS. B. PREPARE AND START SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. C. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES: 1. INSPECT AND TEST IN ACCORDANCE WITH NETA ATS, EXCEPT SECTION 4. 2. PERFORM INSPECTIONS AND TESTS LISTED IN NETA ATS SECTION 7.22.3. THE CONTROL WIRING INSULATION -RESISTANCE TESTS LISTED AS OPTIONAL ARE NOT REQUIRED. D. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL INSPECTION AND TESTING AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETION OF ASSOCIATED ENGINE GENERATOR TESTING AS SPECIFIED IN SECTION 263213. E. CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK, ADJUST FOR PROPER OPERATION, AND RETEST UNTIL ENTIRE SYSTEM COMPLIES WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. F. PROVIDE THE SERVICES OF THE MANUFACTURER'S TECHNICAL REPRESENTATIVE TO CHECK OUT TRANSFER SWITCH CONNECTIONS AND OPERATION AND PLAC E. E IN SERVIC G. PERFORM FIELD INSPECTION AND TESTING IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 014000. H. INSPECT AND TEST IN ACCORDANCE WITH NETA STD ATS, EXCEPT SECTION 4. I. PERFORM INSPECTIONS AND TESTS LISTED IN NETA STD ATS, SECTION 7.22.3. J. PERFORM THE FOLLOWING TESTS AND INSPECTIONS WITH THE ASSISTANCE OF A FACTORY -AUTHORIZED SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE: 1. AFTER INSTALLING EQUIPMENT AND AFTER ELECTRICAL CIRCUITRY HAS BEEN ENERGIZED, TEST FOR COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS. 2. PERFORM EACH VISUAL AND MECHANICAL INSPECTION AND ELECTRICAL TEST STATED IN NETA ACCEPTANCE TESTING SPECIFICATION. CERTIFY COMPLIANCE WITH TEST PARAMETERS. 3. MEASURE INSULATION RESISTANCE PHASE -TO -PHASE AND PHASE -TO -GROUND WITH INSULATION -RESISTANCE TESTER. INCLUDE EXTERNAL ANNUNCIATION AND CONTROL CIRCUITS. USE TEST VOLTAGES AND PROCEDURE RECOMMENDED BY MANUFACTURER. COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFIED MINIMUM RESISTANCE. A. CHECK FOR ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY OF CIRCUITS AND FOR SHORT CIRCUITS. B. INSPECT FOR PHYSICAL DAMAGE, PROPER INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION, AND INTEGRITY OF BARRIERS, COVERS, AND SAFETY FEATURES. C. VERIFY THAT MANUAL TRANSFER WARNINGS ARE PROPERLY PLACED. D. PERFORM MANUAL TRANSFER OPERATION. 4. AFTER ENERGIZING CIRCUITS, DEMONSTRATE INTERLOCKING SEQUENCE AND OPERATIONAL FUNCTION FOR EACH SWITCH AT LEAST THREE TIMES. A. SIMULATE POWER FAILURES OF NORMAL SOURCE TO AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES AND OF EMERGENCY SOURCE WITH NORMAL SOURCE AVAILABLE. B. SIMULATE LOSS OF PHASE -TO -GROUND VOLTAGE FOR EACH PHASE OF NORMAL SOURCE. C. VERIFYTIME-DELAYSETTINGS. D. VERIFY PICKUP AND DROPOUT VOLTAGES BY DATA READOUT OR INSPECTION OF CONTROL SETTINGS. E. TEST BYPASS/ISOLATION UNIT FUNCTIONAL MODES AND RELATED AUTOMATIC TRANSFER -SWITCH OPERATIONS. F. PERFORM CONTACT -RESISTANCE TEST ACROSS MAIN CONTACTS AND CORRECT VALUES EXCEEDING 500 MICROHMS AND VALUES FOR 1 POLE DEVIATING BY M N FR M TH POLES. ORE THAN 50 PERCE T O O ER G. VERIFY PROPER SEQUENCE AND CORRECTTIMING OF AUTOMATIC ENGINE STARTING, TRANSFER TIME DELAY, RETRANSFER TIME DELAY ON RESTORATION OF NORMAL POWER, AND ENGINE COOL -DOWN AND SHUTDOWN. K. COORDINATE TESTS WITH TESTS OF GENERATOR AND RUN THEM CONCURRENTLY. L. REPORT RESULTS OF TESTS AND INSPECTIONS IN WRITING. RECORD ADJUSTABLE RELAY SETTINGS AND MEASURED INSULATION AND CONTACT RESISTANCES AND TIME DELAYS. ATTACH A LABEL OR TAG TO EACH TESTED COMPONENT INDICATING SATISFACTORY COMPLETION OF TESTS. M. REMOVE AND REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING UNITS AND RETEST AS SPECIFIED ABOVE. 3.06 CLEANING A. CLEAN EXPOSED SURFACES TO REMOVE DIRT, PAINT, OR OTHER FOREIGN MATERIAL AND RESTORE TO MATCH ORIGINAL FACTORY FINISH. 3.07 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. ENGAGE A FACTORY -AUTHORIZED SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE FOR A MINIMUM 2 DAYS TO TRAIN OWNER'S MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL TO ADJUST, OPERATE, AND MAINTAIN TRANSFER SWITCHES AND RELATED EQUIPMENT. B. COORDINATE THIS TRAINING WITH THAT FOR GENERATOR EQUIPMENT. C. INFRARED SCANNING: AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, BUT NOT MORE THAN 60 DAYS AFTER FINAL ACCEPTANCE, PERFORM AN INFRARED SCAN OF EACH SWITCH. REMOVE ALL ACCESS PANELS SO JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS ARE ACCESSIBLE TO PORTABLE SCANNER. 1. FOLLOW-UP INFRARED SCANNING: PERFORM AN ADDITIONAL FOLLOW-UP INFRARED SCAN OF EACH SWITCH 11 MONTHS AFTER DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. 2. INSTRUMENT: USE AN INFRARED SCANNING DEVICE DESIGNED TO MEASURE TEMPERATURE OR TO DETECT SIGNIFICANT DEVIATIONS FROM NORMAL VALUES. PROVIDE CALIBRATION RECORD FOR DEVICE. 3.08 MAINTENANCE A. PROVIDE A SEPARATE MAINTENANCE CONTRACT FOR SPECIFIED MAINTENANCE SERVICE. B. PROVIDE SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE OF TRANSFER SWITCHES FOR ONE YEAR FROM DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. END OF SECTION SECTION 264300 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01SECTION INCLUDES A. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL THE SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE (SPD) EQUIPMENT HAVING THE ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS, RATINGS, AND MODIFICATIONS AS SPECIFIED HEREIN AND AS SHOWN ON THE CONTRACT DRAWINGS. TO MAXIMIZE PERFORMANCE AND RELIABILITY AND TO OBTAIN THE LOWEST POSSIBLE LET -THROUGH VOLTAGES, THE AC SURGE PROTECTION MAY BE INTEGRATED INTO ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT SUCH AS SWITCHGEAR, SWITCHBOARDS, PANELBOARDS, BUSWAY (INTEGRATED WITHIN BUS PLUG), OR MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS (MCC). ALTERNATELY, SPDS MAY BE MOUNTED EXTERNAL TO THE EQUIPMENT USING APPROVED METHODS. B. ALL SPDS MUST COMPLY WITH UL 1149 THIRD EDITION AND SERVICE ENTRANCE SPDS MUST ALSO COMPLY WITH UL 96A. C. SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR DISTRIBUTION LOCATIONS. D. SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR BRANCH PANELBOARD LOCATIONS. 1.02RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS OF THE CONTRACT, INCLUDING GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 01 SPECIFICATION SECTIONS APPLY TO THIS SECTION. B. SECTION 26 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL. C. SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. D. SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS. 1.03ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. I NOMINAL: NOMINAL DISCHARGE CURRENT. B. MCOV: MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS OPERATING VOLTAGE. C. MODE(S), ALSO MODES OF PROTECTION: THE PAIR OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS WHERE THE VPR APPLIES. D. MOV: METAL -OXIDE VARISTOR; AN ELECTRONIC COMPONENT WITH A SIGNIFICANT NON -OHMIC CURRENT -VOLTAGE CHARACTERISTIC. E. OCPD: OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE. F. SCCR: SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENT RATING. G. SPD: SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE. H. VPR: VOLTAGE PROTECTION RATING. I. EMI/RFI: ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE/RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE. J. SPD: SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE. 1.04REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI/IEEE C62.11- STANDARD FOR METAL -OXIDE SURGE ARRESTERS FOR AC POWER CIRCUITS. B. ANSI/IEEE C62.33 - STANDARD TEST SPECIFICATIONS FOR VARISTOR SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES C. ANSI/IEEE C62.41- RECOMMENDED PRACTICE ON SURGE VOLTAGES IN LOW -VOLTAGE AC POWER SYSTEMS D. ANSI/IEEE C62.45 - IEEE STANDARD GUIDE ON SURGE TESTING FOR EQUIPMENT CONNECTED TO LOW -VOLTAGE AC POWER CIRCUITS E. MIL-STD-220 - METHOD OF INSERTION LOSS MEASUREMENT; REVISION C, 2009. F. NECA 1- STANDARD FOR GOOD WORKMANSHIP IN ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION; 2010. G. NEMA STANDARD LS-1- LOW -VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES. H. NEMA 250 - ENCLOSURES FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (1000 VOLTS MAXIMUM); 2014. I. NETA ATS - ACCEPTANCE TESTING SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL POWER EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS; 2013. J. NFPA 70 - NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE; MOST RECENT EDITION ADOPTED BY AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION, INCLUDING ALL APPLICABLE AMENDMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTS. K. UL 1283 - STANDARD FOR ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE FILTERS; CURRENT EDITION, INCLUDING ALL REVISIONS. L. UL 1449 - STANDARD FOR SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES; CURRENT EDITION, INCLUDING ALL REVISIONS. 1.05ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. COORDINATION: COORDINATE SIZE AND LOCATION OF OVERCURRENT DEVICE COMPATIBLE WITH THE ACTUAL SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE AND LOCATION TO BE INSTALLED. NOTIFY ENGINEER OF ANY CONFLICTS OR DEVIATIONS FROM THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TO OBTAIN DIRECTION PRIOR TO ORDERING EQUIPMENT. 1.06SUBM ITTALS A. SEE SECTION 013000 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS, FOR SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. B. PRODUCT DATA: INCLUDE DETAILED COMPONENT INFORMATION, VOLTAGE, SURGE CURRENT RATINGS, REPETITIVE SURGE CURRENT CAPACITY, VOLTAGE PROTECTION RATING (VPR) FOR ALL PROTECTION MODES, MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS OPERATING VOLTAGE (MCOV), NOMINAL DISCHARGE CURRENT (I-N), SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT RATING (SCCR), CONNECTION MEANS INCLUDING ANY REQUIRED EXTERNAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION, ENCLOSURE RATINGS, OUTLINE AND SUPPORT POINT DIMENSIONS, WEIGHT, SERVICE CONDITION REQUIREMENTS, AND INSTALLED FEATURES. 1. SPDS WITH EMI/RFI FILTER: INCLUDE NOISE ATTENUATION PERFORMANCE. C. SHOP DRAWINGS: INCLUDE WIRING DIAGRAMS SHOWING ALL FACTORY AND FIELD CONNECTIONS WITH WIRE AND CIRCUIT BREAKER/FUSE SIZES. D. CERTIFICATES: MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTATION OF LISTING FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING STANDARDS: 1. UL 96A LISTING FILE INFORMATION FOR ALL SERVICE ENTRANCE SPDS 2. UL 1449. 3. UL 1283 (FOR TYPE 2 SPDS). E. PROVIDE VERIFICATION THAT THE SPD COMPLIES WITH THE REQUIRED ANSI/UL 1449 1. THIRD EDITION LISTING BY UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) OR OTHER NATIONALLY RECOGNIZED TESTING LABORATORY (NRTL). COMPLIANCE MAY BE IN THE FORM OF A FILE NUMBER THAT CAN BE VERIFIED ON UL'S WEBSITE OR ON ANY OTHER NRTL'S WEBSITE, S LONG AS THE WEBSITE CONTAINS THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION AT A MINIMUM: MODEL NUMBER, SPD TYPE, SYSTEM VOLTAGE, PHASES, MODES OF PROTECTION, VOLTAGE PROTECTION RATING (VPR) AND NOMINAL DISCHARGE CURRENT (IN). F. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL TEST REPORTS. G. MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS: INCLUDE APPLICATION CONDITIONS AND LIMITATIONS OF USE STIPULATED BY PRODUCT TESTING AGENCY. INCLUDE INSTRUCTIONS FOR STORAGE, HANDLING, PROTECTION, EXAMINATION, PREPARATION, AND INSTALLATION OF PRODUCT. H. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA: INCLUDE INFORMATION ON STATUS INDICATORS AND RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES AND INTERVALS. I. WARRANTY: SUBMIT SAMPLE OF MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY AND DOCUMENTATION OF FINAL EXECUTED WARRANTY COMPLETED IN OWNER S NAME AND REGISTERED WITH MANUFACTURER. J. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS: RECORD ACTUAL CONNECTIONS AND LOCATIONS OF SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES. 1.07QUALITY ASSURANCE A. CONFORM TO REQUIREMENTS OF NFPA 70 . B. MAINTAIN AT THE PROJECT SITE A COPY OF EACH REFERENCED DOCUMENT THAT PRESCRIBES EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS. C. MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS: COMPANY SPECIALIZING IN MANUFACTURING THE PRODUCTS SPECIFIED IN THIS SECTION WITH MINIMUM THREE YEARS DOCUMENTED EXPERIENCE. D. WHEN REQUESTED BY THE ENGINEER, AN ACCEPTABLE LIST OF INSTALLATIONS WITH SIMILAR EQUIPMENT SHALL BE PROVIDED DEMONSTRATING COMPLIANCE WITH THE ABOVE REQUIREMENT. 1.08DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. STORE IN A CLEAN, DRY SPACE IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS. 1.09FIELD CONDITIONS A. MAINTAIN FIELD CONDITIONS WITHIN MANUFACTURER'S REQUIRED SERVICE CONDITIONS DURING AND AFTER INSTALLATION. 1.10WARRANTY A. SEE SECTION 017800 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS FOR ADDITIONAL WARRANTY RE UIREMENTS. Q B. MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY: PROVIDE MINIMUM TEN YEAR WARRANTY FROM DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION COVERING REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES SHOWING EVIDENCE OF FAILURE DUE TO DEFECTIVE MATERIALS OR WORKMANSHIP. C. EXCLUDE SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FROM ANY CLAUSE LIMITING WARRANTY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ACTS OF NATURE, INCLUDING LIGHTNING, STATED ELSEWHERE. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. FIELD -INSTALLED EXTERNALLY MOUNTED SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES: 1. ADVANCED PROTECTION TECHNOLOGIES INC APT • : WWW.APTSURGE.COM. 2. POWERLOGIC, INC. 3. CURRENT TECHNOLOGY; A BRAND OF THOMAS & BETTS POWER SOLUTIONS: WWW.TNBPOW ERSOLUTIONS.COM. 4. GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY: WWW.GEINDUSTRIAL.COM. 5. SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC; SQUARE D BRAND SURGELOGIC PRODUCTS; WWW.SURGELOGIC.COM. 6. EATON CUTLER -HAMMER 7. SURGE SUPPRESSION, INC. 8. SIEMENS INDUSTRY, INC 9. LEA INTERNATIONAL PROTECTION TECHNOLOGY GROUP. B. THE LISTING OF SPECIFIC MANUFACTURERS ABOVE DOES NOT IMPLY ACCEPTANCE OF THEIR PRODUCTS THAT DO NOT MEET THE SPECIFIED RATINGS, FEATURES, AND FUNCTIONS. MANUFACTURERS LISTED ABOVE ARE NOT RELIEVED FROM MEETING THESE SPECIFICATIONS IN THEIR ENTIRETY. PRODUCTS IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE SPECIFICATION AND MANUFACTURED BY OTHERS NOT NAMED WILL BE CONSIDERED ONLY IF PRE -APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER TEN (10) DAYS PRIOR TO BID DATE. C. SOURCE LIMITATIONS: FURNISH SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES PRODUCED BY A SINGLE MANUFACTURER AND OBTAINED FROM A SINGLE SUPPLIER. 2.02 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. DESCRIPTION: FACTORY -ASSEMBLED SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES SPDS FOR 60 HZ SERVICE• LISTED CLASSIFIED, AND LABELED AS SUITABLE FOR THE PURPOSE INTENDED; SYSTEM VOLTAGE AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. B. THE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM SHALL INCORPORATE THERMALLY PROTECTED METAL -OXIDE VARISTORS (MOVS) OR OTHER APPROVED METHODS AS THE CORE SURGE SUPPRESSION COMPONENT FOR THE SERVICE ENTRANCE AND ALL OTHER DISTRIBUTION LEVELS. THE SYSTEM SHALL NOT UTILIZE ANY COMPONENTS THAT MAY CROWBAR THE SYSTEM VOLTAGE LEADING TO SYSTEM UPSET OR CREATE ANY ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDS C. SPDS WITH THE FOLLOWING FEATURES AND ACCESSORIES: 1. INTEGRAL DISCONNECT SWITCH. 2. INTERNAL THERMAL PROTECTION THAT DISCONNECTS THE SPD BEFORE DAMAGING INTERNAL SUPPRESSOR COMPONENTS. 3. INDICATOR LIGHT DISPLAY FOR PROTECTION STATUS. 4. FORM-C CONTACTS RATED AT 5 A AND 250-V AC ONE NORMALLY OPEN AND ONE NORMALLY CLOSED, FOR REMOTE MONITORING OF PROTECTION STATUS. CONTACTS SHALL REVERSE ON FAILURE OF ANY SURGE DIVERSION MODULE OR ON OPENING OF ANY CURRENT -LIMITING DEVICE. COORDINATE WITH BUILDING POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM. 5. SURGE COUNTER. D. PROTECTED MODES: 1. WYE SYSTEMS: L-N, L-G, N-G, L-L. E. UL 1449 VOLTAGE PROTECTION RATINGS VPRS : 1. 208Y/120V SYSTEM VOLTAGE: NOT MORE THAN 700 V FOR L-N, L-G, AND N-G MODES AND 1,200 V FOR L-L MODE. F. UL 1449 MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS OPERATING VOLTAGE (MCOV): NOT LESS THAN 115% OF NOMINAL SYSTEM VOLTAGE. G. PEAK SURGE CURRENT RATING: THE MINIMUM SINGLE -PULSE SURGE CURRENT WITHSTAND RATING PER PHASE SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 200 KA. THE PEAK SURGE CURRENT RATING SHALL BE THE ARITHMETIC SUM OF THE RATINGS OF THE INDIVIDUAL MOVS IN A GIVEN MODE. H. NOMINAL DISCHARGE CURRENT (IN) - ALL SPDS APPLIED TO THE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM SHALL HAVE A 20 KA IN RATING REGARDLESS OF THEIR SPD TYPE I C U ES TYP S 1 AND 2 OR OPERATING OL . N L D E V TAGE SPDS HAVING AN IN LESS THAN 20KA SHALL BE REJECTED. I. SCCR: EQUAL OR EXCEED 100 KA. J. SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 1. THE SPD SHALL MINIMIZE POTENTIAL ARC FLASH HAZARDS BY CONTAINING NO USER SERVICEABLE/REPLACEABLE PARTS AND SHALL BE MAINTENANCE FREE. SPDS CONTAINING ITEMS SUCH AS REPLACEABLE MODULES, REPLACEABLE FUSES, OR REPLACEABLE BATTERIES SHALL NOT BE ACCEPTED. SPDS REQUIRING ANY MAINTENANCE OF ANY SORT SUCH AS PERIODIC TIGHTENING OF CONNECTIONS SHALL NOT BE ACCEPTED. SPDS REQUIRING USER INTERVENTION TO TEST THE UNIT VIA A DIAGNOSTIC TEST KIT OR SIMILAR DEVICE SHALL NOT BE ACCEPTED. K. ENCLOSURE ENVIRONMENTTYPE PER NEMA 250: UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, AS SPECIFIED FOR THE FOLLOWING INSTALLATION LOCATIONS: 1. INDOOR CLEAN, DRY LOCATIONS: TYPE 1. L. MOUNTING FOR FIELD -INSTALLED, EXTERNALLY MOUNTED SPDS: UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, AS SPECIFIED FOR THE FOLLOWING LOCATIONS: 1. PROVIDE SURFACE -MOUNTED SPD WHERE MOUNTED IN NON-PUBLIC AREAS OR ADJACENT TO SURFACE -MOUNTED EQUIPMENT. 2. PROVIDE FLUSH -MOUNTED SPD WHERE MOUNTED IN PUBLIC AREAS OR ADJACENT TO FLUSH -MOUNTED EQUIPMENT. M. SYSTEM APPLICATION: 1. THE SPD APPLICATIONS COVERED UNDER THIS SECTION INCLUDE DISTRIBUTION AND BRANCH PANEL LOCATIONS, BUSWAY, MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS (MCC), SWITCHGEAR, AND SWITCHBOARD ASSEMBLIES. ALL SPDS SHALL BE TESTED AND DEMONSTRATE SUITABILITY FOR APPLICATION WITHIN ANSI/EEE C62.41 CATEGORY C, B, AND A ENVIRONMENTS. A. CATEGORY C SHALL BE USED FOR THE FOLLOWING: 1) SERVICE ENTRANCE, SWITCHGEAR, SWITCHBOARDS, AND MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS (MCC) B. CATEGORY B SHALL BE USED FOR THE FOLLOWING: 1) DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS, EMERGENCY SYSTEM PANELBOARDS, AND MEDICAL EQUIPMENT PANELBOARDS C. CATEGORY A SHALL BE USED FOR THE FOLLOWING: 1) LIGHTING PANELBOARDS, MAJOR MEDICAL EQUIPMENT, AND BUSWAYS 2. SURGE CURRENT CAPACITY - THE MINIMUM SURGE CURRENT CAPACITY THE DEVICE IS CAPABLE OF WITHSTANDING SHALL BE: A. CATEGORY C: 250 KA PER PHASE AND 125 KA PER MODE B. CATEGORY B: 160 KA PER PHASE AND 80 KA PER MODE C. CATEGORY A: 120 KA PER PHASE AND 60 KA PER MODE 3. SPD TYPE - ALL SPDS INSTALLED ON THE LINE SIDE OF THE SERVICE ENTRANCE DISCONNECT SHALL BE TYPE 1 SPDS. ALL SPDS INSTALLED ON THE LOAD SIDE OF THE SERVICE ENTRANCE DISCONNECT SHALL BE TYPE 1 OR TYPE 2 SPDS. 2.03 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR SERVICE ENTRANCE LOCATIONS A. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, PROVIDE FIELD -INSTALLED, EXTERNALLY MOUNTED OR FACTORY -INSTALLED, INTERNALLY MOUNTED SPDS. B. LOCATE THE SPD ON THE LOAD SIDE OF THE MAIN DISCONNECT DEVICE, AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE TO THE PHASE CONDUCTORS AND THE GROUND/NEUTRAL BAR. C. THE SPD MAY BE INTEGRAL TO SWITCHGEAR, SWITCHBOARD, MCC, AND/OR BUS PLUG AS A FACTORY STANDARDIZED DESIGN. D. AN EXTERNAL MOUNTED SPD SHALL HAVE A PROPERLY SIZED CIRCUIT BREAKER MOUNTED AS IN PARAGRAPH 2.03(B) AND BE CONNECTED USING A LOW IMPEDANCE, FLEXIBLE, MULTI -CONDUCTOR CABLE SUPPLIED BY THE SPD MANUFACTURER AND DESIGNED FOR USE WITH SPDS. THE LENGTH SHALL BE AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE AND SHALL NOT EXCEED 36 INCHES WITHOUT APPROVAL FROM THE ENGINEER. E. LIST AND LABEL AS COMPLYING WITH UL 1449, TYPE 1 WHEN CONNECTED ON LINE SIDE OF SERVICE DISCONNECT OVERCURRENT DEVICE AND TYPE 1 OR 2 WHEN CONNECTED ON LOAD SIDE OF SERVICE DISCONNECT OVERCURRENT DEVICE. F. PROVIDE SPDS UTILIZING FIELD -REPLACEABLE MODULAR OR NON -MODULAR PROTECTION CIRCUITS. G. SURGE CURRENT RATING: NOT LESS THAN 120 KA PER MODE/240 KA PER PHASE. H. REPETITIVE SURGE CURRENT CAPACITY: NOT LESS THAN 5,000 IMPULSES. I. UL 1449 NOMINAL DISCHARGE CURRENT (I-N): 20 KA. J. UL 1449 SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT RATING (SCCR): NOT LESS THAN THE AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT AT THE INSTALLED LOCATION AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. K. EMI RFI FILTERING: PROVIDE EMI RFI FILTER TO ATTENUATE L 1 E ECTR CAL NOISE• LISTED AS COMPLYING WITH UL 1283 FOR TYPE 2 SPDS (UL 1283 LISTING NOT AVAILABLE FOR TYPE 1 SPDS). 1. NOISE ATTENUATION: NOT LESS THAN 40 DB AT 100 KHZ USING MIL-STD-220 INSERTION LOSS TEST METHOD. L. ALL MONITORING AND DIAGNOSTIC FEATURES SHALL BE VISIBLE FROM THE FRONT OF THE EQUIPMENT. M. DIAGNOSTICS: 1. PROTECTION STATUS MONITORING: PROVIDE INDICATOR LIGHTS TO REPORT THE PROTECTION FOR EACH PHASE. 2. ALARM NOTIFICATION: PROVIDE INDICATOR LIGHT AND AUDIBLE ALARM TO REPORT ALARM CONDITION. PROVIDE BUTTON TO MANUALLY SILENCE AUDIBLE ALARM. 3. REMOTE STATUS MONITORING: PROVIDE FORM C DRY TYPE CONTACTS (NORMALLY OPEN AND NORMALLY CLOSED) FOR REMOTE ANNUNCIATION OF STATUS. 4. SURGE COUNTER: PROVIDE SURGE EVENT COUNTER WITH MANUAL RESET BUTTON, SURGE COUNT RETENTION UPON POWER LOSS, AND SIX DIGIT LCD DISPLAY THAT INDICATES QUANTITY OF SURGE EVENTS. N. PROVIDE SURGE RATED INTEGRAL DISCONNECT SWITCH FOR SPDS NOT CONNECTED TO A DEDICATED CIRCUIT BREAKER OR FUSED SWITCH OR NOT DIRECT BUS CONNECTED. 2.04 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR DISTRIBUTION LOCATIONS A. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, PROVIDE FIELD -INSTALLED, EXTERNALLY MOUNTED OR FACTORY -INSTALLED, INTERNALLY MOUNTED SPDS. B. LIST AND LABEL AS COMPLYING WITH UL 1449, TYPE 1 OR TYPE 2. C. THE SPD SHALL NOT LIMITTHE USE OF THROUGH -FEED LUGS, SUB -FEED BREAKER OPTIONS. D. SPDS SHALL BE INSTALLED IMMEDIATELY FOLLOWING THE LOAD SIDE OF THE MAIN BREAKER. SPDS INSTALLED IN MAIN LUG ONLY PANELBOARDS SHALL BE INSTALLED IMMEDIATELY FOLLOWING THE INCOMING MAIN LUGS. E. THE PANELBOARD SHALL BE CAPABLE OF RE -ENERGIZING UPON REMOVAL OF THE SPD. F. THE SPD SHALL BE INTERFACED TO THE PANELBOARD VIA A DIRECT BUS BAR CONNECTION. ALTERNATELY, AN SPD CONNECTED TO A PROPERLY SIZED CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR DISCONNECTING PURPOSES AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTION MAY BE INSTALLED USING SHORT LENGTHS OF CONDUCTORS AS LONG AS THE CONDUCTORS ORIGINATE INTEGRALLY TO THE SPD. THE SPD SHALL BE LOCATED DIRECTLY ADJACENT TO THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. G. AN EXTERNAL MOUNTED SPD SHALL HAVE A PROPERLY SIZED CIRCUIT BREAKER MOUNTED AS IN PARAGRAPH 2.04(E) AND BE CONNECTED USING A LOW IMPEDANCE, FLEXIBLE, MULTI -CONDUCTOR CABLE SUPPLIED BY THE SPD MANUFACTURER AND DESIGNED FOR USE WITH SPDS. H. SIDEMOUNT MOUNTING APPLICATIONS INSTALLATION (SPD MOUNTED EXTERNAL TO ELECTRICAL ASSEMBLY) 1. THE LENGTH SHALL BE AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE AND SHALL NOT EXCEED 36 INCHES, LINEAR LENGTH OR 72" CIRCUIT LENGTH, WITHOUT APPROVAL FROM THE ENGINEER. MINIMUM SIZE SHALL BE #10 AWG. LENGTHS LONGER THAN 36" SHALL BE SIZED TO PROVIDE THE EQUIVALENT IMPEDANCE OF #10 AWG AT 36". 2. ANY EXCESS CONDUCTOR LENGTH SHALL BE TRIMMED IN ORDER TO MINIMIZE LET THROUGH VOLTAGE. THE INSTALLER SHALL COMPLY WITH THE MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATION INSTALLATION AND WIRING PRACTICES. 1. PROVIDE SPDS UTILIZING FIELD -REPLACEABLE MODULAR OR NON -MODULAR PROTECTION CIRCUITS. J. SURGE CURRENT RATING: NOT LESS THAN 80 KA PER MODE/160 KA PER PHASE. K. REPETITIVE SURGE CURRENT CAPACITY: NOT LESS THAN 3,500 IMPULSES. L. UL 1449 NOMINAL DISCHARGE CURRENT (I-N): 20 KA. M. UL 1449 SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT RATING (SCCR): NOT LESS THAN THE AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT AT THE INSTALLED LOCATION AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. N. EMI/RFI FILTERING: PROVIDE EMI/RFI FILTER TO ATTENUATE ELECTRICAL NOISE; LISTED AS COMPLYING WITH UL 1283 FOR TYPE 2 SPDS UL 1283 LISTING NOT AVAILABL F ( E OR TYPE 1 SPDS). 1. NOISE ATTENUATION: NOT LESS THAN 40 DB AT 100 KHZ USING MIL-STD-220 INSERTION LOSS TEST METHOD. 0. DIAGNOSTICS: 1. PROTECTION STATUS MONITORING: PROVIDE INDICATOR LIGHTS TO REPORT THE PROTECTION STATUS FOR EACH PHASE. 2. ALARM NOTIFICATION: PROVIDE INDICATOR LIGHT AND AUDIBLE ALARM TO REPORT ALARM CONDITION. PROVIDE BUTTON TO MANUALLY SILENCE AUDIBLE ALARM. 3. REMOTE STATUS MONITORING: PROVIDE FORM C DRY TYPE CONTACTS (NORMALLY OPEN AND NORMALLY CLOSED FOR REMOTE ANNUNCIATION OF S ) TATUS. 4. SURGE COUNTER: PROVIDE SURGE EVENT COUNTER WITH MANUAL RESET BUTTON, SURGE COUNT RETENTION UPON POWER LOSS, AND SIX DIGIT LCD DISPLAY THAT INDICATES QUANTITY OF SURGE EVENTS. P. PROVIDE SURGE RATED INTEGRAL DISCONNECT SWITCH FOR SPDS NOT CONNECTED TO A DEDICATED CIRCUIT BREAKER OR FUSED SWITCH OR NOT DIRECT BUS CONNECTED. 2.05 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR BRANCH PANELBOARD LOCATIONS A. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, PROVIDE FIELD -INSTALLED, EXTERNALLY MOUNTED OR FACTORY -INSTALLED, INTERNALLY MOUNTED SPDS. B. LIST AND LABEL AS COMPLYING WITH UL 1449, TYPE 1 OR TYPE 2. C. PROVIDE SPDS UTILIZING FIELD -REPLACEABLE MODULAR OR NON -MODULAR PROTECTION CIRCUITS. D. SURGE CURRENT RATING: NOT LESS THAN 60 KA PER MODE/120 KA PER PHASE. E. UL 1449 NOMINAL DISCHARGE CURRENT (I-N): 20 KA. F. UL 1449 SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT RATING (SCCR): NOT LESS THAN THE AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT AT THE INSTALLED LOCATION AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. G. EMI/RFI FILTERING: PROVIDE EMI/RFI FILTER TO ATTENUATE ELECTRICAL NOISE; LISTED AS COMPLYING WITH UL 1283 FOR TYPE 2 SPDS (UL 1283 LISTING NOT AVAILABLE FOR TYPE 1 SPDS). 1. NOISE ATTENUATION: NOT LESS THAN 40 DB AT 100 KHZ USING MIL-STD-220 INSERTION LOSS TEST METHOD. H. DIAGNOSTICS: 1. PROTECTION STATUS MONITORING: PROVIDE INDICATOR LIGHTS TO REPORT THE PROTECTION STATUS. 2. ALARM NOTIFICATION: PROVIDE INDICATOR LIGHT AND AUDIBLE ALARM TO REPORT ALARM CONDITION. PROVIDE BUTTON TO MANUALLY SILENCE AUDIBLE ALARM. 3. REMOTE STATUS MONITORING: PROVIDE FORM C DRY TYPE CONTACT S (NORMALLY OPEN AND NORMALLY CLOSED) FOR REMOTE ANNUNCIATION OF STATUS. 4. SURGE COUNTER: PROVIDE SURGE EVENT COUNTER WITH MANUAL RESET BUTTON, SURGE COUNT RETENTION UPON P OWER LOSS, AND SIX DIGIT LCD DISPLAY THAT INDICATES QUANTITY OF SURGE EVENTS. I. PROVIDE SURGE RATED INTEGRAL DISCONNECT SWITCH FOR SPDS NOT CONNECTED TO A DEDICATED CIRCUIT BREAKER OR FUSED SWITCH OR NOT DIRECT BUS CONNECTED. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. VERIFY THAT FIELD MEASUREMENTS ARE AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. B. VERIFY THAT THE SERVICE VOLTAGE AND CONFIGURATION MARKED ON THE SPD ARE CONSISTENT WITH THE SERVICE VOLTAGE AND CONFIGURATION AT THE LOCATION TO BE INSTALLED. C. VERIFY THAT ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IS READY TO ACCEPT CONNECTION OF THE SPD AND THAT INSTALLED OVERCURRENT DEVICE IS CONSISTENT WITH REQUIREMENTS OF THE DRAWINGS AND MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. D. VERIFY SYSTEM GROUNDING AND BONDING IS IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 260526, INCLUDING BONDING OF NEUTRAL AND GROUND FOR SERVICE ENTRANCE AND SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS WHERE APPLICABLE. DO NOT ENERGIZE SPD UNTIL DEFICIENCIES HAVE BEEN CORRECTED. E. VERIFY THAT CONDITIONS ARE SATISFACTORY FOR INSTALLATION PRIOR TO STARTING WORK. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. PERFORM WORK IN A NEAT AND WORKMANLIKE MANNER IN ACCORDANCE WITH NECA 1 . B. INSTALL SPD IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. C. USE CRIMPED CONNECTORS AND SPLICES ONLY. WIRE NUTS ARE UNACCEPTABLE. D. ARRANGE EQUIPMENTTO PROVIDE MINIMUM CLEARANCES IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS AND NFPA 70 . E. PROVIDE CONDUCTORS WITH MINIMUM AMPACITY AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS, AS REQUIRED BY NFPA 70, AND NOT LESS THAN MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED MINIMUM CONDUCTOR SIZE. F. INSTALL CONDUCTORS BETWEEN SPD AND EQUIPMENT TERMINATIONS AS SHORT AND STRAIGHT AS POSSIBLE, NOT EXCEEDING MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED MAXIMUM CONDUCTOR LENGTH. BREAKER LOCATIONS MAY BE REASONABLY REARRANGED IN ORDER TO PROVIDE LEADS AS SHORT AND STRAIGHT AS POSSIBLE. TWIST CONDUCTORS TOGETHER TO REDUCE INDUCTANCE. G. DO NOT ENERGIZE SPD UNTIL BONDING OF NEUTRAL AND GROUND FOR SERVICE ENTRANCE AND SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS IS COMPLETE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 260526 WHERE APPLICABLE. REPLACE SPDS DAMAGED BY IMPROPER OR MISSING NEUTRAL -GROUND BOND. H. DISCONNECT SPD PRIOR TO PERFORMING ANY HIGH POTENTIAL TESTING. REPLACE SPDS DAMAGED BY PERFORMING HIGH POTENTIAL TESTING WITH SPD CONNECTED. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. SEE SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS, FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. B. PERFORM INSPECTION, TESTING, AND ADJUSTING IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 014000. PREPARE TEST AND INSPECTION REPORTS. C. INSPECT AND TEST IN ACCORDANCE WITH NETA ATS, EXCEPT SECTION 4. D. PERFORM INSPECTIONS AND TESTS LISTED IN NETA ATS SECTION 7.19.1. E. PROCURE SERVICES OF A QUALIFIED MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE TO OBSERVE INSTALLATION AND ASSIST IN INSPECTION, TESTING, AND ADJUSTING. INCLUDE MANUFACTURER'S REPORTS WITH FIELD QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS. F. PERFORM THE FOLLOWING TESTS AND INSPECTIONS WITH THE ASSISTANCE OF A FACTORY -AUTHORIZED SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE. 1. COMPARE EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE DATA FOR COMPLIANCE WITH DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 2. INSPECT ANCHORAGE, ALIGNMENT, GROUNDING, AND CLEARANCES. 3. VERIFY THAT DISCONNECTING MEANS AND FEEDER SIZE AND MAXIMUM LENGTH TO TVSS CORRESPONDS TO APPROVED SHOP DRAWINGS. 4. VERIFY THAT ELECTRICAL WIRING INSTALLATION COMPLIES WITH MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. 5. VACUUM -CLEAN ENCLOSURE INTERIOR. CLEAN ENCLOSURE EXTERIOR. 6. VERIFY THE CORRECT OPERATION OF ALL SENSING DEVICES, ALARMS, AND INDICATING DEVICES. G. AN SPD WILL BE CONSIDERED DEFECTIVE IF IT DOES NOT PASS TESTS AND INSPECTIONS. H. AFTER COMPLETION OF ACCEPTANCE CHECKS AND TESTS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SHOW BY DEMONSTRATION IN SERVICE THAT THE SPD ARE IN GOOD OPERATING CONDITION AND PROPERLY PERFORMING THE INTENDED FUNCTION. 3.04 CLEANING A. REPAIR SCRATCHED OR MARRED EXTERIOR SURFACES TO MATCH ORIGINAL FACTORY FINISH. END OF SECTION Z c I- q* q* O �L O O 0) � � 4) O O O O Ln Q Z Q C V u_ m m Z Ln Ln ti 2 N N r- I,- WO � uJ x u m W_ W W 0 i LL H � Z Z O W H zM Ir a WW w Z_ m E n IL N a N I0 - M t Q w u o n OC Z M M J M W C N L - � O L a, a LL a u - 4- Z 10 O d' M xLLJ 3 Ln u W (D N m d 00 - Q � V v) mi x w x a W N W = o O w Z O W Z Q -p �M LA M m W rn V V � =- 0 a a i o li. W4+ 0, Vf w 2 L a M= - t L z Q M N \`\\�1111111111/// \\\�o�G�CEWIS ✓Oyu ���. \ t` . \GENSF . `r0 i ` : � 2 _ � No 38680 3 - �Q' STATE OF I� T�. -1 s • '��ORIDP G�?� i� s� \� //111111110o George Johnson, P.E. PE38680 ISSUE DATE: 10/19/2018 PROJECT NUMBER: 2847 REVISIONS: NO. DATE DESCRIPTION ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS E5.6 TO THE BEST OF THE ENGINEERS KNOWLEDGE, THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS COMPLY WITH THE APPLICABLE MINIMUM BUILDING CODES AND THE APPLICABLE FIRE -SAFETY STANDARDS AS DETERMINED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY IN ACCORDANCE WITH CHAPTER 553.79 AND CHAPTER 633, FLORIDA STATUTES. © 2018 APG ENGINEERING Ldo Y Q u u }m co C3 ZLLI Yo cc _W oua � • � T I� _ � : FGE {r����N����� Il�� Ii�I��E#E�EEIE��EE ■■rirE��i �49,AkH■����IlAlr�rr•�I�����l�r• :#.I ;Efrl�� i1.�i�tl"�ltiil�0lt'9� E��iiMlrriiir•Atwlir.�rlrwl�Ei®a�REi �I E.•���1• >Ei.E III■�I■■■■1■8■■■III ■r8■ WIN li■14`li 111i =11 ■■ � .a■ ■■■�31 ra■■w■■ ■■8l1 1• ■■!It Spectra lil��■■1■■1 I��t■��I��l�!r/l •, 11���■lna�s< ■.�Ia�Ir�li Settings Phase MAX *slim rrrr., ..���...qr lMrrEEII�rMrr�rErEr�#rri�,,,, rrsrrrmrr•!■arrr��- -. pia tHP.1%, r.7 . E�l,�.■IrrrErElrrrE�ErE�wwMEr■r■rrlEi■rfErNw.r�..E 100 rrrru�rrr�rs�rarrr�rra GE li�mmo ■ ■� 1 � .■1n1.1 li Type SGI IA, Spectra RMS .,•r��rrnrrr // _■�.r■ r - 1 ►sr■rrrr.rrrr m �rrE r..NM �. ARE IN SERIES ..NN11 a 1���1�INit �II1111�11 . Satt,ings Phase , Er •rs�rrr• rrrrrr• •w����� rr i .�rrrrE;Rwrr■ rrrr-�r- •nrrr� iLRGI" - ri•_�l�rEi�l����rfirNi rir■rr■rrr■IEr■■■E■IlrGE "-'i�EYdlldrE�rr•���irtlrr• rrrrrrr�rrrr■■rr■■i■r■rnr��r • li•�..■■■/�I1s1 . ■�ai31■##III■■■#li lypeS,nr■■r■■■rrr�lrrrr�r��l-:I■r�r■�a M61" mom c Illlllll�mr■llill Trip 360.0 A MI�y111�11■ Settings Piase 1 Elio 1111,1 1111111: ■ 111 5111111 I ua w ��4i� somiE �� =a1■N i��r■■rrNr Is SON r�"E�"�rr�r m ire rr■r w"�i�ll"r�""�' � .�i��r�r wN �i'in man rrl�i� I mill 'Mill l#� MINI ■■ii 1'#�'�1■■i11 �� ■ � il l 0, V,"llM 1� 11 MEN E mill I•.a.�erwM.rr�arrr Ili��i■�■I��N■■111� gill momillio si- Mill _IEE: ■.®EE •ri aA....El...ai�Erl.r.i.r.il � . • ■.■ �� E!r rr ... eri+re ■r•...! wrap .■.EE ■rrrE..rr .■r■�rrEE21*1r.Efrr■.■�MilE gal .r�'E _�■rrr,�i�REE�i■rrr'E�irrrarr.E! ■■ill ..■■til#��..Nl.l�i..■■Ilu.■� ;:■.■;�� 111�1•../■Illti ■ 11 .1■■ltllli®..1�1� .. Iill! ■ 311111>■.■i■i{11 �l` 111 ��■hill oil milliill�mmommI�mmE lily Y ■1 MEN NUZZ 1�■ � 1111 mill 1���� �I oil11 ■ � 11 _ CURRENT IN AMPERES - _$31G ..,. .v Al 5,: rr�rr•r�wrwr�wwrw�r•ww�arr••r•� rr.��_��_r•�rrrrassi �rw��r.r•rwrrrri�rs�wrr�r�rr �� z rrr.irre• s.srrf�•r_r•rirrrrr.[• GE no.� m.mairn.r l==Mongol ammo1r » • li/���■!illy �-�■■■N�t■■Il.11i A PROTECTION IS 111 Plug 1600.0• - Settings Phase IGENERATOR LTPJ r • ��'■�'�� 1�1�■ r •■Irr, rIrlr.. rEr urn arrE.EswsEE�.rrlr....E.ErI �■rrrr■■■Ifur■rr■Ii■rslrn ' Ilia■ : Illy■�Iill�■�lll F oil 11111 �n•r_ a��•rr_r_r•� a,,,Wnisr•�r• aX raa�r.r.rrr ar• 1.r1<1i� ■rrlrrrrrr�■r■1rrE■arElrEr nr.•rir r•rr■r■r!■■8 trr9�rr r ■I■rr■■i at ,iEE�■1■■rl■■est wool gill mom 11 1MM in MEN aL 'ry■■■I■!oil r■■1�111` rA ■••wr� w�kN w•r•r•.�t�.wrr�rrrrri�r�la*��r•�rwr����s�■.�; rr_.r�r�rrr �rl�rrf resort irMrlrlE[MRM1r1Mt#P M , LrMrN� rMAMMN Er � i � ■ EE ��iE����arrEEr�rr■Eaiarr/EtilM =nmmoErf■M `Ei�rlrM ■�/E���■■�It���■alf.��■/�9I119•��01.�#91i■ . a■■�ar■aEIOt ■111 �..■ill#��.■■■■��■#� ■##1�1�a■■/■I6# =i�t■■�##1 1��111111���11�[11 .�11�1� SS ' Trip 2000.0 A riwre•wrr•rr••r�rr•►�nr.rrr,rrrr•r�•rrr�wrrta•ra•r�+rwr it ME .�ea�r�wrrir.rrwirr�•wr•rw.r •ra�r•rrr�rr•I <arr•�•��t• MEN siii�'' 1■f.��...##1�-...■■IN�I.1 ■■��■■�Illl�l•1•■■illla•l ■..�##II, MvN 11��111111���11111� 5 { r S z y. .s: TCC Name: SWBD Reference Voltage 209 �I November 9, 2018 Y1+ i+ V, -V 0 =Wl4 f8 CURRENT IN AMPERES 31G IM, 2 V Zj rn m Z DUCE z OENERGY. August 29, 2018 Location: 38130 PRETTY -POND RD ZEPHYRHILLS, FL 33540 Transformer ID: 7892680 Good Afternoon: We are providing the following information based upon your request for the available short circuit current. Duke Energy provides the maximum short circuit current based on infinite buss on the source side of the supply transformer and minimum transformer impedance for the size and voltage installed. The short circuit current value provided would be the utility design maximum fault current available based upon a bolted fault at the point of delivery. The calculated maximum available short circuit current requested at the point of delivery for the above referenced service location is as follows: (Short Circuit current in RMS symmetrical Amperes) Three-phase 23,800 ABC (Line -line -line fault) Transformer Information: Transformer KVA 1 300 j KVA Transformer Voltage 1 120/208 1 Transformer percent impedance 3.50 %Z Transformer X/R ratio 5.1 X/R Kind Regards, Lillian Marcano Engineering Design Associate 1 Distribution Farce (1DF) - Duke Energy Florida Office: (727) 562 - 3903 PIOY US, 201N 1U:24:lb `**}** � �•*{ F A U L T A N A L Y S I S S U N M A R Y FAKE 38 ME WJAF A+OLTAGE AVAILABLE FAULT 0I2ENT L-L 3 PMSE X/R LINE/G10uD X/f1 ATS-E 2D8. 9025.1 12. 9 8 2 .2 9 5 3 2. 1 1 ATS-L 2D8. 22821.0 4,3 15317-35 4.4 ATS-LSW-E 208. 7629.6 3.6 7355.84 3.4 ATS L81►1' L 208. 16504.4 2.0 11289.52 2.4 ATS-LSAT-N 208. 16504.4 2.0 11289.52 2.4 ATS-N 208. 22821.1 4.3 15317.37 4.4 NtYI-GENMIUF* 208. 9240.9 20.0 9240.86 20.0 PNL-HP1B 208. 11933.5 1.4 8400.47 1.7 PAL.-HP1D 2D8. 9978.6 1.0 7261.50 1.2 PNL -HP IE 208. 14509.3 1.3 10230.39 1.6 "L-HSPA 208. 1727D.2 2.2 11764.45 2.5 PNI_WA 239- 13037-5 1.8 9017-57 2.1 ft-LSMP 2D. 16199.9 2.0 11D98.70 2.3 SAW 208. 18251.3 2.5 12421.72 2.8 M-KIPA 208. 18172.0 2.4 12332.40 2.7 SVBD-M 208. 13682.9 2.0 9411.58 2.3 UTIL 208, 2380D.0 5.1 15946.00 5.1 FAJ_II T APIA. YSTS RFP7f1'f C2JAIPI FTFCt 0 L o cn a Ln Z C U V - M M - Z Ln u1 4J It N N ti ul2 ��X 0 LL U, ° W Z _UA Z 0 H 0 Z LULLI It LL. z m N J a N 00 - M a U LO Lo r_ H Z m rn u aV Co LAJ ° Q L. u L L Z tk M 1 i L 3 w Ln LY d NCu N qT u Q oc a W N W O O cc Z o W Z Q -p �M Y rn M W V � a -a . W L a 0 Ms L Z a MN SEW IS �� �"�CENSF••• `r0� �. No 38680 • CV Qom•• STATE OF �<!/ i � •'•.FCORIDP.•'•G� � //'SS/ONA�� \\``�� ���/11111����\ George Johnson, P.E. PE38680 ISSUE DATE: 10/19/2018 PROJECT NUMBER: 2847 REVISIONS: NO. DATE DESCRIPTION ELECTRICAL COORDINATION STUDY AND FAULT CURRENT STUDY TO THE BEST OF THE ENGINEERS KNOWLEDGE, THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS COMPLY WITH THE APPLICABLE MINIMUM BUILDING CODES AND THE APPLICABLE FIRE -SAFETY STANDARDS AS DETERMINED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY IN ACCORDANCE WITH CHAPTER 553.79 AND CHAPTER 633, FLORIDA STATUTES. 0 2018 APG ENGINEERING E601 Q u m FW co a ZLu� X H V Z z = cr 0 V a. PLUMBING DEMOLITION NOTES 1. SPECIFIC DEMOLITION NOTES ARE NOT TO BE CONSIDERED ALL INCLUSIVE OR COMPLETE IN THEMSELVES. THE PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL DEMOLITION INCIDENTAL TO OR REQUIRED FOR NEW AND RENOVATED CONSTRUCTION WHETHER OR NOT SPECIFICALLY NOTED AND INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE FOLLOWING: REMOVAL OF PLUMBING FIXTURES, TRIM, SUPPLIES, VALVES, RELATED PIPING, ETC. THAT MIGHT REASONABLY BE REQUIRED TO BE REMOVED IN PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION OF NEW CONSTRUCTION, SPECIFIED FIXTURES OR OTHER EQUIPMENT REQUIRING PLUMBING. 2. DEMOLITION SHALL BE PERFORMED IN SUCH A MANNER THAT WILL NOT DAMAGE ADJOINING SURFACES OR EQUIPMENT INDICATED TO REMAIN. 3. WHERE DEMOLITION WOULD AFFECT THE STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY OF THE BUILDING, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH DEMOLITION. 4. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY AND COORDINATE WITH THE HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION IN WRITING 10 DAYS IN ADVANCE OF ANY AND ALL UTILITY/SYSTEM SERVICE INTERRUPTIONS. 5. TEMPORARY SYSTEMS: THE EXISTING SYSTEMS OPERATION SHALL BE MAINTAINED IN RENOVATED AND ADJACENT AREAS UNTIL THE NEW SYSTEMS ARE OPERATIONAL. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL INCLUDE IN HIS BID ALL COSTS ASSOCIATED WITH KEEPING THE EXISTING SYSTEMS ON LINE. THESE COSTS SHALL INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO, THE FOLLOWING: A. TEMPORARY NATURAL GAS PIPING PLUMBING MATERIAL SPECIFICATION 1. GAS PIPING SHALL BE SCHEDULE 40 BLACK STEEL PIPE WITH 125 PSI BLACK MALLEABLE IRON FITTINGS. GAS PIPING 2-1/2" AND LARGER SHALL BE WELDED, 2" AND SMALLER SHALL BE SCREWED. 2. PLUG VALVES 2" AND SMALLER: SHALL BE LUBRICATED, QUARTER TURN, 200 PSI CWP, CAST IRON BODY AND PLUG, THREADED ENDS, AND BE APPROVED FOR USE IN NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS. 3. PLUG VALVES 2-1/2" AND LARGER: SHALL BE LUBRICATED, QUARTER TURN, 200 PSI CWP, CAST IRON BODY AND PLUG, FLANGED ENDS, AND BE APPROVED FOR USE IN NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS. 4. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS SUBMIT AN ELECTRONIC COPY OF SHOP DRAWINGS OR LITERATURE ON THE FOLLOWING ITEMS- PLUMBING FIXTURES, WATER HEATERS, EXPANSION TANKS, VALVES, INSULATION, PUMPS, WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS, PIPING, AND FITTINGS. G JC U T )LY NOTE: CONNECT TO EQUIPMENT USING SEMI -RIGID METALLIC TUBING AND FITTINGS. TUBING LENGTH SHALL NOT EXCEED 6'. NATURAL GAS EQUIPMENT CONNECTION NOT TO SCALE PLUMBING GENERAL NOTES 1. SPECIFICATIONS, SYMBOLS LIST, ABBREVIATIONS AND DETAILS ARE APPLICABLE TO ALL DRAWINGS MARKED P. 2. THESE DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC AND ARE INTENDED TO DEPICT THE GENERAL LOCATION OF PLUMBING SYSTEM COMPONENTS. DO NOT SCALE THESE DRAWINGS. CONSULT ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR PROPER DIMENSIONS AND EXACT LOCATION OF PLUMBING EQUIPMENT. 3. BEFORE SUBMITTING A BID CAREFULLY STUDY THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. CAREFULLY EXAMINE THE PREMISES AND ANY EXISTING WORK. DETERMINE, IN ADVANCE, THE METHODS OF INSTALLING AND CONNECTING THE APPARATUS, THE MEANS TO BE PROVIDED FOR GETTING THE EQUIPMENT INTO PLACE, AND BECOME THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR WITH ALL OF THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE CONTRACT. 4. ALL PLUMBING WORK SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE 2017 EDITION OF THE FLORIDA BUILDING CODE INCLUDING ALL SUPPLEMENTS, THE 2014 EDITION OF THE GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION OF HOSPITAL AND HEALTH CARE FACILITIES, AND ALL APPLICABLE STATE AND LOCAL CODES, RULES AND REGULATIONS. IN CASE OF DIFFERENCES THE MOST STRINGENT SHALL GOVERN. 5. NO WORK SHALL BE INSTALLED IN VIOLATION OF ANY GOVERNING CODES. ANY WORK SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS WHICH IS IN VIOLATION OF SUCH CODES SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AND THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE AND SHALL BE RESOLVED PRIOR TO THE INSTALLATION OF THE WORK INVOLVED. 6. ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS SHOWN ARE TAKEN FROM EXISTING DRAWINGS AND FIELD SURVEYS. NEITHER ACCURACY NOR COMPLETION OF LOCATIONS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS IS GUARANTEED. DETERMINE EXACT LOCATIONS OF EXISTING SYSTEMS/UTILITIES IN FIELD, WHETHER OR NOT SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. MAKE ALL NECESSARY MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING CONDITIONS TO PERFORM WORK OF THIS SECTION. THIS SHALL INCLUDE, BUT NOT BE LIMITED TO, OFFSETTING EXISTING PIPING AND MODIFICATIONS REQUIRED FOR COORDINATION WITH ALL OTHER TRADES. 7. VERIFY SIZES, LOCATIONS, INVERTS AND ELEVATIONS PRIOR TO RUNNING ANY PIPING. 8. STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS SHALL NOT BE CUT, DRILLED OR MODIFIED IN ANY MANNER WITHOUT THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER'S REVIEW AND APPROVAL. 9. OBTAIN AND PAY FOR ALL PERMITS ASSOCIATED WITH THIS PROJECT AND ARRANGE FOR ALL REQUIRED INSPECTIONS BY THE APPROPRIATE LOCAL AUTHORITIES. 10. SEAL ALL EXISTING AND NEW FLOOR/ROOF/WALL PENETRATIONS AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN INTEGRITY OF LISTED ASSEMBLY AND PROVIDE SLEEVE WHERE REQUIRED. 11. FURNISH ANY MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS NORMALLY USED, SPECIFICALLY MENTIONED OR NOT, TO RENDER A COMPLETE INSTALLATION. 12. MANUFACTURER'S MODEL NUMBERS ARE SPECIFIED SOLELY TO ESTABLISH STANDARDS OF QUALITY FOR PERFORMANCE AND MATERIALS. SUBMIT LITERATURE FOR ALL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS TO THE ENGINEER OF RECORD FOR APPROVAL. 13. PRODUCT INSTALLATION SHALL ADHERE TO MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. 14. REVIEW ALL APPLICABLE MANUFACTURERS' INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS/REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO STARTING WORK. ALL WORK SHALL ADHERE TO THE MANUFACTURERS' REQUIREMENTS. IF A CONFLICT EXISTS BETWEEN THE DESIGN DOCUMENTS AND MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS, THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ENGINEER PRIOR TO STARTING WORK. 15. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN A FULL SET OF ALL EQUIPMENT VENDOR DRAWINGS AND COORDINATE THESE PLANS WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS PRIOR TO STARTING CONSTRUCTION. ANY DISCREPANCIES NOTED BETWEEN EQUIPMENT VENDOR PLANS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS SHALL BE IDENTIFIED AND BROUGHT THE ENGINEER'S ATTENTION PRIOR TO COMMENCING WORK. 16. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, ALL PLUMBING FIXTURES, VALVES, PIPING, INSULATION, ETC SHALL BE FIRST QUALITY. THE REUSE OF EXISTING FIXTURES, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES IS PROHIBITED. 17. A DIELECTRIC UNION SHALL BE USED TO JOIN ANY DISSIMILAR MATERIALS. 18. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND REQUIREMENTS OF ALL PLUMBING EQUIPMENT WITH THE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS AND SHALL FURNISH EQUIPMENT WIRED FOR THE VOLTAGES SHOWN HEREIN. 19. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THIS CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE THEIR WORK WITH THAT OF ALL OTHER TRADES INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ELECTRICAL, HVAC, PLUMBING, FIRE PROTECTION, TELECOM, STRUCTURAL, CIVIL, AND GENERAL ARCHITECTURE. THIS SHALL INCLUDE PROVIDING SUFFICIENT SPACE TO MEET ALL OTHER TRADE CLEARANCE REQUIREMENT. 20. GUARANTEE ALL PARTS AND LABOR FOR ONE YEAR FROM DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE. 21. ALL PIPING, EQUIPMENT, AND VALVES SHALL BE IDENTIFIED IN A MANNER THAT ALLOWS FOR EASY IDENTIFICATION. PIPING SHALL BE LABELED TO IDENTIFY CONTENTS AND DIRECTION OF FLOW. 22. ALL PIPING VALVES AND ACCESSORIES SERVING EQUIPMENT SHALL BE INSTALLED IN A MANNER AS TO ALLOW SERVICING AND/OR REMOVAL WITHOUT DISCONNECTING ALL PIPING AND ACCESSORIES. 23. PROVIDE CLAMPS, OFFSETS, EXPANSION JOINTS, ANCHORS AND GUIDES AS NECESSARY TO PREVENT STRESS ON PIPING. 24. ALL PIPING SHALL BE INSTALLED AT RIGHT ANGLES OR PARALLEL TO BUILDING WALLS. DIAGONAL RUNS ARE PROHIBITED UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 25. DEFRAY ALL COSTS INCIDENTAL TO THE GAS PIPING SYSTEM. CONTRACTORS WORK SHALL COMMENCE ON THE HOUSE SIDE OF THE UTILITY COMPANY METER. 26. PROVIDE A GASCOCK, UNION AND MINIMUM 4" DIRTLEG AT EACH GAS APPLIANCE CONNECTION. 27. THIS CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR EXTENDING ALL REGULATOR VENTS TO ATMOSPHERE. 28. GAS PIPING AND SAFETY DEVICES SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE STATE AND LOCAL CODES AND NFPA 54 AND SHALL BE SUBJECT TO THE INSPECTION AND APPROVAL OF THE STATE REGULATORY BOARD. PLUMBING LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION NG NATURAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE 0 PIPE TURNED UP h PLUG VALVE 0 PIPE TURNED DOWN PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE CAPON LINE P-1 FIXTURE IDENTIFICATION PLUMBING ABBREVIATIONS ABV -ABOVE FD - FLOOR DRAIN AFF - ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR FLR - FLOOR AP -ACCESS PANEL HW - HOT WATER ASSEM - ASSEMBLY HWR - HOT WATER RETURN BF - BELOW FLOOR PLBG - PLUMBING BFF - BELOW FINISH FLOOR SAN - SANITARY BLW - BELOW ST - STORM CO - CLEANOUT TYP - TYPICAL CONN - CONNECTION US - UNDER SLAB CONT -CONTINUATION V - VENT CW - COLD WATER W - WASTE DN - DOWN WCO - WALL CLEANOUT DW -DOMESTIC WATER WTR - WATER PSI - POUND PER SQUARE INCH CFH - CUBIC FEET PER HOUR CODE CRITERIA FLORIDA BUILDING CODE: 2017 FLORIDA BUILDING CODE 6TH EDITION - BUILDING 2017 FLORIDA BUILDING CODE 6TH EDITION - FUEL GAS 2017 FLORIDA BUILDING CODE 6TH EDITION - MECHANICAL 2017 FLORIDA BUILDING CODE 6TH EDITION - PLUMBING 2017 FLORIDA BUILDING CODE 6TH EDITION - ENERGY CONSERVATION FLORIDA FIRE PREVENTION CODE: 2017 FLORIDA FIRE PREVENTION CODE BASED ON: NFPA 1, FIRE CODE, 2015 EDITION, NFPA 101, LIFE SAFETY CODE, 2015 EDITION HANDICAP ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS: FLORIDA AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT: SECTION 553.501-553.514, F.S. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI): ANSI A117.1 NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA): 2015 EDITION, NFPA 1- FIRE CODE 2013 EDITION, NFPA 13 - STANDARD FOR THE INSTALLATION OF SPRINKLER SYSTEMS NOTE: ALL FIRE SPRINKLER WORK, INCLUDING CHANGES, ADDITIONS, RELOCATIONS, IMPROVEMENTS, AND/OR MODIFICATIONS TO THE FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, MUST BE DONE PER NFPA-13 EDITION, BY A LICENSED FIRE SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR WITH SEPARATE PERMIT AND PLANS. 2014 EDITION, NFPA 70 - NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE 2013 EDITION, NFPA 72 - NATIONAL FIRE ALARM AND SIGNALING CODE. NOTE: ALL FIRE ALARM WORK, INCLUDING CHANGES, ADDITIONS, RELOCATIONS, IMPROVEMENTS, AND/OR MODIFICATIONS TO THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM, MUST BE DONE PER NFPA-72 2010 EDITION, BY A LICENSED FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR WITH SEPARATE PERMIT AND PLANS. 2015 EDITION, NFPA 90A - STANDARD FOR THE INSTALLATION OF AIR-CONDITIONING AND VENTILATING SYSTEMS 2015 EDITION, NFPA 90B - STANDARD FOR THE INSTALLATION OF WARM AIR HEATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 2010 EDITION, NFPA 91- STANDARD FOR EXHAUST SYSTEMS FOR AIR CONVEYING OF VAPORS, GASES, MISTS, AND NONCOMBUSTIBLE PARTICULATE SOLIDS 2015 EDITION, NFPA 92 - STANDARD FOR SMOKE -CONTROL SYSTEMS 2015 EDITION, NFPA 99 - HEALTH CARE FACILITIES CODE 2015 EDITION, NFPA 101- LIFE SAFETY CODE 2013 EDITION, NFPA 241- STANDARD FOR SAFEGUARDING CONSTRUCTION, ALTERATION, AND DEMOLITION OPERATIONS. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC. (UL): 2015 EDITION, FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY SPECIAL REGULATIONS, SUPPLEMENT, AND AMENDMENTS OF THE STATE AND/OR LOCAL AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION PLUMBING SHEET INDEX NUMBER SHEET NAME P0.1 PLUMBING NOTES, SCHEDULES, LEGENDS, AND SHEET INDEX P1.1 PLUMBING OVERALL SITE PLAN P2.1 PLUMBING -NEW CONSTUCTION PLAN p i O O Q1 ~ O O Ln Q z c m m u Ln bi N N bi �x W0 W O ° LL w a. z _z mommi 0 (5 5 H 0 z a w UA w Z m J N a N 00 - M J t N �O tp V r- Z M M Lu O W b - > O Q LL u C_ o Z 40 - cv = LI 3 LLJ Lu d N N 2 4 Q U J a W IV W O x Z aLA � M V M m CC a LL W 41 in L.s a L 11.4 CL a M N NETI�yy0 No 48454 * % 'O Q! - Q� • STATE OF '•.F�ORIDP.•'•���� s Donald Netinho Jr., P.E. PE 48454 ISSUE DATE: 10/19/2018 PROJECT NUMBER: 2847 REVISIONS: NO. DATE DESCRIPTION PLUMBING NOTES, SCHEDULES, LEGENDS, AND SHEET INDEX TO THE BEST OF THE ENGINEERS KNOWLEDGE, THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS COMPLY WITH THE APPLICABLE MINIMUM BUILDING CODES AND THE APPLICABLE FIRE -SAFETY STANDARDS AS DETERMINED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY IN ACCORDANCE WITH CHAPTER 553.79 AND CHAPTER 633, FLORIDA STATUTES. © 2018 APG ENGINEERING Pon 1 1 1 1 II I I ' I I I____ __ I fill .14 }m CIO 0 Z Y o u z <_cr 0 u a -- �------------------------ 1 I` e EXISTING NATURAL GAS I , a I METER LOCATION x f° � f 3�01,10.01F — — — — — — — — — — — � 1 � _ � I ] PROPOSED LOCATION OF NEW-._.__..______.__..{ EMERGENCY GENERATOR......_. -- ! T---.---------...... ------ I 1 t ¢ S t � '°°�,-s� � , ! � `'1 „„ •off , 1 ------------ F7 } k � S f { # ] • ! F y , it £ k ijijij((( t i t[{ 66y 3 k fift ; i I i > F { I � ' i � # N PLUMBING ,. 1l = 20'-011 SITE PLAN 0' 10, 20' 40' TO THE BEST OF THE ENGINEERS KNOWLEDGE, THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS COMPLY WITH THE APPLICABLE MINIMUM BUILDING CODES AND THE APPLICABLE FIRE -SAFETY STANDARDS AS DETERMINED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY IN ACCORDANCE WITH CHAPTER 553.79 AND CHAPTER 63 3, FLORIDA STATUTES. © 2018 APG ENGINEERING Z C Ii * � •a) OO OO Ln Z C U V M M Z in l!1 tl N N ti W �° w LY ° LL a ZZ 0 H Z� a w LL V ZM W � J N a N 00 — M ot\ Z M M Lu cu W — t > O a) Q LL. Q Q) _c L u c o � to 1 = 3 LU i W CL N 0) "t Q u it a W N W � D O O Q Z W Q ,mow Y , V w =� (n 0.0 C D LPL W a 40 4.1 N ar Lu M s Z Q00a q M N E T l�yh,0 k o EIN �k No 48454 7J '. 441 O STATE OF <(/ ONA 1^f bol ld Netinho Jr., P.E. PE 48454 ISSUE DATE: 10/19/2018 PROJECT NUMBER: 2847 REVISIONS: NO. DATE DESCRIPTION PLUMBING OVERALL SITE PLAN Pi ■ o d Y ice+ V 7 d av }LI; co a Z Y 0 U Z cc 2 cc 0 U a asas..+«arao=rw� wfr►«r+�*��m,u�w.s NATURAL GAS PIPING UNDERGROUND BY GAS COMPANY. ft EXISTING GAS METER TO REMAIN. GAS COMPANY TO EXTEND SERVICE TO NEW GAS METER AT NEW GENERATOR FROM EXISTING GAS MAIN. E r e NATURAL GAS PIPING UNDERGROUND BY GAS COMPANY. 0 C I-. R:*- -:* 0Z .� O O Ln zu=encnu -LnLn _zbi tj m fV N 2 tj a P_ n W `�ii W LLI ° LL 3 Z 0 (5 0 zO Ir a w Lu w LL Z 00 N a N 00 — c» L N r- o Z cn M u Lu N O W to — > 0 Q LL u o 1 = LL1 3 u W a a000 Q) Q "t' V ■ +y.'"na41'W+iM'+!'M was■wwre''r"/,�°'�"..1'.`�a✓k..rtiw�rstYi�#�krs+r�v9Slea■+ML,994M°�rM°►*tr�'s+w"%a4 ■nssavry rr+. >»w�_..P•.-+-•-a,..�.,.*....+-^,.�+�-e^--�-.�.,-,�..r.,,..:,.,.�, , t d i J . >= ,. on ui NATURAL GAS PIPING RISE TO 3tt 0 , r 4o 1 V OS NEW GAS METER PROVIDED BY � W t, GAS COMPANY. + ■•ram ARAWNWIP 9 s - NEW NATURAL GAS METER PRV SET TO z .5 PSI „ '+ LI■■� � CC o 3" NG ° Z V 'p M W 0O C NEW NATURAL GAS a . V a ti GENERATOR WITH W 40 vs 4328 MBH LOAD a t r � ■ L � aIdeLu a M N PLUMBING - ENLARGED GENERATOR LOCATION 1/8" = 1'-0" 0, 4, 16, N PLUMBING - ENLARGED GAS METER LOCATION 1/8�� = 1�-0° 01 41 8' 16, NEW CONSTRUCTION LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION "- `° EXISTING TO REMAIN NEW CONSTRUCTION �© CONNECT TO EXISTING AT THIS POINT PAD NET/Al/y ��a� ��• �\CENSF' O✓� ��i No 48454 4u; Q ' STATE OF <(/ ��� •. CORID `G \\� ,,/11NA%1 Donald Netinho Jr., P.E. PE48454 ISSUE DATE: 10/19/2018 PROJECT NUMBER: 2847 REVISIONS: NO. DATE DESCRIPTION PLUMBING -NEW CONSTUCTION PLAN TO THE BEST OF THE ENGINEERS KNOWLEDGE, THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS COMPLY WITH THE APPLICABLE MINIMUM BUILDING CODES AND THE APPLICABLE FIRE -SAFETY STANDARDS AS DETERMINED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY IN ACCORDANCE WITH CHAPTER 553.79 AND CHAPTER 633, FLORIDA STATUTES. © 2018 APG ENGINEERING P2m 1 -IN �J-�